62683en PDF

GE Fanuc Automation
Motion Control Products
Power Mate H Motion Controller
Connection Manual
GFZ-62683EN/03 June 1998

GFL-001
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.
Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.
Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.
©Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

All Rights Reserved.
B–62683EN/03 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.
Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s–1
B–62683EN/03 Table of Contents
Definition Of Warning, Caution, And Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s–1
I. HARDWARE
1. PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OF CNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.2 POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.3 DESIGN ANDINSTALLATIONCONDITIONS OF THE TOOL MAGNETIC CABINET . . . . . . . 9
3.4 THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.1 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.2 Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4.3 Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.5 INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5.1 Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5.2 Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.5.3 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.5.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.6 ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.1 Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.6.2 Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.6.3 Connecting the Frame Ground (FG) of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.6.4 Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.6.5 Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.7 CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.7.1 Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.7.2 Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
3.8 CABLE LEAD–IN DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.9 CONNECTOR LAYOUT OF UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4. TOTAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 CONNECTION DIAGRAM AT USING BUILT–IN I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2 CONNECTION DIAGRAM AT USING BUILT–IN I/O CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

5.1 POWER SUPPLY CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
5.2 POWER CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
5.3 POWER TURN–ON SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.4 POWER TURN–OFF SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.5 MOMENTARY POWER FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

6.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.2 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
c–1
Table of Contents B–62683EN/03
6.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

6.2.3 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.3 CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O UNIT–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.3.1 Structure of I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.3.2 Outer Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.3.3 Mounting and Dismounting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.3.4 Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6.3.5 Connecting Input Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.3.6 Grouding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.3.7 Connecting Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
6.3.8 Connecting with I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.3.9 Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.3.10 Correspondence between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6.3.11 Number of Points for I/O Unit–MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
6.4 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.4.1 Input signal specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6.4.2 Output Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
6.5 CONNECTION OFI/O CARD D/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
6.5.1 Connector Layout for I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
6.5.2 Details of DI connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
6.5.3 Details of DO connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
6.5.4 Dimensions of I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
6.6 CONNECTION OF BUIL–IN I/O CARD C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.6.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
6.6.2 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.6.3 Machine interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6.6.5 Details of DO connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.7 CONNECTION TO INTERNAL I/O UNITS (HIGH–SPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE) . . . . . . . 111
6.7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.7.5 High–speed Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
6.7.6 Details of DO Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.8 CONNECTION TO FANUC I/O LINK–II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.9 CONNECTION USING PROFIBUS–DP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
6.10 CONNECTION USING GENIUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.10.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.10.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.10.4 Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.10.5 Genius Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
6.10.6 Mechanical Interface of Built–in I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.10.7 Details of DI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
6.10.8 Details of DO Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

7.1 CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE (SIMULTANEOUS BLOCK START INTERFACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
7.1.2 CRT Interface (with Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
7.1.3 CRT Interface (without Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
7.1.4 Interface Between Multiple Power Mates (with Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
7.1.5 Interface between Multiple Power Mate (without Simultaneous Block Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
c–2
B–62683EN/03

7.1.6 Device Selection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

7.1.7 Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.1.8 Detachable CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7.1.9 CRT Terminating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
7.1.10 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
7.2 SEPARATE TYPE CRT/MDI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.2.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7.2.2 Video and Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
7.3 SEPARATE TYPE PDP/MDI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.3.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
7.3.2 Video and Power Supply Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
7.3.3 Adjusting the Separate Type PDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
7.4 SEPARATE TYPE LCD/MDI INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.4.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7.4.2 Video and Power Supply Interface (for Separate Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.4.3 Device Selection Switch Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.4.4 Adjusting the LCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.5 CONNECTION TO A DETACHABLE LCD/MDI UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.5.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.5.2 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.5.3 Detachable LCD/MDI Unit Connected to One Power Mate Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.5.4 When One Detachable LCD/MDI Unit is Shared by Multiple Power Mate Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.5.4.1 When the simultaneous block start function is not used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.5.4.2 When the simultaneous block start function is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
7.6 CONNECTION WITH THE DPL/MDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7.7 I/O DEVICE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.7.1 RS–232–C Interface Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.7.2 RS–232–C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
7.7.3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE and Handy File Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
7.7.4 When External Power Supply Is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
7.8 EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
7.8.1 Diferential Input Type(Position Coder Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
7.8.2 Single–phase Input Type (Using a Manual Pulse Generator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
7.9 INTERFACE WITH SERVO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7.10 CONNECTION TO THE HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.10.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.10.2 Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.10.3 Connection Allowing the Handy Operator’s Panel to be Detached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
7.10.4 Keeping the Handy Operator’s Panel Connected at All Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.10.5 Power Mate Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.11 FANUC I/O LINK CONNECT UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
7.12 CONNECTING A TOUCH PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.12.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.12.2 Supported Touch Panels (Digital Corporation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.12.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
7.12.4 Power–on Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.12.5 Power Mate Data that can be Read from the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.12.6 Power Mate Data That Can Be Set Through the Touch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
7.12.7 Details of Cable J123 and the Terminating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
7.13 HIGH–SPEED SERIAL BUS INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
7.13.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
7.13.2 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
7.13.3 Supplement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
c–3
7.14 ANALOG SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

7.14.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.14.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.14.3 Axis Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
7.14.4 Details of Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
7.14.5 Parallel/Serial Interface Conversion Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
7.14.6 Parameter Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
II. PMC INTERFACE

1. ADDRESS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
2. SIGNAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

2.1 I/O SIGNAL LIST (ORDER OF GROUP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
2.2 I/O SIGNAL LIST (ORDER OF SYMBOL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
3. READY SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

3.1 CNC READY SIGNAL (OUTPUT) MA<F001#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
3.2 SERVO READY SIGNAL (OUTPUT) SA <F000#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

4.1 EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL (INPUT) *ESP <X000#4, X1000#4, G008#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
4.2 EXTERNAL RESET SIGNAL (INPUT) ERS <G008#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
4.3 RESET & REWIND SIGNAL (INPUT) RRW <G008#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
5. STATUS SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

5.1 ALARM SIGNAL (OUTPUT) AL <F001#0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.2 BATTERY ALARM SIGNAL (OUTPUT) BAL <F001#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.3 RESET SIGNAL (OUTPUT) RST <F001#1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
5.4 REWINDING SIGNAL (OUTPUT) RWD <F000#0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.5 MOVING DIRECTION SIGNALS MVDn <F106> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
5.6 IN-POSITION SIGNALS INPn <F104> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
5.7 ALARM CLASSIFICATION SIGNAL (OUTPUT) ALPS1 TO ALPS3,
ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, ALSV <F250#0 TO #6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
5.8 APC ALARM TYPE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) APCMn, APOVn, APFEn,
APPEn, APPSn, APBZn, APBVn, APBLn <F236 TO F241> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5.9 DISPLAY OF ALARMS FROM PMC (INPUT) PAL0 TO PAL6, PALM <G225> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
5.10 AXIS STATUS SIGNAL (OUTPUT) INPn<F104#0>, SUPn <F220#1 TO F225#1>,
IPLn <F220#2 TO F225#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5.11 AXIS IN–MOTION SIGNAL MVn<F102> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
6. MODE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

6.1 MODE SELECT SIGNAL (INPUT) MD1, MD2, MD4 <G043#0 TO #2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
6.2 OPERATION MODE CONFIRMATION SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
7. JOG FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

7.1 FEED AXIS DIRECTION SELECT SIGNAL (INPUT) +Jn, –Jn, <G100, G102 > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
c–4
B–62683EN/03

7.2 MANUAL FEEDRATE OVERRIDE (INPUT) *JV0 TO *JV15<G010,G011> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

7.3 MANUAL RAPID TRAVERSE SELECT SIGNAL (INPUT) RT<G019#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.4 RAPID TRAVERSE OVERRIDE SIGNAL (INPUT) ROV1, ROV2 <G014#0, #1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.5 MANUAL ABSOLUTE SIGNAL (INPUT) *ABSM <G006#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8. INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
8.1 INTERLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) *IT<G008#0>, *RILK<X000#6, X1000#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.2 AXIS INTERLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) *ITn <G130> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
8.3 INTERLOCK SIGNAL FOR EACH AXIS AND DIRECTION (INPUT) +MITn,
–MITn <G132, G134> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
9. INCREMENTAL FEED SIGNAL (INPUT) MP1, MP2 <G019#4,#5> . . . . . . . . . . . 271
10.REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

10.1 1ST REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10.2 2ND, 3RD REFERENCE POSITION RETURN SIGNALS (OUTPUT) ZP2n,
ZP3n <F096, F098> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.3 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT SIGNAL (OUTPUT) ZRFn <F120> . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
10.4 DOGLESS REFERENCE POSITION SETTING SIGNAL (INPUT) ZRn <G206#4, G211#4> . . . . 279
10.5 REFERENCE POSITION EXTERNAL SETTING SIGNAL ZPEXTn (INPUT) <G206#6,
G207#6, G208#6, G209#, G210#6, G211#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
10.6 SIGNAL FOR BUMP–TYPE REFERENCE POSITION SETTING (OUTPUT)
CLRCHn <F180> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
11.MEMORY PROTECTION KEY (INPUT) KEY1 TO KEY4 <G046#3-#6> . . . . . . . 291
12.AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

12.1 CYCLE START SIGNAL (INPUT) ST <G007#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
12.2 FEED HOLD SIGNAL (INPUT) *SP <G008#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
12.3 CYCLE START LAMP SIGNAL (OUTPUT) STL <F000#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
12.4 FEED HOLD LAMP SIGNAL (OUTPUT) SPL <F000#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
12.5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION SIGNAL (OUTPUT) OP <F000#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12.6 WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH SIGNAL (INPUT) PN0 TO PN7 <G009> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
12.7 MACHINE LOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) MLK <G044#1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.8 SINGLE BLOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) SBK <G046#1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
12.9 DRY RUN SIGNAL (INPUT) DRN <G046#7 > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.10 FEED RATE OVERRIDE SIGNAL (INPUT) *FV0 TO *FV7 <G012> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.11 OVERRIDE CANCEL SIGNAL (INPUT) OVC <G006#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
12.12 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP SIGNAL (INPUT) BDT (BDT1), BDT2-BDT9 <G044#0,G045> . . . . . 302
12.13 MIRROR IMAGE SIGNAL (INPUT) MIn <G106> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
13.SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE (OUTPUT) CUT <F002#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
14.SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 <F254 #0 TO #2> . 306
15.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
c–5
15.1 M FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

15.1.1 M Function at 1–path Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
15.1.2 M Code in Multipath Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
15.2 DISTRIBUTION END SIGNAL (OUTPUT) DEN <F001#3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
15.3 M DECODE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 <F009#7,#6, #5, #4> . . . . . . . . . 313
15.4 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK SIGNAL (INPUT) AFL <G005#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
15.5 WAITING FUNCTION(OUTPUT) WAT1 TO WAT4 <F209#0 TO #3>,
(INPUT) WFN1 TO WFN4 <G214#0 TO #3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
15.6 SIMULTANEOUS BLOCK START (M821 TO M827) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
16.PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE FUNCTION (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
17.SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING (INPUT) +LMn <G110>,

–LMn <G112>, RLSOT <G007#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
18.SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4<X000#7, #0, #1, #2>
<X1000#7, #0, #1, #2> SKIPP <G212#7> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
19.MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

19.1 SERVO OFF SIGNAL (INPUT) SVFn <G126> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
19.2 FOLLOW-UP SIGNAL (INPUT) *FLWU <G007#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
19.3 SERVO POSITION DEVIATION MONITOR SIGNAL (OUTPUT) SVERn,
<F220#3 TO F225#3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
20.I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
21.EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
22.FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
23.CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

23.1 CUSTOM MACRO SIGNAL(INPUT) UI0 TO UI15 <G054, G055>,
(OUTPUT) UO0 TO UO131 <F054 TO F059> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
23.2 INTERRUPT SIGNAL FOR CUSTOM MACROS (INPUT)UINT <G053#3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
24.TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL ACT <G213#7> . . . . . . . . . . . 349
25.AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
26.TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

26.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
26.2 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
26.3 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION BASED ON PARAMETER INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
26.4 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION BASED ON DI SIGNAL INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
26.5 TORQUE CONTROL FUNCTION BASED ON INPUT FROM THE PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
c–6
B–62683EN/03

27.SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)

IGNVRY <G066#0> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
28.CONTROLLED AXES DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

28.1 CONTROLLED AXIS DETACH SIGNALS DTCHn<G124#0 TO #5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
28.2 CONTROLLED AXIS DETACH STATUS SIGNALS MDTCHn <F110#0 TO #5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
29.FEEDRATE SWITCH SIGNAL EXF1 <X000#0,X1000#0>,

EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
30.RETURN SIGNAL (INPUT) RTN11 TO RTN16 <G206#0 TO G211#0>,

RTN21 TO RTN26 <G206#1 TO G211#1>,
RTN31 TO RTN36 <G206#2 TO G211#2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
31.V–READY WAITING SIGNAL (OUTPUT) WVRDY;<F209#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
32.SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT INCORPORATE A PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

32.1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
32.2 SPECIFICATIONS OF A SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT INCORPORATE A PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
32.3 INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
32.4 ADDRESS LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
32.5 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
33.HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

33.1 KEY INPUT ON THE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
33.2 LED ON/OFF INFORMATION OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
33.3 KEY INPUT ON PANEL OF FANUC STANDARD UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
33.3.1 Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
33.3.2 Symbolic Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
33.4 FANUC STANDARD UNIT LED ON/OFF INFORMATION OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
33.4.1 Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
33.4.2 Symbolic Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
33.5 SUPPLEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
33.5.1 Necessary Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
33.5.2 Setting Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
33.5.3 Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
APPENDIX
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
D. INTERFACE CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
c–7
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

H.1 PARAMETERS OF SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
H.2 PARAMETER OF READER/PUNCH INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
H.3 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL/INCREMENT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
H.4 PARAMTERS OF COORDINATES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
H.5 PARAMETERS OF STROKE LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
H.6 PARAMETERS OF FEEDRATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
H.7 PARAMETERS OF ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
H.8 PARAMETERS OF SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
H.9 PARAMETERS OF DI/DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
H.10 PARAMETERS OF CRT/MDI, DISPLAY, AND EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
H.11 PARAMETERS OF PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
H.12 PARAMETERS OF TOOL COMPENSATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
H.13 PARAMETERS OF CUSTOM MACROS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
H.14 PARAMETERS RELATED TO PATTERN DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
H.15 PARAMETER OF SKIP FUNCTION, PICTURE DISPLAY, AND ITP SYNCHRONOUS . . . . . . . 510
H.16 PARAMETERS OF DISPLAYING OPERATION TIME AND NUMBER OF PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . 511
H.17 PARAMETERS OF EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
H.18 PARAMETERS OF REFERENCE POINT SETTING FUNCTION BY PRESSING AXIS
TO STOPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
H.19 PARAMETERS OF AXIS CONTROL BY PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
c–8
I. HARDWARE
B–62683EN/02 HARDWARE 1. PREFACE
1
This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

for connecting the power motion controller VFANUC Power
Mate–MODEL H (abbreviation : Power Mate–H) to a machine. The
manual outlines the components commonly used for FANUC CNC
control units, power motion controller as shown in the configuration
diagram in Chapter 2, and supplies additional information on using these
components with the Power Mate–H. Refer to individual manuals for the
detailed specifications of each model.
The devices should be connected and installed according to this
connection manual.
The model covered by this manual, and this abbreviation is :

Product Name Abbreviations
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL H Power Mate–H Power Mate
Related manuals The table below lists manuals related to the Power Mate–H.
In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
Table 1 Manuals related to the Power Mate–H

Specification
Manual name
Number
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL H B–62682EN
DESCRIPTIONS
*
CONNECTION MANUAL
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL B–62714EN
PROFIBUS–DP OPERATOR’S MANUAL B–62924EN
3
2. CONFIGURATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
2 CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the configuration of the electrical system of

the machine tool with which the Power Mate–H is used.
This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.
The machine tool body, machine operator’s panel, power magnetic
circuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are the
builder’s responsibility. This manual does not cover the internal
connection of these units to the machine tool. The numbers in parentheses
shown in the diagram are section references for this manual.
4
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 2. CONFIGURATION
Machine tool magnetic cabinet
Power
Heat
supply Distribution
exchanger
24V DC board
(3.6)
(5.2)
CRT/MDI unit (7.1)

to (7.5)
Power Mate H DPL/MDI unit (7.6)
(7.7) I/O device
Relay
connector
Computer
(7.9)
Servo Servo motor

amplifier Note3
Internal I/O
Built–in I/O Note 2
card (7.8)
(6.7) External pulse
(6.6) generator
Machine
operator’s
I/O unit panel
Note1 (6.3)
or
Power
magnetic Sensor/actuator
I/O card circuit
(6.5)
NOTE 1 Refer to the “FANUC I/O Unit Model A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B-61813E)”.
NOTE 2 Refer to the “FANUC CONTROL MOTOR AMPLIFIER DESCRIPTIONS (B-65162E)”.
NOTE 3 Refer to the “FANUC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS (B-65142E)”or “FANUC SERVO
MOTOR β series DESCRIPTIONS (B–65232EN)”.
5
3. INSTALLATION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
3 INSTALLATION
6
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 3. INSTALLATION
3.1 The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
ENVIRONMENTAL this manual ”cabinet” refers to the following:
REQUIREMENTS OF D Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing
CNC the control unit or peripheral units;
D Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by
FANUC ;
D Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder,
for housing the CRT/MDI unit or operator’s panel.
D Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these internal cabinets
shall conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation
and design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.
Inter of cabinet :
Temperature In operation
0_C to 55_C
Room temperature In store or transportation –20_C to +60_C
Change in
1.1°C/minute max.
temperature
30% to 95%
Relative humidity
(no condensation)
Vibration In operation: 0.5G or less
Inter of units: Each unit should be placed in a cabinet
to keep it from pollutants (such as dust, coolant, or-
ganic solvents, acid, corrosive gas, and salt).
Environment
Heat sink of outer of cabinet: The heat sinks should
be protected from direct exposure to coolant, lubri-
cant, and metal chips.
Radiation If a unit is to be used in an environment where it is

likely to be exposed to radiations (such as microwave,
(ionizing or nonion-
ultraviolet rays, laser beams, and X–rays), a shielding
izing)
provision should be available for it.
Height above sea
Up to 1,000 m
level
7
3.2 The units listed below require an external regulated supply voltage of 24
VDC 10% (including an instantaneous value).
POWER CAPACITY
Table 3.2 Power supply capacity
Unit Power supply capacity
Power Mate–H control unit 1.8 A (Another 1A required for the FANUC
RS–232–C device is used) (*)
CRT/MDI unit 1.0 A

Picture display CRT/MDI
unit
Separate type CRT unit 0.8 A
Separate type MDI unit 0.2 A

Picture display separate
type MDI unit
Separate type PDP unit 2.0 A
Separate type LCD unit 0.8 A
Detachable LCD/MDI unit 1.0 A
Handy operator’s panel 0.2 A
External I/O card 500 + 7.3 x n (mA) where n is the number of in-
put points that are turned on simultaneously (*)
I/O Unit-A The required current varies depending on the

number of modules. Refer to the I/O Unit–MOD-
EL A Connection and Maintenance Manual
(B–61813E).
I/O Link connection unit 0.2 A
NOTE
(*) The Power Mate–H requires an additional 24–V power
supply for DOs. See descriptions about the output signal in
Chapter 6 for details.
8
3.3 When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions

described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
DESIGN AND CRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
INSTALLATION considered. The cabinet design must meet the following conditions :
CONDITIONS OF THE D The cabinet must be fully closed.
TOOL MAGNETIC The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne
CABINET dust,coolant,and organic solvent.
Cabinets that let in air may be designed for the servo amplifier and
servo transformer provided that they (only when CE marking is not
supported):
- Use an air filter on the air inlet ;
- Place the ventilating fan so that it does not blow air directly toward
the unit;
- Control the air flow so that no dust or coolant enters the air outlet
D The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperature
of 10°C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air when
the temperature in the cabinet increases.
See Section 3.4 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.
(Be sure to maintain the ambient temperature in the cabinet of the unit
between 0°C and +55°C.)
D A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within.
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
CAUTION : If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust
easily adheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.
D For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between
each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
D Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in order
to seal the cabinet.
Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximately 11 kV, airborne
dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed, dust passes
through the gap and adheres to the unit. This may cause the insulation
of the unit to deteriorate.
Acceptable packing materials :
- Epton sealer No. 686, NITTO INDUSTRY CO., LTD.
- Polyurethane foam (ester) covered with vinyl chloride, FUJI
RUBBER CO., LTD.
D The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolant
cannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dust–proof front
panel.
D Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the power motion controller are reduced in size,
the parts that generate noise may be placed near noise–sensitive parts
in the magnetics cabinet.
The power motion controller is built to protect it from external noise.
Cabinet design to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from
being transmitted to the power motion controller is necessary. See
section 3.6 for details of noise elimination/management.
9
D The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
D Allow a space the control unit in order to make it easy to remove
built–in I/O card cables and DPL/MDI cable.
D The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.
Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generally must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, cover the screen with a magnetic shield.
D The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.
Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall
extend from the bottom of this
unit.)
Bottom
D To ensure conformity to the EMC command, refer to ”Conforming to

the EMC Command (A–72937).”
10
3.4 The internal air temperature of the cabinet is higher than the outside
temperature because the units and parts installed in the cabinet generate
THERMAL DESIGN heat. Since the generated heat is radiated from the surface of the cabinet,
OF THE CABINET the temperature of the air in the cabinet and the outside air balance at
certain heat levels. If the amount of heat generated is constant, the larger
the surface area of the cabinet, the less the internal temperature rises. The
thermal design of the cabinet refers to calculating the heat generated in the
cabinet, evaluating the surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that
surface area by installing heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary.
Such a design method is described in the following subsections.
3.4.1 The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/°C
Temperature Rise per 1m2 surface area, that is, when the 6W heat source is contained in a
cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
within the Cabinet cabinet rises by 1°C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the
difference in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air
to arbitrary temperature (°C) or less when the temperature in the cabinet
rises:
Internal heat loss P [W] x
6[W/m2⋅°C] × surface area S[m2]× rise in temperature [°C]
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24W/°C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10°C under these
conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240W. If the actual internal
heat is 320W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by 13°C or
more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet must be
improved using the heat exchanger described next.
3.4.2 If the temperature rise cannot be limited by the cooling capacity of the
Cooling by Heat cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger forcibly
applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to the
Exchanger cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges the
surface area. Section 3.5 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows :
6W/m2⋅°C × 4m2 + 9.1W/°C= 33.1W/°C
The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10°C.
See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.
11
3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit Name Heat loss
Power Mate–H control unit 35W
CRT/MDI unit 18W
Picture display CRT/MDI unit
Separate type CRT unit 14W
Separate type MDI unit 4W
Picture display separate type MDI unit
Separate type PDP unit 20W
Separate type LCD unit 10W
5W + 0.175W number of
External I/O card
Input ON points
I/O Unit AIF01A, AIF01B 1.2W
AID32A, AID32B 1.2W + 0.23W number of
input ON points
AID16C, AID16D 0.1W + 0.21W number of
input ON points
AID32E, AID32F 0.1W + 0.23W number of
input ON points
I/O Link connection unit 4W
See FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E)

for heat loss of servo amplifier.
12
3.5 Table 3.5 lists the heat exchangers.Cooling fins A, B and C are not
provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor is required for any of these
INSTALLING THE cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
HEAT EXCHANGER
Table 3.5 List of Heat Exchangers
Ordering Cooling
Name Size
specification capacity
Cooling fin A A02B–0053–K303 9.1W/°C 196 90 1000mm
Cooling fin B A02B–0053–K304 10.1W/°C 444 90 650mm
Cooling fin C A02B–0053–K305 25.2W/°C 560 90 970mm
Heat pipe type

A02B–0094–C901 9.0W/°C 226 132 415mm
heat exchanger
Heat exchanger for

A02B–0060–K401 5.0W/°C 590 86 480mm
CRT/MDI unit
3.5.1 The cooling fin is shown in Fig. 3.5.1 (a).

Cooling Fin A/B/C
Viewed from cabinet mounting side
Fig.3.5.1(a) External view of cooling fin
13
It is installed in a cabinet made by the machine tool builder.

Cabinet
Cooling fin
Inside air flow
Outside
air flow
Fig.3.5.1(b) Internal view of cooling fin
The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig.3.5.1(b).

The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using the
cooling fins :
D The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should be
provided by the machine tool builder.
D Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air from
the top.
D The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,
generally decide the direction as follows :
- Bring in the air near high heat loss components.
- Exhaust the air toward the most important components to be
cooled.
D For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the air
inside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.
(velocity of air flow measurement)
Set the slit to the intake side and

measure the velocity at the slit.
D Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.
14
External dimensions
196 183
90 Fan mounting
100 plate Mounting metal for
136 cooling fins (sheet met-
Terminal block for al about 3mm thick).
fan motor G–04
70
1000
570
(Attached to the
cooling fins. Its Cooling fins
4–M4
685
mounting 10260 height is 20mm)

Mounting metal
screw for Fan motor
220
for cooling fins

cooling fins
70
136 24.7
5 150
45
24.7 Door
4–M4 5 Mounting plate
mounting screw 168 40 for fan motor
180
188
for fan mounting C15

plate
Mounting diagram (example)
570
770
260
PANEL CUT DRAWING NOTE1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting
metal for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling fins.
70
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.

45
164 NOTE2 Use two fan motors with about 50W power.
NOTE3 Weight : 6.5kg
Fig.3.5.1(c) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin A (02B–0053–K303)
15
External dimensions Mounting stud for cooling fins

(2 studs are attached for the top and the bottom)
444 90 Mounting plate
72
25
for fan motor
60
300
435
Cooling fins
300
650
Fan motor
124
14 116
25
72
6–6 dia
Mounting
10
350 10 432 6 Mounting hole
hole for 24 Mounting plate
fan motor 370 6 for fan motor
10 418
4–M4 24 Terminal block for fan motor G–04 Door
(Attached to the cooling fins.
4–M4 370 Its height is 20mm)
350 Mounting diagram (example)
(Mounting hole for
124
116
fan motor) Hole External shape

of cooling fins
300
358
400
30
135 60
Hole
25 300
6–6 dia. hole or

M5 stud bolt 432
Stud hole 5 dia

(Make a hole 5 dia. for NOTE1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the
fan motor) cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the machine tool builder.
NOTE2 Use four fan motors with about 20W power.
Panel cut drawing
NOTE3 Weight : 7.5kg
Fig.3.5.1(d) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B–0053–K304)
16
Mounting stud for cooling fins

External dimensions
(Attached to the cooling fins)
560 90 Mounting plate
23
for fan motor
115
335
60
695
266
315
266 Cooling fins
970
Terminal block
210
for fan motor
287
Fan motor
60
G–04
6–M4 (Attached to the
10 8–6 dia.
10
Mounting 37
35
233 cooling fins. Its mounting hole

hole for fan 213 548 6
520 6 height is 20mm)
motor 37
6 Mounting
6 548 plate for
5M–4 440 fan motor
(Mounting hole for Door 40
fan motor)
170
155
335
430 External shape of Mounting diagram (example)

cooling fins
5 DIA
315
(This hole
775
combines
6–6 dia. hole or M5 mounting hole
stud bolt
287
and stud hole.) NOTE1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not at-
60
tached to the cooling fins. Prepare them at the

machine tool builder.
10
514
25
NOTE2 Use two fan motors with about 40W power.

Panel cut drawing NOTE3 Weight : 13.5kg
Fig.3.5.1(e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B–0053–K305)
17
3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for
CRT/MDI Unit
External dimensions of External dimensions of
finger guard external cooling fun
Weight : 0.65kg
Air inlet
Packing
Power terminal
M4 screw
200VAC 50Hz
200/220VAC
60Hz
48W
Air outlet
Connector for Cooling fin : About 6kg

external cooling fan (Excluding attached parts)
NOTE) External cooling fan and finger guard are attached beside cooling fin.
Fig.3.5.2(a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI
(A02B–0060–K401)
18
Heat exchanger
Outside Inside
Air outlet
Air outlet
Main body of
(4) heat exchanger
(3)
Air inlet
(1) Prepare
External cooling fan
mounting
(attached)
screws and
Finger guard
mounting panel
(1) (attached)
(1) Use M5 screws to mount the heat exchanger.

(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install the panel where it can be exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet on heat exchanger mounting panel.
Fig.3.5.2(b) Mounting methods of heat exchanger for CRT/MDI
19
3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type
Heat Exchanger
3.5.3.1 The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
Installation of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heat–efficient unit. Because the fan is built–in, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the ”panel cut’ operation.
Specifications Installation format Installation type in board
Fan Cooling ability (W/°C) 9 (50Hz when operating)
specifications
Voltage (V) 200VAC
Frequency (Hz) 50 60
Rating current (A) 0.28 0.24
Rating input (W) 28 26
Weight (kg) 4
Color Munsell signal N1.5
Order specifications Heat exchanger A02B–0094–C901

Remarks
D A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.
D The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
D When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications
A90L–0001–0219#A
Filter specifications
A250–0689–X004
D If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.
20
External dimensions
17.5
Power
source AIR
terminal M4 FLOW
6–6 dia.
190
Earth
terminal
M4
External
415
fan unit
Internal
fan unit
190
AIR
FLOW
17.5
6 216 6 22.4 85
22.4
226
1.6
(Installation board thickness)

3
85
199
21
Panel cut dimensions
180
2.5
187.5
190
HOLE
6
175
190
3–5 dia.
6–6 dia. or stud welder (M4)
214
22
Installation method Please install the heat exchanger by the following sequence:
1 Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit. (Fig.
1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take out
the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the earth
cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the installation screw
B (1 piece).
2 Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section which
has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the screws,
first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger main unit
with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1). After that,
secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this case, the
external fan unit installation screw holes should be aligned with the
main unit screw holes. (Please provide the installation screws for the
heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw) : 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw) : 5 kgf.cm
3 Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit (the
unit detached in 1), and secure the installation screw A to the main unit
from the outside. (Fig. 2)
The installation is now complete.
Heat exchanger
main unit
Fan power cable

(detach the connector)
External fan unit
Installation screw B (1) Installation screws A (2)

Earth cable (if the installation screw on the
fan side is detached, it can be taken out.) Installation
screw Installation screw B (1)
Installation panel
Fig. 1 Take out the external fan unit from the Fig. 2 Install the heat exchanger main unit and
heat exchanger main unit the external fan unit
23
3.6 The motion controller has been steadily reduced in size using
surface–mount and custom LSI technologies for electronic components.
ACTION AGAINST The motion controller also is designed to be protected from external noise.
NOISE However, it is difficult to measure the level and frequency of noise
quantitatively, and noise has many uncertain factors. It is important to
prevent both noise from being generated and generated noise from being
introduced into the motion controller. This precaution improves the
stability of the motion controller machine tool system.
The motion controller component units are often installed close to the
parts generating noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise
sources into the motion controller are capacitive coupling,
electromagnetic induction, and ground loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in the following section.
3.6.1 The cables used for the machine are classified as listed in the following table:
Separating Signal Process the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Lines
Group Signal line Action
Primary AC power line Bind the cables in group A separate-
ly (Note 1) from groups B and C
C, or
Secondary AC power line cover group A with an electromag-
A AC/DC power lines (containing the power lines for the servo motors) netic shield (Note 2).
See Section 3.6.4
3 6 4 and connect
AC/DC solenoid
spark killers or diodes with the sole-
AC/DC relay noid and relay.
DC solenoid (24VDC) Connect diodes with DC solenoid
y
and relay.
DC relay (24VDC) Bind the cables in group B separate-
ly from group
grou A,
A or cover group
grou B
B DC power line with an electromagnetic shield.
Separate group B as far from Group
DI/DO cable between the motion controller and power magnetics cabinet C as possible.
DI/DO cable between the motion controller and machine It is more desirable to cover group B
with the shield.
Cable between the motion controller and servo amplifier Bind the cables in group C sepa-
rately from group A
A, or cover group
Cable for position and velocity feedback
C with
t an e ect o ag et c shield.
a electromagnetic s ed
External pulse input Separate g
group C as far from Group
C Cable between the motion controller and the CRT/MDI B as possible.
RS–232–C interface cable Be sure tto perform
B f shield
hi ld proces-
sing in Section 3.6.5.
Batery cable
Other cables to be covered with the shield
NOTE
1 The groups must be 100mm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.
24
Cabinet
Servo Servo Control

amp. amp. unit
Cable of group B, C
Duct
To operator’s
panel,
motor, etc.
Cable of group A Section
Group A Group B, C
Cover
25
3.6.2 The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:
Ground D Signal ground system (SG)
The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0V) of the
electrical signal system.
D Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames,
cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables between
the units are connected.
D System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.
Cabinet Unit
Signal ground system
Frame ground system
Power Servo CNC System ground system
magnet- amplifier control
ics unit
unit Operator’s
Cable panel
Machine
tool
Power
magnetics
cabinet
PC board
Distribution board
Notes on connecting the D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at only one
ground systems place in the Power Mate. (See 3.6.3)
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100 ohms or
less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough cross–sectional area to
safely carry the accidental current flow into the system ground when
an accident such as a short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the cross–sectional area of the AC power cable
or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system ground
wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire connected.
26
3.6.3 Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
Connecting the Frame ground plate of the cabinet via the frame ground (FG) terminal.
The SG terminal is located on the printed circuit board at the rear of the
Ground (FG) of the control unit.
Control Unit
Cabinet Air goes out.
Air comes in.
FG terminals
(Faston terminals at
the controller)
To the other grounded plates
See the note below. Distribution
switchboard
in the cabinet
Grounded plate for Grounded plate for

clamping cables clamping cables
To the cabinet
External distribution
switchboard
Class 3 grounding or
more strict grounding
MOST IMPORTANCE
Use the Faston terminals (A65L–0001–0148/2) for the frame ground. Also use 100 to 300 mm
stranded wire with a cross–section of 2 mm2 or more. Be sure to connect the frame ground of
the Power Mate to the grounded plates in the cabinet as shown above.
Otherwise, the Power Mate will be susceptible to noise.
27
3.6.4 The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
Noise Suppressor A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed. In general, to reduce this pulse voltage, a spark killer is
used in AC circuits, while a diode is used in DC circuits.
Spark killer D Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This
type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.(Use it under AC)
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
D The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R) : Equivalent DC resistance of the coil
I2 I2
2) Capacitance (C) : X (µF)
10 20
I : Current at stationary state of the coil
R C
Equivalent circuit of the spark killer
AC Spark killer
relay
Motor
Spark killer
Mount the noise eliminator near a motor or a relay coil.
NOTE Use a CR–type noise eliminator. Varistor–type noise eliminators

clamp the peak pulse voltage but cannot suppress a sharp
rising edge.
Diode
Diode (used for direct–current circuits)
– +
Diode
Use a diode which can withstand a
voltage up to two times the applied
DC relay voltage and a current up to two times
the applied current.
28
3.6.5 The Power Mate cables that require shielding should be clamped by the
Cable Clamp and method shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable
support and proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system
Shield Processing operation, follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. The ground plate must be
made by the machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate
Cable
Metal fittings
for clamp
40 to 80mm
Fig.3.6.5(a) Cable clamp (1)
29
ÇÇ
Machine side
installation
ÇÇ board
ÇÇ
Control unit
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Ground plate
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
Metal fittings
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
for clamp
Shield cover
Fig.3.6.5(b) Cable clamp (2)
Prepare ground plate like the following figure.
Ground terminal
(grounded)
Hole for securing metal fitting clamp
Mount screw hole
Fig.3.6.5(c) Ground plate
For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.
30
Ground
8mm plate
12mm
20mm
Fig.3.6.5(d) Ground plate holes
(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.
Max. 55mm
28mm
6mm
17mm
Fig.3.6.5(e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp
Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp

A02B–0124–K001 (8 pieces)
31
3.7
CONTROL UNIT
3.7.1 Spacing between the installed control units

Installation of the Leave at least 5 mm between the units.
Control Unit
70.0 or longer
10
360
10
65
32
The control unit consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a PCB. Since
the control unit is provided with built-in fan motors, it does not require
the external air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes
into the control unit from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor,
which is located on the top of the control unit. Space as shown in Fig.
3.7.1 must be reserved not to disturb the air flow (,)
Additionally, keep the space (approx. 100mm) as wider as possible to pull
or to out the built–in I/O card cable at maintenance and DPL/MDI cable.
AIR FLOW

50mm
100mm

33
3.7.2 Part programs, offset data, and system parameters are stored in CMOS
Battery for Memory memory in the control unit. The power to the CMOS memory is backed
up by a lithium battery mounted on the front panel of the control unit. The
Backup above data is not lost even when the main battery goes dead. The backup
battery is mounted on the control unit at shipping. This battery can
maintain the contents of memory for about a year.
The voltage of the battery becomes low, alarm message ”BAT” blinks on
the CRT or MDI display. If a display unit such as a CRT or DPL is
disconnected at all times, the battery alarm signal BAL <F001#2> is
output to the PMC. So, ensure that an alarm indication is provided, for
example, on the machine operator’s panel. When this alarm is displayed,
replace the battery as soon as possible. In general, the battery can be
replaced within one or two weeks, however, this depends on the system
configuration.
If the voltage of the battery becomes any lower, memory can no longer
be backed up. Turning on the power to the control unit in this state causes
system alarm 910 (RAM parity alarm) to occur because the contents of
memory are lost. Clear the entire memory and reenter data after replacing
the battery. To clear and reenter, it is required to save data in the memory
card or floppy.
The power to the control unit must be turned on when the battery is
replaced. If the battery is disconnected when the power is turned off, the
contents of memory are lost.
Observe the following precautions for lithium batteries:
WARNING
If an unspecified battery is used, it may explode.
Replace the battery only with the specified battery
(A02B–0118–K111).
Dispose of used batteries as follows:

D Small quantities
Discharge the batteries and dispose of them as ordinary nonflammable
garbage.
D Large quantities
Consult FANUC.
34
Replacing the Battery
Procedure for replacing the battery
WARNING
When replacing the memory backup batteries, keep the
power to the machine (Power Mate) switched on, and hold
the machine at an emergency stop. Because this work must
be carried out while the power is kept switched on and the
cabinet is open, only the personnel who have been trained
for safety are allowed to engage in the work. When
replacing the batteries, be careful not to touch the
high–voltage circuit section (marked and shielded with
a shock hazard prevention cover). If you touch the
high–voltage circuit section when it is uncovered, you will
get an electric shock.
1 Prepare lithium battery (A02B-0118-K111).

2 Turn the power of Power Mate ON.
3 Remove the battery in the battery holder at behind front panel of
control unit.
Control unit
Â
Â
Battery Â
(A02B–0118–K111)
Fig.3.7.2 Replacing the battery
35
4 Remove the connector of the battery.
BATTERY
Connector
in side of cable
Connector
in side of
P.C.B
Battery
5 Replace the battery, and connect the connector carefully not to

connect inversely.
6 Attache the battery holder.
7 Turn power of Power Mate OFF.
36
3.8
CABLE LEAD–IN
DIAGRAM
Air out
Weight : 2.2Kg
Air in
NOTE
Connectors JD14 and JD15 for the CRT link are provided on
the front of the unit. Never make connections to the
connectors at the lower part of the unit.
37
3.9
CONNECTOR
LAYOUT OF UNIT
Front Bottom face
fuse (5.0A)
Left side M4
CB 128 DPL/MDI
Built–in I/O
Memory card
+24VDC input Right side
CB 129
Built–in I/O FAS1
LED display Frame ground (FG terminal)
Rotary switch RSW JA23
Servo check1 (1st to 4th axis)
JA24
Servo AMP1 Servo check2 (5th to 6th axis)
Servo AMP2
Servo AMP3
Servo AMP4
Servo AMP5
Servo AMP6 NOTE

These are not the connectors
Position coder
for the CRT link.
I/O Link (master)

CRT/MDI
CRT/MDI common use from former CRT/MDI
CRT/MDI common use from latter CRT/MDI
Terminal resistant unit
I/O Link (slave) from former I/O unit
I/O Link (slave) to latter I/O unit
Built–in I/O
RS–232–C
38
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 4. TOTAL CONNECTION
4 TOTAL CONNECTION
39
4. TOTAL CONNECTION HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
4.1
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM AT USING
BUILT–IN I/O
Upper control unit
Power supply P.C. board
+24VDC power supply
Base P.C. board

Battery 3V for
RAM battery backup
Memory
card
Servo AMP (type B)
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
External pulse generator
Relay connector
Power magnetic
I/O card
Power magnetic
I/O UNIT–MODEL A
Power magnetic
CRT/MDI unit
Switch for selection

Terminal unit mode
(PCR connector)
Next Power Mate

NOTE 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
H50 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (50 pins) P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
H20 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (20 pins) BN3 : FCI, brown (3 pins)
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins)
NOTE 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
NOTE 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.
40
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 4. TOTAL CONNECTION
4.2
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM AT USING
BUILT–IN I/O CARD
Upper control unit
Power supply P.C. board

+24VDC power
supply
Base P.C. board
Battery 3V for
RAM battery backup
Memory
card
Servo AMP (type B)
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
Servo motor
External pulse generator
Relay connector
Built–in I/O card
Power magnetic
I/O card
Power magnetic
I/O UNIT–MODEL A
Power magnetic
CRT/MDI unit
Switch for selection
Terminal unit mode
(PCR connector)
Next Power Mate

NOTE 1 : Connector and terminal symbols
M : Male connector
F : Female connector
H50 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (50 pins) P20 : Honda Tsushin PCR connector (20 pins)
H20 : Honda Tsushin MR connector (20 pins) BN3 : FCI, brown (3 pins)
AMP3 : AMP Japan connector (3 pins) N2 : Japan Aviation Electronics (2 pins)
D15 : D–sub connector (15 pins) Y34 : Yamaichi
NOTE 2 : The +24 VDC power supply (marked #) and mode selection switch (marked #) should be prepared by the customer.
NOTE 3 : All cables except the RAM battery back–up battery cable should be prepared by the customer.
41
5. CONNECTION OF INPUT
POWER SUPPLY HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
5 CONNECTION OF INPUT POWER SUPPLY
42
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE POWER SUPPLY
5.1
POWER SUPPLY
CAPACITY
24 VDC capacity
J30 Power Mate–H
CP1
External power supply Controller
controller →1.8 A
24 VDC "10%
(for main unit) (Another 1A required for the
CB128, CB129 FANUC RS–232–C device is used.)
J86, J87
J48
CPD1 Power Mate–H
External power supply CRT/MDI
S CRT/MDI →1.0 A
24 VDC "10%
S PDP, MDI
(for display unit) PDP, MDI
→2.2 A
LCD, MDI
→1.0 A
I/O card
J24 I/O card →Approx.1.0 A
CP61
External power supply

I/O card
24 VDC "10% →Approx.0.7 A
(for I/O)
CMB3, CMB4
J90, J91
J24
CP32
I/O unit
NOTE
The above power supply capacity values only serve as
guidelines. They do not include the capacity required for
DOs.
43
Details of 24 VDC 24 VDC10% (including an instantaneous value)

1) Main unit power supply
The main unit requires a sum of the following currents.
D Control power supply: 1.8 A
D RS–232–C (if it draws power from the Power Mate–H): 1.0
A, additionally
D DOs of the internal I/O (if used): 0.5 A (maximum),
additionally
D DOs of the built–in I/O card (if used): 2.1 A (maximum),
additionally
NOTE
Detailed power requirement of the DOs of the internal I/O:
Total maximum load current for the DOs (including an
instantaneous value) plus 10 mA
Detailed power requirement of the DOs of the built–in I/O
card: Total maximum load current for the DOs (including an
instantaneous value) plus 10 mA
2) Power supply for the CRT, PDP and LCD

(CRT/MDI, separate CRT, separate PDP, separate LCD, and separate
MDI)
One of the following values applies.
D CRT/MDI: 1.0 A
D Separate CRT + separate MDI : 1.0 A
D Separate PDP + separate MDI : 2.2 A
D Separate LCD + separate MDI : 1.0 A
D Detachabe LCD/MDI : 1.0 A
3) Power supply for the IO
D IO card D (DI = 48; DO = 32): About 0.7 A + current for the
DOs to be used
D IO card E (DI = 96; DO = 64): About 1.0 A + current for the
DOs to be used
D I/O unit: Depends on the type of module.
NOTE
The detailed power requirement of the IO card is a sum of
the following values.
D Control circuit: 500 mA
D DI: 7.3 x n mA (where n is the number of input points
turned on simultaneously)
D DO: Total maximum load current for the DOs (including
an instantaneous value) + 10 mA provided that the
maximum is 4 A (for IO card D) or 6 A (for IO card E).
44
5.2 1) Power connection with the controller

POWER
CONNECTIONS Power Mate
External power source
CP1 (AMP)
1 +24V
J30
Â
2 0V +24VDC stabilized power source
3
24V10% DC
Â FG
Â (Note 1)
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
Class 3 grounding
Standard
A02B–0120–K324
Cable connection (J30)
CP1
1 24V10% DC
+24V Momentary case
is included
0V 2 0V
NOTE
1 Be sure to connect the frame ground.
2 When a momentary power failure occurs, the system is
restored to the same state as the state at power–on. To
determine whether a momentary power failure occurred,
see the description of the momentary power failure decision
signal ACT (II–24).
45
2) Connection to the frame ground of controller
Cabinet Air goes out.
Air comes in.
FG terminals
(Faston terminals at
the controller)
To the other grounded plates
See the note below. Distribution
switchboard
in the cabinet
Grounded plate for Grounded plate for

clamping cables clamping cables
To the cabinet
External distribution
switchboard
Class 3 grounding or
more strict grounding
Most important item

Use the Faston terminals (A65L–0001–0148/2) for the frame ground. Also use 100 to 300 mm
stranded wire with a cross–section of 2 mm2 or more. Otherwise, the CNC will be susceptible
to noise. Always connect FG of the Power Mate to the cabinet (grounded plate).
3) Power connection with the CRT

For detailed information about cable J48 and the frame ground, see
Subsec. 7.1.7 CRT/MDI unit interface.
4) Power connection with the I/O card (I/O unit)
For detailed information about cable J24 and the frame ground, see
Sec. 6.5 Connection of I/O card.
46
5.3
POWER TURN–ON 1) Servo amplifier and main unit power supplies
SEQUENCE
200 VAC power

for servo amplifier
24 VDC power 0 ms
for main unit or more
Turn on the 200 VAC servo amplifier power supply before the 24
VDC main unit power supply. Otherwise, a servo alarm numbered
anywhere between 400 and 499 may be issued.
2) 24 VDC power supply
D Main unit, CRT, PDP, and LCD power supplies
Normally turn on the power for the CRT/MDI unit before or, at
latest,simultaneously when the power for Power Mate–C control unit
is turned on. (This is not applied when the CRT/MDI unit is made
detachable.)
Power source for CRT/MDI unit
Power source for Power Mate body
200ms or less
If the power for the CRT/MDI unit is turned on after the power for
Power Mate body is turned on, it becomes impossible to execute
special operations while the power for Power Mate is on such as
memory all clear.
D Main unit and I/O power supplies
24 VDC power supply

for main unit
24 VDC power supply

for I/O 500 ms
or less
Turn on the 24 VDC I/O power supply before the 24 VDC main unit
power supply. (The maximum allowable time lag is 500 ms.)
47
D Power supply of Power Mate is I/O Link slave.
I/O Link master
I/O Link slave

500 ms
or less
Turn on the 24 VDC I/O Link slave power supply before the 24 VDC
I/O Link master power supply. (The maximum allowable time lag is
500 ms.)
Do not disconnect the battery for memory backup (3 VDC) or the
battery for the absolute pulse coders (6 VDC) regardless of whether
the power to the control unit is on or off. If batteries are disconnected
when the power to the control unit is turned off, current data stored
in the control unit for the pulse coders, parameters, programs etc, are
lost.
Make sure that the power to the control unit is on when replacing
batteries.
See Subsec. 3.7.2 for how to replace the batteries for memory backup.
48
5.4 Reverse the power turn–on sequence.

POWER TURN–OFF Motors cannot be controlled when the power is turned off or momentarily
interrupted. Take appropriate action on the machine side when necessary.
SEQUENCE For example, when the tool is moved along a vertical axis, apply brakes
to prevent the axis from falling. Apply a brake that clamps the motor when
the servo is not operating or the motor is not rotating. Release the clamp
only when the motor is rotating. When the servo axis cannot be controlled
when the power is turned off or momentarily interrupted, clamp the servo
motor. In this case, the axis may fall before the relay for clamping starts
operating. The designer should make sure if the distance results in trouble.
5.5 The Power Mate controller has a circuit for protection against momentary
power failures.
MOMENTARY
When a momentary power failure is detected, the Power Mate controller
POWER FAILURE turns off the output signals to the servo system and machine. Upon
recovery from the momentary power failure, the system is automatically
reset to turn on the output signals to the servo system and machine. Then
the Power Mate waits for automatic operation to be restarted. (The
operator restarts operation after checking the status.)
The signal ACT on the PMC is available to check if a momentary power
failure has occurred (See II–24).
49
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO
MACHINE INTERFACE HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
6 CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE
50
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE MACHINE INTERFACE
6.1 The Power Mate can be combined with the units shown in the table below
as I/O units for the machine interface.
GENERAL The I/O units can be classified into two types: the I/O units tailored to the
FANUC I/O Link, and the built-in I/O unit. The I/O units for the FANUC
I/O Link are installed separately from the control unit, and connected with
the control unit using the dedicated serial FANUC I/O Link.
As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installed
separately.
The FANUC I/O Unit-MODEL A is a modular-type I/O unit. It selects
necessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUC
according to the application and uses them as one external unit. The
FANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such an
external unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from the
machine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The states
of the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external units
at regular intervals.
The built-in I/O unit are two types. One is a built-in I/O card to be inserted
into the control unit. Another is an internal I/O to be inserted into base
P.C. board. Internal I/O and built–in I/O can not use together.
The built–in I/O card or internal I/O can be used together with an I/O unit
for the FANUC I/O Link.
Table 6.1 Machine interface I/O

Type Name DI/DO points
FANUC I/O option FANUC I/O Unit– Max. 256/256 per group
Link compatible MODEL A Max. 1024/1024 in total
I/O
I/O card D
(DI:48 DO:32)
I/O card E
(DI:96 DO:64)
Built–in I/O option Built-in I/O Card 32/24
Basic Internal I/O 8/4
CAUTION
To turn off the power to the motor, input the emergency stop
signal to both the CNC control unit and servo system
simultaneously. For details of applying the emergency stop
signal to the servo system, refer to FANUC CONTROL
MOTOR AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTIONS (B–65162E).
51
6.2
CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O Link
6.2.1 In FANUC I/O Link (omit as I/O Link) there are the master station and
General its slave stations. The master is the Controller of the Power Mate or
others, and the slaves are the I/O unit and I/O card. Power Mate can be
used as slave. The slaves are divided into groups, and up to 16 groups can
be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of two base I/O units can be
connected as a group. I/O card is counted as one group.
The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units (that have I/O Link function). A cable is always
connected from JD1A of a unit to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B
of the last unit is not used and left open, it need not be connected with a
terminator. Power Mate uses JD1A1 to connect I/O card etc... as a master,
and uses JD1A and JD1B to be slave controller of other CNC controller.
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.
An I/O unit for the I/O Link can be used together with a built–in I/O. Bit
3 (BIO) of parameter No. 3001 can be used to determine whether to enter
the emergency stop/high–speed interlock/skip/reference position return
deceleration signal through an I/O unit for the I/O Link or built–in I/O.
Power Mate FANUC I/O Link

JD1A1 I/O=256/256 or less per group
I/O=1024/1024 or less in total I/O Link
FANUC I/O Unit - MODEL A 2 max
Base unit 1 Base unit 2

JD1B
JD1A Magnetic
circuit
JD1B
JD1A
JD1B
JD1A
Max. 16
group
JD1B Machine
JD1A operator’s
Group I/O card panel
#3
Fig.6.2.1 I/O Link connection diagram
52
6.2.2
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric Control unit or preceding
slave unit
Cable
JD1A, JD1A1 JD1B
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–E20LMD) JD1A
(PCR–E20LMD)
1 SIN 11 0V JD1B 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V Next
4 14 0V 4 14 0V
*SOUT *SOUT slave
5 15 5 15
6 16 16
unit
6
7 17 J22 7 17
8 18 (+5V) 8 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19 9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V) 10 20 (+5V)
+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
CAUTION
Do not connect the +5V terminal when the Optical I/O Link
Adapter is not used.
Otherwise, the +5V terminal will be short–circuited, thus
damaging the unit.
Cable wiring (J22)
1 3
SIN SOUT
2 4
*SIN *SOUT
3 1
SOUT SIN
4 2
*SOUT *SIN
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
13 13
0V 0V
14 14
0V 0V
Shield
Recommended Cable Material

A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG×10pair)
NOTE
The wires of the pins (1,2) are connected to the pins (3,4),
and vice versa.
53
6.2.3 The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
Connection of FANUC with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O link adapter.
I/O Link Optical Fiber NOTE
Cable In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.
D When the cable length is 3m.
D When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is
impossible to connect the cabinets with a grounding wire
of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by
strong noise; for example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source
beside the cable such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable
runs fora long distance in parallel with the cable.
External dimension of
optical I/O link adapter
66.0
connector for unit
connecting JD1 40.0 4–M3
Optical connector
COP1
45.0
FANUC
7.0
18.0
Weight of optical I/O link Main body : Approx. 100 g.
adapter
Connection
D Connection diagram
Unit Unit
JD1 JD1
JD1A JD1B
COP1
Connecting COP1 Optical Connecting
cable between cable cable between
unit Optical I/O Optical I/O unit
link adapter link adapter
54
D Interunit connecting
cables
01 SIN 11 Unit side Adapter side

JD1A,JD1B JD1
02 *SIN 12
03 SOUT 13 SIN(01) (03)SOUT
04 *SOUT 14 *SIN(02) (04)*SOUT
05 15 SOUT(03) (01)SIN
06 16 *SOUT(04) (02)*SIN
07 17 +5V(09) (09)+5V
08 18 +5V(18) (18)+5V
09 +5V 19 +5V(20) (20)+5V
10 20 0V(11) (11)0V
0V(12) (12)0V
0V(13) (13)0V
0V(14) (14)0V
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V
D Recommended connector for cable side :

PCR–E20FS (made by HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
D Recommended cable (wire material) : A66L–0001–0284#10P
D Cable length : Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)
NOTE
Cross the cables for pins 1 and 2 as well as those for pins
3 and 4.
D Optical cable D Specification : A66L – 6001 – 0009

(Make sure to use one with this specification)
D Cable length: Max. 200 m
Power source D Power voltage : 4.75V to 5.25V (at the receiving end)
D Consumption current : 200mA
Installation conditions D The optical I/O link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it
with the Power Mate control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
D Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical I/O link
adapter.
D The optical I/O link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to
mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact
with other circuits to prevent possible short–circuits. When
mounting the optical I/O link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an
L–type fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical I/O
link adapter.
L fitting
55
Required parts For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, the following
parts are necessary:
D Optical I/O link adapter 2
D Interunit connecting cable 2
D Optical cable 1
56
6.3 The FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A (“I/O Unit”) is a modular–type I/O

unit. It interfaces the Power Mate with the machine when connected to
CONNECTION OF the Series 20 control unit via the I/O Link. One I/O unit can be configured
THE FANUC I/O by mounting the I/O modules required for either the 5– or 10–slot base
UNIT–MODEL A unit. A variety of I/O modules are provided so appropriate modules can
be selected according to the use, points, voltage level, current capacity,
and signal specifications. See Section 6.3.9 for further information.
6.3.1
Structure of I/O Unit Base Unit ABU05A(5 slots) or ABU10A(10 slots)
I/F 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)

Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B
AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O Link

AIF01B expands I/O Units in the same group.
6.3.2
Outer Dimensions
A (80) 142
130
90
B
20
ø5 (mounting hole)
A B
For 5–slot base unit (ABU05A) 253 238
For 10–slot base unit (ABU10A) 430 415
57
6.3.3 Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to
Mounting and and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
Dismounting Modules
Mounting
1 Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper side
of the base unit.
2 Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
3 Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.
Dismounting
1 Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the module.
2 Push the module upwards.
58
6.3.4
Connection Diagram
Power Mate
control unit
JD1A
Terminator TX
K1X I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A

AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32
24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X
AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
Max. CP32 PC32

16 ·
·
group · 24VDC 24VDC
K2X
K1X AIF01A AIF01B
JD1B
JD1A JD3
JD2 JD2
CP32 PC32
24VDC 24VDC
K2X
NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
See 6.2 “Connection of FANUC I/O Link” and 6.3.11
”Number of I/O points for the I/O Unit–A”.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
Refer to item 6.2.3.
59
6.3.5 Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the
Connecting Input interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).
Power Source D Voltage : 24VDC±10%
D Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.
FCI. tripolar connector (Brown)

Housing : SMS3PNS–5
Contact : RC16M–SCT3
FANUC specification : A02B–0072–K893
AIF01A/AIF01B
CP32
1 +24V
2 GND 24VDC
3
NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.
ON
Power for the
CNC device OFF
Power for the ON

I/O unit
OFF
t : more than –500ms

(Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500ms or less.)
60
6.3.6 D Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal
Grouding
Base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A)
M4 Screw
terminal
D When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in Subsec. 6.3.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table 6.3.6 Required current of each module

Required current (mA) of +24V
Mod le name
Module
A B
AIF01A 50
AIF01B 50
AID32A 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n
AID32B 20+0.5×n 30+7.5×n
AID16C 5
AID16D 5
AID32E 5
AID32F 5
AIA16G 5+1.5×n
AOD08C 5+2×n
AOD08D 5+2×n
AOD16C 5+2×n
AOD16D 5+2×n
AOD32C 5+0.5×n
AOD32D 5+0.5×n
AOA05E 5+5.5×n
AOA08E 5+5.5×n
AOA12F 5+4.5×n
AOR08G 5 10×n
AOR16G 5 10×n
AAD04A 5 130
n : Number of the input and output points (for each module) which turn
ON simultaneously
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should
not exceed 500 mA.
D The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.
61
6.3.7 Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
Connecting Signal connection diagram are as follows.
Cables
Cable K1X
Connector HONDA TSUSHIN

KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
or
Power Mate or AIF01A PCR–E20FA AIF01A
Case : PCR–V20LA
JD1A, JD1A1 JD1B
1 SIN 11 0V 1 SIN 11 0V
2 *SIN 12 0V 2 *SIN 12 0V
3 SOUT 13 0V 3 SOUT 13 0V
4 *SOUT 14 0V 4 *SOUT 14 0V
5 15 5 15
6 16 6 16
7 17 7 17
8 18 8 18
9 19 9 19
10 20 10 20
Cable connection
JD1A JD1B
JD1A1
SIN (1) (3) SOUT
SIN (2) (4) *SOUT
SOUT (3) (1) SIN
SOUT (4) (2) *SIN
0V (11) (11) 0V
0V (12) (12) 0V
0V (13) (13) 0V
0V (14) (14) 0V
D Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT
and *SOUT.
D Recommended cable material : A66L–0001–0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of the
cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
D Maximum cable length: 10 m
D Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
(See Subsec. 6.2.2)
D Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases] :
- When the cable is more than 10 meters long.
- When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
- When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise.
62
Cable K2X
Connector HONDA TSUSHIN

KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
or
AIF01A or PCR–E20FA AIF01B
AIF01B Case : PCR–V20LA
JD2 JD3
1 S1 11 S5 1 S1 11 S5
2 *S1 12 *S5 2 *S1 12 *S5
3 S2 13 S6 3 S2 13 S6
4 *S2 14 *S6 4 *S2 14 *S6
5 S3 15 0V 5 S3 15 0V
6 *S3 16 0V 6 *S3 16 0V
7 S4 17 ID2 7 S4 17 ID2
8 *S4 18 ID3 8 *S4 18 ID3
9 ID1 19 9 ID1 19
10 20 10 20
Cable connection
JD2 JD3
S1(1) (1)S1
*S1(2) (2)*S1
S2(3) (3)S2
*S2(4) (4)*S2
S3(5) (5)S3
*S3(6) (6)*S3
S4(7) (7)S4
*S4(8) (8)*S4
S5(11) (11)S5
*S5(12) (12)*S5
S6(13) (13)S6
*S6(14) (14)*S6
ID1(9) (9)ID1
ID2(17) (17)ID2
ID3(18) (18)ID3
0V(15) (15)0V
0V(16) (16)0V
D Connect the signals with the same name.

D Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:
S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3
S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6
D Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are used
internally.
D Recommended cable material : A66L – 0001 – 0284#10P
(twisted pair/shielded)
D Maximum cable length : 2 m
63
Terminator TX
AIF01B
Connector
JD2 HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20FS
1 11 Case : PCR–V20LA
2 12 TRM2
3 13
4 TRM1 14 TRM3
5 15
(a) Terminate the connector
6 16
7 17 JD2 of the last AIF01B in
8 18 a single group with the terminator.
9 19 TRM2
(b) Short–circuit the TRM1 signals
10 TRM1 20 TRM3
as shown. Repeat the shorting
procedure for signals TRM2
and TRM3.
Cable connection
JD2
TRM1 (4)
TRM1 (10)
TRM2 (12)
TRM2 (19)
TRM3 (14)
TRM3 (20)
64
6.3.8 For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
Connecting with I/O one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.
The terminal block is a removable type.
Modules
Terminal block type Connector type
Input/Output
display LED
A0 . . .7
B0 . . .7 Terminal
block cover
Connector
HONDA
TSUSHIN
KOGYO
CO., LTD.
MR–50RMA
M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminal)
Mounting the terminal

block
1 Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal block in the
groove of the module side.
2 Push the terminal block using the engaging point of the protruding
portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in the module firmly.
3 Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure the latch
at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.
Dismounting the
terminal block
1 Open the cover of the terminal block.

2 Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
3 Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.
65
Cautionary points when D Wiring material : AWG22 – 18 (0.3 – 0.75mm2)

wiring terminal block A wire as thin as possible is recommended.
type D Crimp style terminal : M3.5
Crimp style terminal with no insulation
sleeve and a short distance “A”, as illustrated
in the drawing below, is recommended.
A : Approx. 4.5mm
DAIDO SOLDERLESS TERMINAL MFG. CO., LTD 1.25–S3.5
NICHIFU EUROPE B.V 1.25–3.5S, etc.

NICHIFU AMERICA, INC.
D Mark tube : As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped part

with the mark tube.
6.3.9
Digital Input/Output
Module
Digital input modules
Input Module Rated Rated Response External LED
Polarity Points
type name voltage current time connection display
Maximum
AID32A 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
Non–insulation 20ms
DC input Maximum
AID32B 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
2ms
Maximum
AID16C 24VDC 7.5mA NEG 16 Terminal block provided
20ms
Maximum
AID16D 24VDC 7.5mA POS 16 Terminal block provided
Insulation type
y 20ms
DC input Maximum
AID32E 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
20ms
Maximum
AID32F 24VDC 7.5mA Both 32 Connector not provided
2ms
10.5mA ON Max 35ms
AC input AIA16G 100–120VAC 16 Terminal block provided
(120VAC) OFF Max 45ms
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current source type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive : 24 V common (current sink type)
– The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).
66
Digital output modules

Points
Output Module Rated Rated PolarĆ External LED
Points /comĆ Fuse
type name voltage current ity connection display
mon
AOD08C 12–24VDC 2A NEG 8 8 Terminal block provided provided

AOD08D 2A POS 8 8 Terminal block provided provided
Insulation AOD16C 0.5A NEG 16 8 Terminal block provided not provided
ty e DC
type
output AOD16D 0.5A POS 16 8 Terminal block provided not provided
AOD32C 0.3A NEG 32 8 Connector not provided not provided
AOD32D 0.3A POS 32 8 Connector not provided not provided
AOA05E 100– 2A – 5 1 Terminal block provided provided
240VAC
AOA08E 1A – 8 4 Terminal block provided provided
AC
C output
u u
100–
AOA12F 0.5A – 12 6 Terminal block provided provided
120VAC
AOR08G Maximum 4A – 8 1 Terminal block provided not provided
Relay 250VAC/
output AOR16G 30VDC 2A – 16 4 Terminal block provided not provided
NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative : 0 V common (current sink type)
– Output is at low level when ON.
Positive : 24 V common (current source type)
– Output is at high level when ON.
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer
to FANUC I/O Unit–MODEL A Connection⋅Maintenance
Manual (B–61813E).
67
6.3.10
Correspondence
Bit
between I/O Signals
Address in the
and Addresses in a module
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Module Module of 8
0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 points
Module of 16
points
1 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
2 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
Module of
32 points
3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning address

as 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are set
by the programmer.
For input modules, an input signal becomes ”1” when the contact point
connected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an output
contact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is ”1”.
68
6.3.11 Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O Unit –MODEL A using
Number of Points for the following.
I/O Unit–MODEL A
D Output points
Sum of the actual output Occupied output points
points in a group
0 to 32 → 32 points
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
(Note) Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.
D Input points
Sum of the actual input Occupied input points
points in a group
72 to 128 → 128 points
136 to 256 → 256 points
As a result of the calculation above, when the number of input points is
smaller than that of the output points in a single group, the number of
input points is assumed to be equal to that of the output points.
Example 1:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 0
AOD32C 3
AOA12F 2
AID32A 5
AIA16G 3
[Input points]
32×5+16×3 = 208 → 256 points
[Output points]
32×3+16×2 = 128 → 128 points
Example 2:
When the following modules are used in the group No. 2.
AOD16C 7
AOA05F 9
AID16A 4
AIA16G 3
[Input points]
16×4+16×3 = 112 → 128 points
[Output points]
16×7+8×9 = 184 → 256 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equal to
that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.
69
6.4
INPUT/OUTPUT
SIGNAL
SPECIFICATIONS
6.4.1
Input signal 1) DC input signal A
DC input signal A is a category of signals sent from machine
specifications components (such as pushbutton, limit switch, relay contact) to the
Power Mate.
2) DC input signal B
DC input signal B is a category of signals sent from the machine to
the Power Mate for high–speed operation.
This category uses a noninsulated interface in which the signals can
be switched between a sink type (0 V common) and a source type (24
V common). However, the emergency stop input is fixed to a sink
type (0 V common). In addition, safety standards require the sink
type be used.
Both DC input signals A and B should satisfy the following
conditions for contacts on the machine side
Contact capacity:
30 VDC, 16 mA or greater
Open–circuit contact–to–contact leakage:
1 mA or less (for 26.4 V)
Closed–circuit contact–to–contact voltage drop:
2 V or less (for 8.5 mA, including a voltage drop across
the cable)
DC input signal width and delay
Logical 1
DC input ON (contact closed)
signal
Logical 0
OFF (contact opened)
Receiver
output signal
DC input signal A 5 to 22 ms 5 to 22 ms
DC input signal B Up to 2 ms Up to 2 ms
NOTE
DC input signal B can be used under the following input
conditions:
Closed–circuit contact–to–contact voltage drop:
3.5 V or less (for 8.5 mA, including a voltage drop across
the cable)
Receiver delay time: 4 ms maximum
70
Power Mate
Filter and level

conversion circuit
Contact
Input signal
3.3KW
DIC
Open: Logical 0
Closed: Logical 1
+24V
+24V
0V
Sink–type input connection, in compliance with safety standards
Power Mate
Filter and level

Contact conversion circuit
Input signal
3.3KW
DIC
Open: Logical 1
Closed: Logical 0
+24V
+24V
0V
Source–type input connection
WARNING
When a 0V common (source) interface is used, a ground
fault in an input signal has the same effect as closing the
contacts. From the viewpoint of safety, therefore, FANUC
does not recommend the use of such an interface for input
signals.
71
6.4.2 The Power Mate uses source–type output signals that comply with safety
Output Signal standards.
Specifications The output signals are rated as follows:
Maximum load current with the driver turned on:

200 mA (including an instantaneous value)
Saturation voltage with the driver turned on:
1.0 V (maximum)
Dielectric strength:
24 V +20% (including an instantaneous value)
Leakage current with the driver turned off:
100 µA (maximum)
The output signals require an external power supply rated as follows:
Supply voltage:
+24 V 10% (including an instantaneous value)
Supply current:
At least the total maximum load current (including an
instantaneous value) + 100 mA
Turn–on timing:
Before the Power Mate power supply is turned on (with a
maximum allowable time lag of 500 ms)
Turn–off timing: Same time or after the Power Mate power
supply is turned off
Connect the power supply that meets the above requirements to the output
signal power supply pins (DOC and 0V) of each DI/DO connector. Note
that the total load current varies with the type of a DI/DO card used. It
is necessary to connect 24 VDC to all DOC pins.
I/O card D: Maximum load current of 4.0 A
I/O card E: Maximum load current of 6.0 A
Built–in I/O card: Maximum load current of 2.1 A
Internal I/O: Maximum load current of 0.5 A
NOTE
1 For internal I/O units, it is unnecessary to connect an
external 24 VDC power supply.
2 Use 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or heavier wire as the power cable.
72
Output signal driver The output signal driver can output up to eight signals.
The driver element monitors the current of each output signal. If an
overcurrent is detected, the output of that signal is turned off. Once a
signal has been turned off, the overcurrent will no longer exist, such that
the driver turns the signal on again. Therefore, in the case of a ground fault
or overload, the output of a signal will be repeatedly turned on and off.
This also occurs when a load which causes a high surge current is
connected.
The driver element contains an overheat detector, which turns off all eight
output signals if the temperature in the device exceeds the set value as a
result of an overcurrent caused by a ground fault or some other failure.
This off state is held. To restore signal output, logically turn the output
off then back on again, for each signal, after the temperature falls below
the set value. Signal output can also be restored by turning the system
power off then back on again.
If the output of a signal cannot be turned on even though the CNC
diagnostic indicates that the signal is on, that signal or another signal
being handled by the same element may be overloaded, thus causing the
eight output signals to be turned off. In such a case, turn the system power
off and eliminate the cause of the overload.
D Driver element block

diagram
DOC
OHD
CONTROL
IN#0 LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD
CONTROL
IN#1 LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD
CONTROL
IN#7 LOGIC
OUT#7
OCD
OHD: Overheat detection circuit

OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power for operating this driver element is supplied from
DOC (24 VDC).
73
The following restriction applies to the connection of the output signals.

The following parallel connection of output pins shall not be used.
Power Mate
Source–type
driver circuit
Regulated
DOC power supply
|
+24V 0V
0V
Parallel connection inhibited
When using a dark–light resistance, connect a leakage prevention diode

to it.
Power Mate
DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V
Source–type
driver circuit
Dim–light
resistance
Lamp
Leakage prevention
diode
0V
When a dim–light resistance is used
74
6.5 The I/O card (D, E) is connected to the Power Mate through the FANUC
I/O Link and is used for interfacing with the machine. The DO is of source
CONNECTION OF type conforming to the safety requirements.
I/O CARD D/E There are two cards available depending on the number of I/O points.
DO maximum
I/O card Specification Input Output
load currrent
I/O card E A16B-2202–0732 96 points 64 points 6A
I/O card D A16B-2202–0733 48 points 32 points 4A
I/O card connection unit
Power Mate
control unit
J22 J22
JD1B JD1A To next device
JD1A1
If there is no equipment
beyond this I/O card,
JD1A can remain open.
24V DC power J24 CP61 CM51

J88
CM52 J89
FCI
3P CONNECTOR J90
(Brown) CMB3
Housing : SMS3PNS-5 J91 Machine
Contact : RC16M-SCT3 CMB4
1 +24V
2 GND Cable side
3 Female connector
Power supply input specification

Voltage : 24 VDC"10%
Capacity : 500 + 7.3 n mA
n : number of inputs ON simultaneously
D For power cable J24, use a wire of at least 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2).
D For information about the connection between the control unit and
I/O card, see Subsec. 6.2.2.
D To connect with the machine, use a multi–core shielded cable.
Recommended cables:
A66L–0001–0041 (70/0.18, 20 conductors)
A66L–0001–0042 (70/0.18, 50 conductors)
D Clamp the cable with the cable clamp on the grounding plate of the
cabinet on the I/O card side.
D For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
D CM51, CM52, CMB3
50–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K891 (MR–50LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K893 (MRP–50F01, MR–50L,
MRP–F112, 50 pins)
75
D CMB4
20–pin female connector manufactured by Honda Tsushin
Solder type: A02B–0029–K899 (MR–20LFH)
Crimp type: A02B–0029–K901 (MRP–20F01, MR–20L,
MRP–F112, 20 pins)
D The frame ground of this I/O card can be connected by mounting
the metal fitting to the cabinet.
76
6.5.1
Connector Layout for
I/O Card
CM51
1 DI00 33 DIC1
2 DI03 34 DI02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI01
3 DI06 35 DI05
20 DI04 Xn DI07 DI06 DI05 DI04 DI03 DI02 DI01 DI00
4 DI11 36 DI10
21 DI07
5 DI14 37 DI13 DI17 DI16 DI15 DI14 DI13 DI12 DI11 DI10
22 DI12 Xn+1
6 DI17 38 DI16
23 DI15
7 DI22 39 DI21 Xn+2 DI27 DI26 DI25 DI24 DI23 DI22 DI21 DI20
24 DI20
8 DI25 40 DI24
25 DI23 DI37 DI36 DI35 DI34 DI33 DI32 DI31 DI30
9 DI27 41 DI26 Xn+3
26 DI30
10 DI32 42 DI31
27 DI33 Xn+4 DI47 DI46 DI45 DI44 DI43 DI42 DI41 DI40
11 DI35 43 DI34
28 DI36
29 DI41 Xn+5
13 DI43 45 DI42
30 DI44
14 DI46 46 DI45
31 DI47
15 DI51 47 DI50
32 DI52
16 DI54 48 DI53 Switchable–common DC input signal B;
17 DI56 49 DI55 12 points switched by DIC1
18 +24E 50 DI57
Switchable–common DC input signal A, 8
points switched by DIC2
CM52 DC input signal

1 DI60 33 0V
2 DI63 34 DI62 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DI61
3 DI66 35 DI65
20 DI64 Xn+6 DI67 DI66 DI65 DI64 DI63 DI62 DI61 DI60
4 DI71 36 DI70
21 DI67
22 DI72 Xn+7
6 DI77 38 DI76
23 DI75
7 DI82 39 DI81 Xn+8 DI87 DI86 DI85 DI84 DI83 DI82 DI81 DI80
24 DI80
8 DI85 40 DI84
25 DI83 DI97 DI96 DI95 DI94 DI93 DI92 DI91 DI90
9 DI87 41 DI86 Xn+9
26 DI90
10 DI92 42 DI91
27 DI93 Xn+10 DIA7 DIA6 DIA5 DIA4 DIA3 DIA2 DIA1 DIA0
11 DI95 43 DI94
28 DI96
12 DIA0 44 DI97 DIB7 DIB6 DIB5 DIB4 DIB3 DIB2 DIB1 DIB0
29 DIA1 Xn+11
13 DIA3 45 DIA2
30 DIA4
14 DIA6 46 DIA5
31 DIA7
15 DIB1 47 DIB0
32 DIB2
16 DIB4 48 DIB3
17 DIB6 49 DIB5
18 +24E 50 DIB7
NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
48 points (DI00 to DI57) can be used for the A16B–2202–0733. Without connector CM52.
77
CMB3
1 DO00 33 0V
2 DO03 34 DO02 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
19 DO01
3 DO06 35 DO05
20 DO04 Yn DO07 DO06 DO05 DO04 DO03 DO02 DO01 DO00
4 DO11 36 DO10
21 DO07
5 DO14 37 DO13
22 DO12 Yn+1 DO17 DO16 DO15 DO14 DO13 DO12 DO11 DO10
6 DO17 38 DO16
23 DO15
7 DO22 39 DO21 Yn+2 DO27 DO26 DO25 DO24 DO23 DO22 DO21 DO20
24 DO20
8 DO25 40 DO24
25 DO23
26 DO30
10 DO32 42 DO31
11 DO35 43 DO34
28 DO36
12 DO40 44 DO37
13 DO43 45 DO42
30 DO44
14 DO46 46 DO45
31 DO47
15 DO51 47 DO50
32 DO52
16 DO54 48 DO53
17 DOC 9 DO55
18 DIC2 50 DOC
CMB4
1 DO61 14 DO60
8 DO62
2 DO64 15 DO63 Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
9 DO65
3 DO67 16 DO66
4 DO72 17 DO71
11 DO73
12 DO76
6 DO56 19 DO77
13 DO57
7 0V 20 DOC
NOTE
Addresses can be 0 to 127.
32 points (DO00 to DO37) can be used for the A16B–2202–0733. Without connector CMB4.
DIC1 and DIC2:

Pins for switching the DI common voltage. Usually, it should be
connected to 0 V. (Input)
+24E:
24 VDC output pin. Its use should be restricted to DI signal common
connection.
DOC:
24 VDC power supply input pin for the DO driver. All DOC pins are
internally connected.
78
6.5.2
Details of DI
connection
Power Mate
Example of
connection Pin number
+24E
CM51(18), CM52(18) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI00 CM51(01) Xn . 0
DI01 CM51(19) Xn . 1
DI02 CM51(34) Xn . 2
DI03 CM51(02) Xn . 3
DI04 CM51(20) Xn . 4
DI05 CM51(35) Xn . 5
DI06 CM51(03) Xn . 6
DI07 CM51(21) Xn . 7
DIC1 CM51(33)
0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)
Fig.6.5.2 (a) I/O card machine interface (1)
Xn is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

Xn.0 to Xn.2 and Xn.7 are switchable–common signals; shown above are
examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC1 serves as a common input for Xn+1.0 to Xn+1.2, Xn+1.7, and
Xn+11.4 to Xn11.7.
79
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level

conversion circuit
DI10 CM51(36) Xn+1. 0
DI11 CM51(04) Xn+1. 1
DI12 CM51(22) Xn+1. 2
DI13 CM51(37) Xn+1. 3
DI14 CM51(05) Xn+1. 4
DI15 CM51(23) Xn+1. 5
DI16 CM51(38) Xn+1. 6
DI17 CM51(06) Xn+1. 7
DIC1 CM51(33)
0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)
Fig.6.5.2 (b) I/O card machine interface (2)
Xn+1 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input). Shown above

are examples of sink–type inputs.
Xn+1.0 to Xn+1.2 and Xn+1.7 are switchable–common signals.
DIC1 serves as a common input for Xn.0 to Xn.2, Xn+0.7, and Xn+11.4
to Xn11.7.
80
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level

conversion circuit
DI20 CM51(24) Xn+2. 0
DI21 CM51(39) Xn+2. 1
DI22 CM51(07) Xn+2. 2
DI23 CM51(25) Xn+2. 3
DI24 CM51(40) Xn+2. 4
DI25 CM51(08) Xn+2. 5
DI26 CM51(41) Xn+2. 6
DI27 CM51(09) Xn+2. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (c) I/O card machine interface (3)
Xn+2 is DC input signal A.
81
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI30 CM51(26) Xn+3. 0
DI31 CM51(42) Xn+3. 1
DI32 CM51(10) Xn+3. 2
DI33 CM51(27) Xn+3. 3
DI34 CM51(43) Xn+3. 4
DI35 CM51(11) Xn+3. 5
DI36 CM51(28) Xn+3. 6
DI37 CM51(44) Xn+3. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (d) I/O card machine interface (4)
82
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI40 CM51(12) Xn+4. 0
DI41 CM51(29) Xn+4. 1
DI42 CM51(45) Xn+4. 2
DI43 CM51(13) Xn+4. 3
DI44 CM51(30) Xn+4. 4
DI45 CM51(46) Xn+4. 5
DI46 CM51(14) Xn+4. 6
DI47 CM51(31) Xn+4. 7
DIC2 CMB3(18)
0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)
Fig.6.5.2 (e) I/O card machine interface (5)
Xn+4 is switchable–common DC input signal A.
83
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI50 CM51(47) Xn+5. 0
DI51 CM51(15) Xn+5. 1
DI52 CM51(32) Xn+5. 2
DI53 CM51(48) Xn+5. 3
DI54 CM51(16) Xn+5. 4
DI55 CM51(49) Xn+5. 5
DI56 CM51(17) Xn+5. 6
DI57 CM51(50) Xn+5. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (f) I/O card machine interface (6)
84
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI60 CM52(01) Xn+6. 0
DI61 CM52(19) Xn+6. 1
DI62 CM52(34) Xn+6. 2
DI63 CM52(02) Xn+6. 3
DI64 CM52(20) Xn+6. 4
DI65 CM52(35) Xn+6. 5
DI66 CM52(03) Xn+6. 6
DI67 CM52(21) Xn+6. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (g) I/O card machine interface (7)

This connection cannot be used for I/O card D (A16B–2202–0733).
85
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI70 CM52(36) Xn+7. 0
DI71 CM52(04) Xn+7. 1
DI72 CM52(22) Xn+7. 2
DI73 CM52(37) Xn+7. 3
DI74 CM52(05) Xn+7. 4
DI75 CM52(23) Xn+7. 5
DI76 CM52(38) Xn+7. 6
DI77 CM52(06) Xn+7. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (h) I/O card machine interface (8)

86
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI80 CM52(24) Xn+8. 0
DI81 CM52(39) Xn+8. 1
DI82 CM52(07) Xn+8. 2
DI83 CM52(25) Xn+8. 3
DI84 CM52(40) Xn+8. 4
DI85 CM52(08) Xn+8. 5
DI86 CM52(41) Xn+8. 6
DI87 CM52(09) Xn+8. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (i) I/O card machine interface (9)

87
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DI90 CM52(26) Xn+9. 0
DI91 CM52(42) Xn+9. 1
DI92 CM52(10) Xn+9. 2
DI93 CM52(27) Xn+9. 3
DI94 CM52(43) Xn+9. 4
DI95 CM52(11) Xn+9. 5
DI96 CM52(28) Xn+9. 6
DI97 CM52(44) Xn+9. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (j) I/O card machine interface (10)

88
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DIA0 CM52(12) Xn+10. 0
DIA1 CM52(29) Xn+10. 1
DIA2 CM52(45) Xn+10. 2
DIA3 CM52(13) Xn+10. 3
DIA4 CM52(30) Xn+10. 4
DIA5 CM52(46) Xn+10. 5
DIA6 CM52(14) Xn+10. 6
DIA7 CM52(31) Xn+10. 7
Fig.6.5.2 (k) I/O card machine interface (11)

89
Power Mate
Example of
+24E

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
DIB0 CM52(47) Xn+11. 0
DIB1 CM52(15) Xn+11. 1
DIB2 CM52(32) Xn+11. 2
DIB3 CM52(48) Xn+11. 3
DIB4 CM52(16) Xn+11. 4
DIB5 CM52(49) Xn+11. 5
DIB6 CM52(17) Xn+11. 6
DIB7 CM52(50) Xn+11. 7
DIC1 CM51(33)
0V CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07)
Fig.6.5.2 (l) I/O card machine interface (12)
Xn+11.4 to Xn+11.7 are DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

Xn+11.4 to Xn+11.7 are switchable–common signals; shown above are
examples of sink–type inputs.
Xn+11.0 to Xn+11.3 are DC input signal A.
Xn+11 cannot be used for I/O card D (A16B–2202–0733).
DIC1 serves as a common input for Xn.0 to Xn.2, Xn.7, Xn+1.0 to

Xn+1.2, and Xn+1.7.
90
6.5.3
Details of DO
connection
Power Mate
Pin number Example of

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CMB3(17, 50)
Address number CMB4(20) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn .0
CMB3(01) DO00
Yn .1 CMB3(19) DO01
Yn .2 CMB3(34) DO02
Yn .3 CMB3(02) DO03
Yn .4 CMB3(20) DO04
Yn .5 CMB3(35) DO05
Yn .6 CMB3(03) DO06
Yn .7 CMB3(21) DO07
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (a) I/O card machine interface (13)
Yn.0 to Yn.7 correspond to one driver device.

If an error occurs in the device, the DAL1 LED on the PC board lights.
91
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn+1. 0
CMB3(36) DO10
Yn+1. 1 CMB3(04) DO11
Yn+1. 2 CMB3(22) DO12
Yn+1. 3 CMB3(37) DO13
Yn+1. 4 CMB3(05) DO14
Yn+1. 5 CMB3(23) DO15
Yn+1. 6 CMB3(38) DO16
Yn+1. 7 CMB3(06) DO17
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (b) I/O card machine interface (14)
Yn+1.0 to Yn+1.7 correspond to one driver device.

92
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn+2. 0
CMB3(24) DO20
Yn+2. 1 CMB3(39) DO21
Yn+2. 2 CMB3(07) DO22
Yn+2. 3 CMB3(25) DO23
Yn+2. 4 CMB3(40) DO24
Yn+2. 5 CMB3(08) DO25
Yn+2. 6 CMB3(41) DO26
Yn+2. 7 CMB3(09) DO27
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (c) I/O card machine interface (15)

93
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn+3. 0
CMB3(26) DO30
Yn+3. 1 CMB3(42) DO31
Yn+3. 2 CMB3(10) DO32
Yn+3. 3 CMB3(27) DO33
Yn+3. 4 CMB3(43) DO34
Yn+3. 5 CMB3(11) DO35
Yn+3. 6 CMB3(28) DO36
Yn+3. 7 CMB3(44) DO37
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (d) I/O card machine interface (16)

94
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn+4. 0
CMB3(12) DO40
Yn+4. 1 CMB3(29) DO41
Yn+4. 2 CMB3(45) DO42
Yn+4. 3 CMB3(13) DO43
Yn+4. 4 CMB3(30) DO44
Yn+4. 5 CMB3(46) DO45
Yn+4. 6 CMB3(14) DO46
Yn+4. 7 CMB3(31) DO47
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (e) I/O card machine interface (17)

95
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn+5. 0
CMB3(47) DO50
Yn+5. 1 CMB3(15) DO51
Yn+5. 2 CMB3(32) DO52
Yn+5. 3 CMB3(48) DO53
Yn+5. 4 CMB3(16) DO54
Yn+5. 5 CMB3(49) DO55
Yn+5. 6 CMB3(06) DO56
Yn+5. 7 CMB3(13) DO57
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (f) I/O card machine interface (18)

96
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn+6. 0
CMB4(14) DO60
Yn+6. 1 CMB4(01) DO61
Yn+6. 2 CMB4(08) DO62
Yn+6. 3 CMB4(15) DO63
Yn+6. 4 CMB4(02) DO64
Yn+6. 5 CMB4(09) DO65
Yn+6. 6 CMB4(16) DO66
Yn+6. 7 CMB4(03) DO67
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (g) I/O card machine interface (19)

97
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Yn+7. 0
CMB4(10) DO70
Yn+7. 1 CMB4(17) DO71
Yn+7. 2 CMB4(04) DO72
Yn+7. 3 CMB4(11) DO73
Yn+7. 4 CMB4(18) DO74
Yn+7. 5 CMB4(05) DO75
Yn+7. 6 CMB4(12) DO76
Yn+7. 7 CMB4(19) DO77
CM52(33), CMB3(33), CMB4(07) 0V
Fig.6.5.3 (h) I/O card machine interface (20)

98
6.5.4
Dimensions of I/O Card
Approx.100mm
The following LEDs, fuses, variable resistors, and setting pins are
mounted on the PCB:
[LEDs]
DB2 (green, pilot) : Lights while the power to the PCB is on.
DB1 (red, alarm) : Lights if an error occurs in the PCB or CNC.
DAL1 to DAL8 : Do driver at overheat
[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A) : Used for external 24–V input.
(Order number A02B–0120–K104)
FU2 (5.0 A) : Used for +5 V on the PCB.
(Order number A02B–0200–K103)
[Variable resistors]
VR1 and VR2 : Factory–set by FANUC. The machine tool builder
need not adjust these resistors.
[Setting pin]
CP1 : Used to specify whether the CNC will be notified of
a DO signal error as a system alarm.
99
6.6
CONNECTION OF
BUIL–IN I/O CARD C
6.6.1
Outline
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL H 34–pin ribbon

cable connector Machine
operator’s
panel
Built–in
I/O card C J86, J87
Mother board
DI 32 pins
DO 24 pins
This is built–in I/O card built in Power Mate unit.

Each I/O card is designed such that a connector panel is used to relay the
signals between the I/O card and terminal block or another connector. In
particular, to facilitate connection to a connector panel, MIL–standard
ribbon–cable connectors are employed as the interface connectors.
(1) DI 32 pins and DO 24 pins are available.
(2) Common switches:
1 set of 8 common signals, plus twenty four 24V common signals
(3) Maximum DO load current: 2.1 A
(4) Connector specification:
Connector conforming to MIL–C–83503 standard, equipped with
center key for protection against reverse insertion
Use the cable connector conforming to the equivalent standard.
Recommended connector
A02B–0124–K300
(HIROSE HIF3BA–34D–2.54R)
(5) For the cable, use a bundled sealed cable.
(6) A standard cabinet is used for this unit. The cable goes out from the
bottom of the cabinet.
(7) The built–in I/O card can be used together with an external I/O card
or I/O unit. It cannot be used together with an internal I/O (Section
6.7).
Bit 3 (BIO) of parameter No. 3001 can be used to determine whether
to enter the emergency stop/high–speed interlock/skip/reference
position return deceleration signal through the external I/O or built–in
I/O card.
100
(8) Pin No. of connector
To P.C.B.
Prevent key
Upper
side Pin mark
The near side to prevent key is an

A A side.
B The opposite side is a B side.
17 (From cable side) 321 The near pin to pin mark is No. A1.
(9) For the cable use a bundled sealed cable

34 pin cable with shild (soldering type)
OKI DENSEN CO., LTD. SFX–S 34–7/0.127 3030–SV
(20266) K
FANUC SPECIFICATION A66L–0001–0308#S34S
Clamp the cable shield with the cable clamp on the grounding plate
of the cabinet on the built–in I/O card side.
(10)For details of the signal specifications, see Section 6.4.
(11) Provide sufficient space under the unit to allow the cable to be
connected to and detached from the built–in I/O card.
(12)Ensure that the cable is securely plugged into the unit. Otherwise,
problems such as DI/DO signal transfer errors may occur.
101
6.6.2
Signals (1) DI signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1000 SKIP *RILK *ESP SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2
128–B05 128–A06 128–B04 128–A04 128–B03 128–A03 128–B02 128–A02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1001
128–B10 128–A10 128–B09 128–A09 128–B08 128–A08 128–B07 128–A07
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 *DEC1
129–B05 129–A05 129–B04 129–A04 129–B03 129–A03 129–B02 129–A02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1003
129–B10 129–A10 129–B09 129–A09 129–B08 129–A08 129–B07 129–A07
DC input signal A DC input signal B
Switchable–common DC input signal B (8 pcs)
(2) DO signals
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000
128–B14 128–A14 128–B13 128–A13 128–B12 128–A12 128–B11 128–A11

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1001
129–B16 129–A16 129–B15 129–A15 128–B16 128–A16 128–B15 128–A15
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1002
129–B14 129–A14 129–B13 129–A13 129–B12 129–A12 129–B11 129–A11
102
6.6.3
Machine interface
Built–in I/O card

CB128 CB129
34–pin flat cable connector
A B A B
01 +24E +24E 01 +24E +24E
02 X1000.0 X1000.1 02 X1002.0 X1002.1
03 X1000.2 X1000.3 03 X1002.2 X1002.3
04 X1000.4 X1000.5 04 X1002.4 X1002.5
05 DIC X1000.7 05 X1002.6 X1002.7
06 X1000.6 DOC 06 DOC DOC
07 X1001.0 X1001.1 07 X1003.0 X1003.1
08 X1001.2 X1001.3 08 X1003.2 X1003.3
09 X1001.4 X1001.5 09 X1003.4 X1003.5
10 X1001.6 X1001.7 10 X1003.6 X1003.7
11 Y1000.0 Y1000.1 11 Y1002.0 Y1002.1
12 Y1000.2 Y1000.3 12 Y1002.2 Y1002.3
13 Y1000.4 Y1000.5 13 Y1002.4 Y1002.5
14 Y1000.6 Y1000.7 14 Y1002.6 Y1002.7
15 Y1001.0 Y1001.1 15 Y1001.4 Y1001.5
16 Y1001.2 Y1001.3 16 Y1001.6 Y1001.7
17 0V 0V 17 0V 0V
CB128 Male CB129 Male
Female Female
J86 J87
Power magnetics cabinet and machine operator’s

panel
NOTE
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate main unit
is connected through a fuse and used for DI signals. Do not
connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not
connect it to DOC either.
2 DOC (external 24 VDC input)
An external voltage of 24 VDC should be supplied for DO
signals.
103
6.6.4
Details of DI
connection
Power Mate
Example of
+24E
CB128(A01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB128(A02) X1000. 0
CB128(B02) X1000. 1
CB128(A03) X1000. 2
CB128(B03) X1000. 3
CB128(A04) X1000. 4
CB128(B04) X1000. 5
CB128(A06) X1000. 6
CB128(B05) X1000. 7
DIC CB128(A05)
0V CB128(A17)
Fig.6.6.4 (a) Built–in I/O card machine interface (1)
X1000 is DC input signal B (for high–speed signal input).

X1000.0 to X1000.2 and X1000.7 are switchable–common signals;
shown above are examples of sink–type inputs.
DIC serves as a common input for X1001.0 to X1001.2, and X1001.7.
104
Power Mate
Example of
+24E
CB128(A01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB128(A07) X1001. 0
CB128(B07) X1001. 1
CB128(A08) X1001. 2
CB128(B08) X1001. 3
CB128(A09) X1001. 4
CB128(B09) X1001. 5
CB128(A10) X1001. 6
CB128(B10) X1001. 7
DIC CB128(A05)
0V CB128(A17)
Fig.6.6.4 (b) Built–in I/O card machine interface (2)

DIC serves as a common input for X1000.0 to X1000.2, and X1000.7.
105
Power Mate
Example of
+24E
CB129(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB129(A02) X1002. 0
CB129(B02) X1002. 1
CB129(A03) X1002. 2
CB129(B03) X1002. 3
CB129(A04) X1002. 4
CB129(B04) X1002. 5
CB129(A05) X1002. 6
CB129(B05) X1002. 7
Fig.6.6.4 (c) Built–in I/O card machine interface (3)
X1002 is DC input signal A.
106
Power Mate
Example of
+24E
CB129(A01, B01) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
conversion circuit
CB129(A07) X1003. 0
CB129(B07) X1003. 1
CB129(A08) X1003. 2
CB129(B08) X1003. 3
CB129(A09) X1003. 4
CB129(B09) X1003. 5
CB129(A10) X1003. 6
CB129(B10) X1003. 7
Fig.6.6.4 (d) Built–in I/O card machine interface (4)
X1003 is DC input signal A.
107
6.6.5
Details of DO
connection
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
Bit number driver CB128(B06)
Address number CB129 (A06, B06) DOC Regulated
power supply
+24V 0V
Y1000. 0
CB128(A11)
Y1000. 1 CB128(B11)
Y1000. 2 CB128(A12)
Y1000. 3 CB128(B12)
Y1000. 4 CB128(A13)
Y1000. 5 CB128(B13)
Y1000. 6 CB128(A14)
Y1000. 7 CB128(B14)
CB128 (A17, B17)

CB129 (A17, B17) 0V
Fig.6.6.5 (a) Built–in I/O card machine interface (5)
108
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Y1001. 0
CB128(A15)
Y1001. 1 CB128(B15)
Y1001. 2 CB128(A16)
Y1001. 3 CB128(B16)
Y1001. 4 CB129(A15)
Y1001. 5 CB129(B15)
Y1001. 6 CB129(A16)
Y1001. 7 CB129(B16)
CB128 (A17, B17)

CB129 (A17, B17) 0V
Fig.6.6.5 (b) Built–in I/O card machine interface (6)
109
Power Mate

connection
Source–type
power supply
+24V 0V
Y1002. 0
CB129(A11)
Y1002. 1 CB129(B11)
Y1002. 2 CB129(A12)
Y1002. 3 CB129(B12)
Y1002. 4 CB129(A13)
Y1002. 5 CB129(B13)
Y1002. 6 CB129(A14)
Y1002. 7 CB129(B14)
CB128 (A17, B17)

CB129 (A17, B17) 0V
Fig.6.6.5 (c) Built–in I/O card machine interface (7)
110
6.7
CONNECTION TO
INTERNAL I/O UNITS
(HIGH–SPEED DI
SIGNAL INTERFACE)
6.7.1 The Power Mate–H has 8 DI points and 4 DO points as a standard

Overview configuration. The internal I/O unit can be used together with an external
I/O card, but cannot be used with the built–in I/O card. See Section 6.4
for details of input/output signal specifications.
6.7.2 (1) DI signals

Machine interface
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
JE1–08 JE1–07 JE1–06 JE1–05 JE1–04 JE1–03 JE1–02 JE1–01
DC input signal B Switchable–common DC input signal B
(2) DO signals
PMC
ADDRESS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000
JE1–20 JE1–18 JE1–17 JE1–15
6.7.3
Machine interface
Power Mate–H
JE1 (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 X1000.0 11 DIC
2 X1000.1 12 0V
3 X1000.2 13 HDI Power magnetics cabinet and
machine operator’s panel
4 X1000.3 14 0V
5 X1000.4 15 Y1000.0
6 X1000.5 16 0V
NOTE) +24E (output)
7 X1000.6 17 Y1000.1
8 X1000.7 18 Y1000.2 A voltage of 24 VDC supplied to the Power Mate–H
main unit is connected through a fuse and used for
9 19 +24E DI signals. Do not connect an external 24 VDC
10 +24E 20 Y1000.3 output to this pin.
NOTE) HDI (JE1–13)
Input pin for high–speed DI signal
111
6.7.4
Details of DI
connection
Power Mate
Example of
+24E
JE1(10) Bit number

Address number
Filter and level
Skip 2
conversion circuit
signal SKIP2
JE1(01) X1000. 0
Skip 3
signal SKIP3 JE1(02) X1000. 1
Skip 4
signal SKIP4 JE1(03) X1000. 2
JE1(04) X1000. 3
Emergency
stop signal
input *ESP JE1(05) X1000. 4
JE1(06) X1000. 5
High–speed
interlock
signal *RILK JE1(07) X1000. 6
Skip
signal SKIP JE1(08) X1000. 7
DIC JEI(11)
0V JE1(12)
Fig.6.7.4 Internal I/O machine interface

X1000.0 to X1000.3, and X1000.7 are switchable–common signals;
shown above are examples of sink–type inputs. For the internal I/O unit,
there is no reference position return deceleration signal input. Use
built–in or external I/O card if a reference position return deceleration
signal is necessary.
112
6.7.5 The high–speed DI signal is connected as shown below.

High–speed Interface
HDI JE1(13)
0V JE1(14)
Shield
Receiver Input Signal

Specifications for (1) Circuit configuration
High–speed DI Signals
NC
Driver Receiver
VH/VL
lih/lil
Shield
(2) Absolute maximum rating

Input voltage range: Vin = –3.6 V to +13.6 V
(3) Input characteristics

Parameter Symbol Standard Units Remarks
Input high voltage VH 3.6 to 11.6 V
Input low voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V
Input high current Iih 0.5 max. mA Vin = 5 V
9.3 max. mA Vin = 10V
Input low current Iil –8.0 max. mA Vin = 0V
113
NOTE
1 A positive Iih/Iil indicates that current is flowing into the
receiver, while a negative Iih/Iil indicates that current is
flowing out of the receiver.
2 A high–speed DI signal is assumed to be 1 when the input
voltage is low and 0 when the input voltage is high.
6.7.6
Details of DO Signals
Power Mate
The internal DO driver operates on 24 VDC on

24V the PC board. Do not use more than 200 mA
Source–type per driver and 500 mA in total.
Bit number driver
Address number Example of
connection
Pin number
Y1000.0
JE1(15)
Y1000.1 JE1(17)
Y1000. 2 JE1(18)
Y1000. 3 JE1(20)
JE1(14, 16) 0V
Fig.6.7.6 Internal I/O machine interface
114
6.8 The FANUC I/O Link–II is an I/O network conforming to JPCN–1

proposed by JEMA.
CONNECTION TO
The FANUC I/O Link–II card (A02B–0211–J050) is required.
FANUC I/O LINK–II Refer to FANUC I/O Link–II CONNECTION MANUAL
(B–62714EN/01).
6.9 The Power Mate–H can be connected using PROFIBUS–DP.

CONNECTION USING The PROFIBUS card (A02–0211–J100) is required.
PROFIBUS–DP Refer to PROFIBUS–DP OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B–62924EN).
115
6.10
CONNECTION USING
GENIUS
6.10.1 The Power Mate–H can be connected to PLC via the Genius interface.
Overview
PLC
Genius
Power Power Power Power

Mate Mate Mate Mate
Genius Genius Genius Genius

card card card card
6.10.2
Specifications (1) Up to 32 stations can be connected.
(2) Via the Genius interface, 32–byte DI data and 32–byte DO data are
transferred.
(3) The user can choose from the transfer rates 38.4 K baud, 76.8 K baud,
and 153.6 K baud.The allowable transfer distances are:
38.4 K baud: Up to 2250 m (In this case, no more than 16 stations can
be connected.)
76.8 K baud: Up to 1350 m
153.6 K baud: Up to 600 m
(4) The Genius card is required for the Power Mate to use the Genius
interface.
The Genius card is a sub–printed circuit board of the Power Mate, and
built into the control unit.
(5) The Genius card has 16 internal DI points (DC input signal B) and 2
internal DO points (source–type).
For the input signal specifications and output signal specifications,
see Section 6.4.1 and Section 6.4.2.
The maximum load current of a source–type output signal is 1.4 A.
(6) Restrictions on using the Genius card
D The FANUC I/O Link slave function cannot be used.
D The other sub–printed circuit boards (such as the built–in I/O
card, FANUC I/O Link–II card, M–NET card, and Profibus card)
cannot be used.
116
6.10.3
Connection
Genius Genius
pre–stage post–stage
Power Mate
Genius card J140
CD36
J139 Power magnetics

CE49 cabinet and machine
operator’s panel
6.10.4
Signals 1) Genius interface
D DI signals: X1032 to X1063 (256 points)
D DO signals: Y1032 to Y1063 (256 points)
2) Built–in I/O
D DI signals (16 points)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CE49–
B05 A06 B04 A04 B03 A03 B02 A02
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CE49–
B10 A10 B09 A09 B08 A08 B07 A07
X1000.0, X1000.1, X1000.2, and X1000.7 are signals of

switchable–common DC input signal B.
X1002.0, X1002.1, X1002.2, and X1002.7 are signals of
switchable–common DC input signal B.
X1000.3 to X1000.6 and X1002.3 to X1002.6 are signals of DC
input signal B.
NOTE
To use the above functions (*ESP, *RILK, SKIPn, and
*DECn), set bit 3 (BIO) of parameter No. 3001 and
parameter No. 3005.
X1001, X1003 to X1031, and X1064 and up cannot be
used.
D DO signals (2 points)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1000
CE49–
B11 A11
117
NOTE
Y1000.2 to Y1002.7, Y1001 to Y1031, and Y1064 and up
cannot be used.
6.10.5
Genius Interface
Phoenix contact MSTB 2.5/4–ST–5,008

Power Mate
CD46 phoenix contact J140

Genius
MSTBA 2.5/4–G–5,08
pre–stage
01 X1
02 X2
J140
03 SHD Genius
post–stage
04 ASHD
CD46 Genius pre–stage
X1(01) X1(01)
X2(02) X2(02)
SHD(03) SHD(03)
Shield
ASHD(04) ASHD(04)
Genius post–stage
X1(01)
X2(02)
SHD(03)
Shield
ASHD(04)
118
(1) Cable–side connector specification

One cable–side connector (MSTB 2.5/4–ST–5,08) is delivered with
a Genius card.
Pin number → 1 2 3 4
(2) Recommended cable specification

(Shielded twisted pair cable #22AWG)
For details of cables usable with Genius, refer to the GEFanuc PLC
related manual (GFK–0412) or contact FANUC.
(3) Terminating resistor
On the unit installed at each end of a line, a terminating resistor is
required between X1 (01) and X2 (02).
The value of a required terminating resistor varies from one cable to
another.
(4) Shield treatment
Clamp the shield of the cable connected from the Genius pre–stage.
119
6.10.6
Mechanical Interface of
Built–in I/O
Genius card
CE49
Connector for a 34–pin ribbon cable
Hirose HIF3BB–34D–2.564R
A B
01 +24E +24E
02 X1000.0 X1000.1
03 X1000.2 X1000.3
04 X1000.4 X1000.5
05 DIC1 X1000.7 J139 Power magnetics
Male Fe- cabinet and
06 X1000.6 DOC machine opera-
male
07 X1002.0 X1002.1 tor’s panel
08 X1002.2 X1002.3
09 X1002.4 X1002.5
10 X1002.6 X1002.7
11 Y1000.0 Y1000.1
12 Clamp the shield of cable J139
13 to the ground plate of the cabi-
net on the Genius card side by
14
using a cable clamp metal.
15 DOC
16 DIC2
17 0V 0V
1 +24E (output)
A voltage of 24 VDC applied to the Power Mate main unit is connected through a fuse and used for DI
signals. Do not connect an external 24 VDC output to this pin. Do not connect it to DOC either.
2 DOC (external 24 VDC input)
An external voltage of 24 VDC for DO signals should be connected to the two DOC pins.
3 DIC1, DIC2 (input)
These pins are used for DI common switching. Usually, connect these pins to 0V.
(1) Connector specification

Use a connector conforming to the MIL–C–83503 standard (with a
central key for protection against reverse insertion).
Use an equivalent connector also on the cable side.
FANUC specification: A02B–0124–K300
(Hirose HIF3BA–34D–2.564R)
For the connector pin numbers, see Section 6.6.1.
(2) Recommended cable specification
Use a common shield cable.
Shielded 34–conductor cable (soldering–type)
FANUC specification; A66L–0001–0308#S34S
(Oki Electric Cable SFX–S 34–7/0.127 3030–SV (20266)
(oil–resistant) K)
120
6.10.7
Details of DI
Connection
Power Mate
Example of connection
Pin number
+24E
+24E CE49(A01,B01) Bit number

Address number
CE49(A02) X1000. 0
CE49(B02) X1000. 1
CE49(A03) X1000. 2
CE49(B03) X1000. 3
CE49(A04) X1000. 4
CE49(B04) X1000. 5
CE49(A06) X1000. 6
CE49(B05) X1000. 7
DIC1
CE49(A05)
0V CE49(A17,B17)
Fig.6.10.7 (a) Genius card mechanical interface (1)

121
Power Mate
Example of connection
Pin number
+24E
+24E CE49(A01,B01) Bit number

Address number
CE49(A07) X1002. 0
CE49(B07) X1002. 1
CE49(A08) X1002. 2
CE49(B08) X1002. 3
CE49(A09) X1002. 4
CE49(B09) X1002. 5
CE49(A10) X1002. 6
CE49(B10) X1002. 7
DIC2
CE49(A16)
0V CE49(A17,B17)
Fig.6.10.7 (b) Genius card mechanical interface (2)

122
6.10.8
Details of DO
Connection
Power Mate
Example of
Pin number connection
Bit number
Address number CE49(B06,B15) DOC Regulated power
supply
+24V 0V
Y1000. 0
CB49(A11)
Y1000. 1 CB49(B11)
CB49(A17,B17) 0V
Fig.6.10.8 Genius card mechanical interface (3)
123
7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS HARDWARE B–62683EN/03
7 CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
124
B–62683EN/03 HARDWARE 7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS
7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT
INTERFACE
(SIMULTANEOUS
BLOCK START
INTERFACE)
7.1.1 This connection is conformed to CRT/MDI unit and picture display

General CRT/MDI unit.
a) The CRT interface for Power Mate has the following features:
1 One CRT can be used simultaneously by multiple number of
Power Mate units. (Max. 16 Power Mate units)
2 Only one connecting cable is needed between NC and CRT.
3 Maximum displayed axes on the common use screen are 18 axes.
4 Synchronous blocks operations are max. four machines.
b) Device numbers for each Power Mate are set using the rotary switch
RSW on the front face of the control unit.
c) Maximum total length of the communication cable (i.e. total sum of
the cable lengths between
(1) Power Mate and CRT, and (2) two Power Mate units is 100m.
(See Section 7.1.6 for 50 m to 100 m.)
d) Normally turn on the power for the CRT/MDI unit before or, at latest,
simultaneously when the power for Power Mate control unit is turned
on. (This is not applied when the CRT/MDI unit is made detachable.)
Power source for CRT/MDI unit
Power source for Power Mate body
ÂÂ
Â t t t 0.2 sec
If the power for the CRT/MDI unit is turned on after the power for
Power Mate body is turned on, it becomes impossible to execute
special operations while the power for Power Mate is on such as
memory all clear. (See Subsec. 7.1.8.)
e) To enable the use of a CRT/MDI unit, a CRT control module must be
installed in the Power Mate–H.
WARNING
To have the CRT/MDI approved for the CE marking, it is
necessary to provide a shock hazard prevention cover
(A02B–0200–K820). Attaching the cover to the CRT is the
machine tool builder’s responsibility.
125
(1) When there is only one unit of Power Mate
Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
J45 J48
JD14 JD13 CPD1
#0 JN1 FG DC+24V
(NOTE1) Terminal unit power source
JD15
"10%1.0A
(Stabilized power
(NOTE2) source)
(NOTE 1) Device number 0 is set using the rotary switch RSW.

Refer to the section of 3.9 CONNECTOR LAYOUT OF UNIT
for place of rotary switch.
(NOTE 2) Mount a terminal unit (A02B–0124–D001)
(2) When multiple power Mates share one CRT/MDI Max.16 Power
Mates
Power Mate CRT/MDI unit

J45,J43 J48
JD14 JD13 CPD1
#0
(NOTE1) JN1 FG
JD15
+24V DC power
source "10%,
J46,J44
J47 1.0A
Power Mate Machine operator’s
JD14 panel selection
switch
#1 #1...
(NOTE1) #0 #15
JD15
J46,J44
Common
Power Mate
JD14 (NOTE 1) Device numbers are set using the
#2 rotary switch RSW. If the same device
(NOTE1) number is used for two or more units,
JD15 the information is not correctly shown
on the CRT/MDI unit.
J46,J44
(NOTE 2) Attach a terminal unit
Power Mate (A02B–0124–D001) to the last Power
Mate.
JD14
(NOTE 3) When two or more Power Mates share
#n (NOTE2) one CRT/MDI unit, specify the number
(NOTE1) Terminal unit of Power Mates connected to the unit
JD15 in parameter No. 3170 Maximum axes
displayed on the common use screen
are 18 axes.
(NOTE 4) To identify each Power Mate, a name
can be given to it. See parameters
No. 3171 to No. 3176.
126
7.1.2
CRT Interface (with
Simultaneous Block
Separate type MDI unit
Start) Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
JD14 JD13
(PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
J43
3 TXD 13 SI1 3 RXD 13 SI1
4 *TXD 14 *SI1 4 *RXD 14 *SI1
5 ITPGA 15 SI2 5 ITPGA 15 SI2
6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2 6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2
7 ITPGB 17 SI3 7 ITPGB 17 SI3
8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3 8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
9 SI0 19 9 SI0 19
10 20 *SI0 10 20 *SI0
JD14 JD13
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
*RXD *TXD
3 3
TXD RXD
4 4
*TXD *RXD
5 5
ITPGA ITPGA
6 6
*ITPGA *ITPGA
7 7
ITPGB ITPGB
8 8
*ITPGB *ITPGB
9 9
SI0 SI0
20 20
*SI0 *SI0
13 13
SI1 SI1
14 14
*SI1 *SI1
15 15
SI2 SI2
16 16
*SI2 *SI2
17 17
SI3 SI3
18 18
*SI3 *SI3
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield
(NOTE) Cables J43 and J44 have the same specification.

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Recommended connector (JD13, JD14)
PCR–E20FS (Soldering type) or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA
127
7.1.3
CRT Interface (without
Simultaneous Block Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
Start)
JD14 JD13
1 RXD 11 0V 1 TXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *TXD 12 0V
J45
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 RXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *RXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SI0) 19 9 (SI0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SI0)

JD14 JD13
1 1
RXD TXD
2 2
*RXD *TXD
3 3
TXD RXD
4 4
*TXD *RXD
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
PCR–E20FS or PCR–E20FA
Housing PCR–V20LA
128
7.1.4
Interface Between
Multiple Power Mates
(with Simultaneous Power Mate 2nd Power Mate
Block Start) JD15 JD14
1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J44
3 TXD 13 SI1 3 TXD 13 SI1
4 *TXD 14 *SI1 4 *TXD 14 *SI1
5 ITPGA 15 SI2 5 ITPGA 15 SI2
6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2 6 *ITPGA 16 *SI2
7 ITPGB 17 SI3 7 ITPGB 17 SI3
8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3 8 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
9 SI0 19 9 SO0 19
10 20 *SI0 10 20 *SO0

JD15 JD14
1 1
RXD RXD
2 2
*RXD *RXD
3 3
TXD TXD
4 4
*TXD *TXD
5 5
ITPGA ITPGA
6 6
*ITPGA *ITPGA
7 7
ITPGB ITPGB
8 8
*ITPGB *ITPGB
9 9
SI0 SO0
20 20
*SI0 *SO0
13 13
SI1 SI1
14 14
*SI1 *SI1
15 15
SI2 SI2
16 16
*SI2 *SI2
17 17
SI3 SI3
18 18
*SI3 *SI3
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Housing PCR–V20LA
129
7.1.5
Interface between
Multiple Power Mate Power Mate CRT/MDI unit
(without Simultaneous JD15 JD14
Block Start) (PCR–EV20MDT) (PCR–EV20MDT)
1 RXD 11 0V 1 RXD 11 0V
2 *RXD 12 0V 2 *RXD 12 0V
J46
3 TXD 13 (SI1) 3 TXD 13 (SI1)
4 *TXD 14 (*SI1) 4 *TXD 14 (*SI1)
5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2) 5 (ITPGA) 15 (SI2)
6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2) 6 (*ITPGA) 16 (*SI2)
7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3) 7 (ITPGB) 17 (SI3)
8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3) 8 (*ITPGB) 18 (*SI3)
9 (SI0) 19 9 (SO0) 19
10 20 (*SI0) 10 20 (*SO0)

JD15 JD14
1 1
RXD RXD
2 2
*RXD *RXD
3 3
TXD TXD
4 4
*TXD *TXD
11 11
0V 0V
12 12
0V 0V
Shield

Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Housing PCR–V20LA
130
7.1.6
Device Selection
Switch Separate type MDI unit
CRT/MDI unit
JN1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Machine operator’s panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J47
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Device No. selection switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20
Cable connection (J47) Device No. selection switches
JN1
#0
1 #1
*SEL0 #2
3 #3
*SEL1 #4
5 #5
*SEL2 #6
7 #7
*SEL3 #8
11 #9
*SEL4 #10
13 #11
*SEL5 #12
15 #13
*SEL6 #14
17 #15
*SEL7 common
2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
0V
When the total length of the CRT link cable is 50 m to 100 m, connect
*SEL5 to 0V.
131
Relationship between selection

switches and device numbers
Device No. *SEL7 *SEL4 *SEL3 *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0

#0
#1 Ę
#2 Ę
#3 Ę
#4 Ę
#5 Ę Ę
#6 Ę Ę
#7 Ę Ę
#8 Ę
#9 Ę Ę
#10 Ę Ę
#11 Ę Ę
#12 Ę Ę
#13 Ę Ę Ę
#14 Ę Ę Ę
#15 Ę Ę Ę : Switch open
Common Ę : Switch closed
display Ę * * * * * * : Either will do
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG10 ten pairs)
Housing PCR–V20LA
132
7.1.7
Power Supply Interface
CRT/MDI unit (Separate type MDI unit)
CPD1
(AMP)
External power source
1 +24V
2 0V
J48
3 +24VDC power source
(Stabilized power source)
+24VDC 10% 1.0A

FG
AMP Japan
1–178288–3 (Housing)
1–175218–5 (Contact)
CPD1
1
+24V +24VDC10% 1.0A
2
0V 0V
The CRT/MDI unit and separate MDI unit have a frame grounding stud
at the back. The frame should be grounded by connecting this stud using
a 100 to 300 mm stranded wire having a cross–sectional area of 2mm2 or
larger.
7.1.8
Detachable CRT/MDI
Unit 1) The Power Mate–H can be operated without connecting a CRT/MDI
unit.
2) To attach or detach a CRT/MDI unit while the Power Mate–H is
turned on, 0V of the Power Mate–H must be connected to 0V of the
CRT/MDI unit before any other lines.
The shell of connector JD14 on the Power Mate–H controller side is
connected to 0V of the Power Mate–H controller. The shell of
connector JD13 on the CRT/MDI unit side is connected to 0V of the
CRT/MDI unit. Connect the connector shells at both ends of the cable
to each other, using the free wires of cables J43 and J45. By means
of this arrangement, when the cable is connected to the Power
Mate–H controller, the shell of connector JD14 on the controller first
makes contact with the connector shell of the cable. Thus, the state
described above can be achieved.
3) When a CRT/MDI unit is connected after the Power Mate–H has been
turned on, maintenance operations such as memory all–clear cannot
be performed. (See 7.1.1 (d).) To perform maintenance operations,
turn the Power Mate–D off then on again, after connecting the
CRT/MDI.
133
7.1.9
CRT Terminating Unit 1) The CRT terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) is designed to enable
adjustment of the waveform of a CRT link (RS485). The CRT/MDI
unit may operate normally without a CRT terminating unit, provided
the CRT link is short, or if the operating environment is free of noise.
For qualitative evaluation, however, always install a CRT terminating
unit prior to shipment. If the CRT terminating unit is not mounted,
the CRT screen may not be updated, and the keys may fail to operate.
2) A CRT link is terminated at both ends. Usually, a CRT terminating
unit is attached to the Power Mate–H installed at the far end. The
CRT/MDI unit has a built–in terminating resistor.
CRT/MDI Power Power Power

unit Mate–H Mate–H Mate–H
JD15
Terminating Terminating
resistor unit
CRT link
3) The CRT link includes the signals (RS485) for the simultaneous
block start function, and these signals are also terminated. When the
simultaneous block start function is not used, the signals need not be
terminated.
4) The CRT/MDI unit terminates the following signals with 200 ohms,
1/4 W:

! !

Simultaneous

block start func-
tion signals

134
Resistor
Insulating heat–
shrinkable tube
7.1.10
Keyboard
English key Symbolic key
135
7.2
SEPARATE TYPE
CRT/MDI INTERFACE
7.2.1 The Power Mate–H can be used in conjunction with a separate CRT unit
Outline and a separate MDI unit and a picuture display separate MDI unit.
Separate CRT unit

J56
CN2 (CRT power

supply)
CN1 (video input)
Video cable
J53 Soft key
Power Mate cable
Separate MDI unit
JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2
JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J47
J48
Power supply of
+24VDC10%
Mode selection switch 1.0A
1 Up to 16 Power Mates can be connected to one CRT and one MDI unit.
Connection is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
2 Connection of the terminating unit is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
3 The separate CRT unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
cable to the separate MDI unit. Keep in mind that the length of this
cable is 500 mm when positioning these units. See appendix A for the
connector position of the soft key cable in separate CRT unit.
4 The screen can be shared in the same way as for the CRT/MDI.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate and the
separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
6 For details concerning cable J48 used to connect the power supply to
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to connect frame
ground.
7 For details concerning cable J47 used to connect the separate MDI unit
to the mode selection switch, see Subsection 7.1.6.
8 Video cable J53 and separate CRT power cable J56 are not supplied
with the unit.
9 Always connect the protective ground plates of the separate CRT unit
and separate MDI unit to ground.
10 To use a separate MDI unit and separate CRT unit, a CRT control
module must be installed in the Power Mate–H.
136
11 All interfaces not described here are the same as those of the CRT/MDI
unit.
WARNING
To have the separate CRT approved for the CE marking, it
is necessary to provide a shock hazard prevention cover
(A02B–0200–K820). Attaching the cover to the CRT is the
machine tool builder’s responsibility.
7.2.2
Video and Power
Separate MDI unit Separate CRT unit
Supply Interface
JA1 CN1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MR–20RM)
Video cable
1 VDR 11 J53 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
11 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18
12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
13
7 17 FCI JAPAN 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC SMS6PN–5
(housing)
9 19 (+24V) RC16M–SCT3
(contact)
10 (+24V) 20
( ): Unused signals
CPD2(AMP) Power cable
J56 1
1 +24V 2
CN2
2 0V 3 (SMS6RN–4)
JAPAN AMP 4 0V FCI JAPAN
3
1–178288–3
(housing) 5 +24V
1–175218–5
(contact) 6
Connection of video cable J53

Cable connector for CN1
Covered connector
MR–20LFH (made by
Honda Tsushin)
Cable connector for
JA1 1 1
Connector VDR VDR
FI40B–20S 2 8
(15–pin soldered 0V 0V
3 4
type) VDG
Case FI–20–CV5
VDG
4 11
Above parts made 0V 0V
by Hirose Electric 5 5
Co., Ltd. VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
shield
Recommended cables
A66L–0001–0371 : 5–core coaxial cable
137
7.3
SEPARATE TYPE
PDP/MDI INTERFACE
7.3.1 The Power Mate–H is used in conjunction with a separate PDP unit, a
Outline separate MDI unit, and a picture display type separate MDI unit.
Separate PDP unit

J114
CN2 (PDP power
supply)
A02B–0200–C100
CN1 (video input)
Video cable
J53 Soft key
Power Mate cable
Separate MDI unit
JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2
JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J47
J48
Power supply of
+24VDC10%
1 Up to 16 Power Mates can be connected to one PDP and one MDI unit.
Connection is the same as for the CRT/MDI.
3 The separate PDP unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
comector position of the soft key cable in separate CRT unit.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate and the
separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to connect frame
ground.
7 For details concerning cable J47 used to connect the separate MDI unit
to the mode selection switch, see Subsection 7.1.6.
8 Video cable J53 and separate CRT power cable J56 are not supplied
with the unit.
9 Always connect the protective ground plates of the separate CRT unit
and separate MDI unit to ground.
10 To use a separate MDI unit and separate PDP unit, a CRT control
unit.
138
7.3.2
Video and Power
Supply Interface Separate MDI unit Separate PDP unit
JA1 CN1
(PCR–EV20MDT) (MR–20RM)
Video cable
1 VDR 11 J53 1 VDR 14
8 0V
2 0V 12 VSYNC 2 HSYNC 15
9 0V
3 VDG 13 3 VSYNC 16
10 0V 0V
4 0V 14 0V 4 VDG 17
11 0V 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 18
12 0V
6 0V 16 0V 6 19
13
7 17 7 20
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC
JAPAN AMP
9 19 1–178288–3
(housing)
10 20 1–175218–5
(contact)
( ): Unused signals Power cable
CPD2(AMP) J114 CN2
1 +24V
(BP2–VH)
1 +24V 2 0V JAPAN Crimp contact
2 0V JAPAN Crimp
3 contact
VHR–2V
(housing)
SVH–21T–1.1
(contact)

Cable connector for CN1
Covered connector
MR–20LFH (made by
Honda Tsushin)
Cable connector for
JA1 1 1
Connector VDR VDR
FI40B–20S 2 8
(15–pin soldered 0V 0V
3 4
type) VDG
Case FI–20–CV5
VDG
4 11
Above parts made 0V 0V
Co., Ltd. VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
shield
Recommended cables
139
7.3.3 Fine adjustment of the video signal is supported to enable its use with
Adjusting the Separate separate type PDP. This adjustment is necessary to compensate for errors
resulting from the combination of NC devices and cables.
Type PDP Adjustment of the video signal is necessary if you have replaced the
display unit, cable, or a hardware component of the display circuit in the
NC, either as part of regular field maintenance or to correct a failure.
Locations of switches
and jumper pins
SW2 SW1
Power
supply
Plasma display (rear view)
Adjustment
D Eliminating flicker D Separate type PDP : Switch SW1
1 Change the jumper pin or switch setting such that flicker is eliminated.
2 If you find that flicker is eliminated by two or more different settings,
select the setting approximating to the midpoint of those settings.
Example : If flicker is eliminated by all of settings 2 to 6, select 4.
D Adjusting the horizontal D Separate type PDP : Switch SW2
position 1 The screen can be shifted horizontally in units of dots.
2 Adjust the horizontal position such that the entire screen is visible.
Only one setting can successfully realize this positioning.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to change any controls or settings other than
those described above.
NOTE
If two CNCs share one PDP by switching, the adjustment
described above must be made each time the CNC is
switched. So, it is not recommended that two CNCs share
one PDP.
140
7.4
SEPARATE TYPE
LCD/MDI INTERFACE
7.4.1 The Power Mate–H can also be used in combination with an LCD/MDI
Outline unit, separate LCD unit, separate MDI unit, or picture display separate
MDI unit.
Separate LCD unit

J137
CP5 (LCD power

supply)
JA1 (video input)
Video cable
J136 Soft key
Power Mate cable
Separate MDI unit
JA1 CK2
J45
JD14 JD13 CPD2
JN1 CPD1
JD15 Terminating
unit FG
J138
J48
Power supply of
+24VDC10%
1 Up to 16 Power Mates can be connected to one LCD/MDI unit, LCD

unit, or MDI unit.
3 The separate LCD unit is supplied with a soft key cable. Connect this
connector position of the soft key cable in separate CRT unit.
5 For details concerning cable J45 used to connect a Power Mate and
LCD/MDI or the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.3.
LCD/MDI or the separate MDI unit, see Subsection 7.1.7. Be sure to
connect frame ground.
7 Video cable J136 and separate LCD power cable J137 are not delivered
with the separate LCD unit and separate MDI unit.
8 Always connect the protective ground plates of LCD/MDI or the
separate LCD unit and separate MDI unit to ground.
9 To use a separate MDI unit and separate LCD unit, a CRT control
141
10 The external dimensions of the LCD/MDI unit are the same as for the
CRT/MDI unit.
unit.
NOTE
Even if only one Power Mate unit is connected, connection
must be made through the mode selection switch interface.
142
7.4.2
Video and Power
Supply Interface Separate MDI unit Separate LCD unit
(for Separate Type) JA1 JA1
1 VDR 11 1 VDR 11
Video cable
2 0V 12 VSYNC J136 2 0V 12 VSYNC
3 VDG 13 3 VDG 13
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 VDB 15 5 VDB 15
6 0V 16 0V 6 0V 16 0V
7 17 7 17
8 (DTC) 18 HSYNC 8 18 HSYNC
9 19 (+24V) AMP JAPAN, LTD. 9 19
2–178288–3 (Housing)
10 (+24V) 20 2–175218–5 (Contact) 10 20
( ): Unused signals
CPD2(AMP) Power cable
J137 CP5
1 +24V 1 +24V
2 0V 2 0V
3 3
JAPAN AMP
1–178288–3 (housing)
1–175218–5 (contact)
Cable connector
for JA1
Cable connector for Connector
JA1 1 1 FI40B–20S
Connector VDR VDR (15–pin soldered
FI40B–20S 2 8 type)
(15–pin soldered 0V 0V Case FI–20–CV5
3 4
type) VDG Above parts made
Case FI–20–CV5
VDG
4 11 by Hirose Electric
Above parts made 0V 0V Co., Ltd.
Co., Ltd. VDB VDB
6 12
0V 0V
18 2
HSYNC HSYNC
16 9
0V 0V
12 3
VSYNC VSYNC
14 10
0V 0V
shield
Recommended cables
NOTE
The video cable and power cable are delivered with the
LCD/MDI unit.
143
7.4.3 When a LCD/MDI or separate LCD unit is used, connection must be made
Device Selection through the device selection switch interface even if only one Power Mate
unit is connected.
Switch Interface
When using a separate LCD unit, connect JN1 (15) and JN1 (16).
Otherwise, the screen will shift up when displayed.

LCD/MDI unit
JN1
(PCR–EV20MDT)
Machine operator’s panel
1 *SEL0 11 *SEL4
2 0V 12 0V
J138
3 *SEL1 13 *SEL5 Device No. selection switch
4 0V 14 0V
5 *SEL2 15 *SEL6
6 0V 16 0V Short circuit
7 *SEL3 17 *SEL7
8 0V 18 0V
9 19
10 20
Cable connection (J138) Device No. selection switches
JN1
#0
1 #1
*SEL0 #2
3 #3
*SEL1 #4
5 #5
*SEL2 #6
7 #7
*SEL3 #8
11 #9
*SEL4 #10
13 #11
*SEL5 #12
15 #13
*SEL6 #14
17 #15
*SEL7 common
16
0V
2,4,6,8,12,14,16,18
0V
144
Relationship between selection

switches and device numbers
Device No. *SEL7 *SEL4 *SEL3 *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0

#0
#1 Ę
#2 Ę
#3 Ę
#4 Ę
#5 Ę Ę
#6 Ę Ę
#7 Ę Ę
#8 Ę
#9 Ę Ę
#10 Ę Ę
#11 Ę Ę
#12 Ę Ę
#13 Ę Ę Ę
#14 Ę Ę Ę
#15 Ę Ę Ę : Switch open
Common Ę : Switch closed
display Ę * * * * *
* : Either will do
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG ten pairs)
Housing PCR–V20LA
7.4.4 The LCD is provided with the following adjustment switch and
Adjusting the LCD potentiometers, the factory settings of which must not be changed.
(Adjustment is necessary only when the unit has been disassembled to
replace the adapter or LCD panel.)
VR1 : Flicker adjustment potentiometer
VRP1 : Contrast adjustment potentiometer
SW1 : Horizontal position adjustment switch
145
7.5
CONNECTION TO A
DETACHABLE
LCD/MDI UNIT
7.5.1 The Power Mate-H supports the use of a detachable LCD/MDI unit, which
consists of a 7.2" LCD/MDI unit housed in a portable dustproof case.
Outline
Detachable LCD/MDI unit
Cabinet
Power Mate
CRT/MDI
interface
Connection
panel
Connector
panel
External power Device No. selection switches

supply 24 VDC
(1) No cable is provided with the detachable LCD/MDI unit.

(2) The customer is responsible for preparing the connector panel,
external power supply, connection panel, and device No. selection
switches.
(3) The customer is responsible for preparing all inter–unit connection
cables.
(4) For the Power Mate, a CRT control module is required.
146
7.5.2
Specifications Indicator 7.2” LCD, 40 characters by 16 lines
Power supply 24 VDC 10%, 1.0 A
External dimensions 410 (W) x 235 (H) x 235 (D) mm

(including the cable winding section)
Weight 7.0 kg (excluding connection cables)
Drawing number A02B–0166–C271#R (English keys)

A02B–0166–C271#S (Symbolic keys)
NOTE
This LCD/MDI unit does not support the picture display
function.
7.5.3
Detachable LCD/MDI 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
Unit Connected to One
Power Mate Unit
Cabinet
Connector 24 VDC
J132
panel power
supply
Detach- Connection
able LCD/ panel Power
MDI unit Mate
J127 J128 J126
CA50 JD14
(See item (4))

24VDC10% Terminating
unit JD15
1.0A
(1) The total length of the cables (J127, J128, and J126) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and Power Mate must not exceed 50 m.
(2) Cables J127, J128, and J132 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line
for the detachable LCD/MDI unit. The 24 VDC power is subject to
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V line
and 0V line. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine
the cable length so that 24 VDC 10% is available at connector
CA50 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
(3) Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) to connector JD15 of
the Power Mate.
(4) While the power is on, cables can be attached/detached to/from those
connectors on the connection panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
figure. For the other connectors (such as CA50 and JD14), cables can
neither be attached nor detached while the power is on.
147
Cabinet
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector RXD JD14 (01) Power
panel Mate
CA50 (02) *RXD panel *RXD JD14 (02)
CA50 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)
CA50 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)
CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE1) 0V JD14 (11, 12)

CA50 (16) ATCH2 to DI
ATCH
+24V (NOTE2)
CA50 (09, 10) +24V
+24V External power supply
CA50 (19, 20) 0V
0V 24 VDC
CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield
CA50 (06) *SEL0
Device No. selec-
CA50 (07) *SEL1 tion switches on
CA50 (08) *SEL2 the machine oper-
ator’s panel
CA50 (14) *SEL3
CA50 (17) *SEL4
CA50 (18) *SEL7
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
is attached to the connection panel. ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be
connected.
2 To attach or detach a detachable LCD/MDI unit while the Power Mate is turned on, 0V of the
Power Mate must be connected to 0V of the detachable LCD/MDI unit before any other line.
148
2) Details of cable J127

CA50
04 03 02 01 Connection
panel
J127
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD
10 09 08 07 06 05
Hirose Electric. Co., Ltd.
+24V +24V FG (1)Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
16 15 14 13 12 11 (2)Crimp type
Housing
ATCH2 ATCH1 HR22–12TPD–20SC
Contact
20 19 18 17 HR22–SC–122
Manual crimping tool
0V 0V HR22–TA2428HC
Detachable LCD/MDI unit Connection panel

CA50
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
#24AWG pair
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V
(NOTE 1) ATCH1 15 ATCH1
16 #24AWG
(NOTE 1) ATCH2 ATCH2
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
05 Drain wire
FG FG
Shield
(NOTE 2)
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm)
NOTE
1 ATCH1, ATCH2
ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
connected.
2 FG
Using a drain wire, connect CA50 (05) to the FG terminal of the connection panel.
Connect the FG terminal of the connection panel to the frame ground by using a twisted–pair
cable that is 100 to 300 mm long with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
3 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. If the external
diameter of the cable is less than 8.5 mm, increase the diameter to 8.5 mm by using
heat–shrinkable tube or taping at the connector joint to ensure a dustproof connection.
149
Connector panel Power Mate
JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0V
J126
03 TXD 13
04 *TXD 14
HONDA TSUSHIN 05 15
KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 16
FANUC specifications 07 17
Soldering type (with
case) 08 18
A02B–0120–K301
09 19
Crimp type (with case)
A02B–0120–K302
10 20

Connector panel
Power Mate
JD14
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
11
0V 0V
12
0V 0V
Shield
Cable clamp
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.,
Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
150
Connection panel Connector panel
RXTP RXTP
Pair
*RXTP *RXTP
TXTP TXTP
Pair
*TXTP *TXTP
+24V +24V
+24V +24V
0V 0V
0V 0V

FG (NOTE 3)
Shield
Cable:
cable A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
cable Twisted–pair cable with cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be connected.
2 FG on the connection panel:
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long, with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
Use this FG terminal to connect the shield of cable J127 to ground.
3 FG on the connector panel:
On the connector panel, connect the shield of cable J128 to the frame ground. For this
connection, use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of
at least 2 mm2.
151
Connector panel
External power supply

J132
24VDC
External power supply Connector panel

24VDC +24V
0V 0V
152
7.5.4
When One Detachable
LCD/MDI Unit is Shared
by Multiple Power Mate
Units
7.5.4.1
When the 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
simultaneous block
start function is not
used
Cabinet
Con- J132 24 VDC

nector power
Connection panel supply
panel
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit
Power
Mate
J129 J130 J126 #0
CA50 JD14
24VDC10% JD15
1.0A
J46
Power
Device No. selection Mate
switches #1
JD14
JD15
J46
(1) When using the CRT sharing function, mount the device No.
selection switches on the cabinet.
(2) The total length of the cables (J129, J130, J126, J46 x n) between the
detachable LCD/MDI unit and Power Mate units must not exceed 50
m.
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V and 0V
lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the
cable length so that 24 VDC 10% is available at connector CA50
of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
the last Power Mate unit.
(5) The connections from Power Mate #0 to Power Mate #15 are the same
as those for the CRT/MDI unit.
connectors on the connector panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
153
Cabinet
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate
CA50 (02) *RXD panel panel JD14 (02)
*RXD
CA50 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)
CA50 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)
CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE 1) 0V JD14 (11, 12)

CA50 (16) ATCH2 to DI
ATCH
(NOTE 2)
+24V CA50 (09, 10) +24V
CA50 (19, 20) 0V
0V 24 VDC
CA50 (05) FG
(Cabinet) Shield
NOTE
connected.
CA50
Connection panel
04 03 02 01
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD J129
10 09 08 07 06 05
+24V +24V *SEL2 *SEL1 *SEL0 FG
(1)Soldering type
HR22–12TPD–20S
16 15 14 13 12 11
(2)Crimp type
Housing
ATCH2 ATCH1 *SEL3 HR22–12TPD–20SC
Contact
20 19 18 17 HR22–SC–122
Manual crimping tool
0V 0V *SEL7 *SEL4 HR22–TA2428HC
154
Detachable
LCD/MDI unit Connection panel
CA50
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
#24AWG pair
or
03 #28AWG pair
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V
(NOTE 1) ATCH1 15
ATCH1
(NOTE 1) ATCH2 16
ATCH2
*SEL0 06
*SEL0
*SEL1 07
*SEL1 #24AWG
08 or
*SEL2 *SEL2 #28AWG
*SEL3 14
*SEL3
17
*SEL4 *SEL4
*SEL7 18
*SEL7
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
Drain
FG 05 wire FG
Shield (NOTE 3)
Recommended cables:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. (#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm), or
A66L–0001–0284#10P: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd. (#28AWG pair, external cable diameter: 6.2 mm)
NOTE
1 ATCH1, ATCH2, *SELn
ATCH1 and ATCH2 can be used as DI signals for detecting whether a detachable LCD/MDI unit
connected.
Connect only necessary signals out of *SEL0 to *SEL7 according to the number of devices.
The A66L–0001–0298 cable cannot be used if seven or more signals are being input from
ATCH1, ATCH2, and *SEL0 to *SEL7. In such a case, use cable A66L–0001–0284#10P.
2 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CA50 is 8.5 mm. If the external
3 FG
Using a drain wire, connect CA50 (05) to the FG terminal of the connection panel.
Connect the FG terminal of the connector panel to the frame ground by using a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
155
Connection panel Connector panel
RXTP RXTP
Pair
*RXTP *RXTP
TXTP TXTP

*TXTP *TXTP
+24V 24V
+24V 24V
0V 0V
0V 0V
*SEL0
*SEL1
*SEL2
*SEL3
*SEL4
*SEL7
(NOTE 2)
FG
(NOTE 3)
Shield
Device No. selec-

tion switches
(NOTE 4)
Cable:
cable A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
cable #28AWG6
cable Twisted–pair cable with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)
156
NOTE
1 ATCH1 and ATCH2, when unused, need not be connected.
2 FG on the connection panel
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the
frame ground. For this connection, use a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area
of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J129 to
ground.
3 FG on the connector panel
On the connector panel, connect the shield of cable J130 to
the frame ground. For this connection, use a twisted–pair
cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area
of at least 2 mm2.
4 Device No. selection switch connection
For details of device No. selection switch connection, see
Section 7.1.6.

See Section 7.5.3.3).
157
7.5.4.2
When the 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
simultaneous block
start function is used
Cabinet
Con- J132 24 VDC

nector power
panel supply
Connection
Detachable panel
LCD/MDI unit
Power
Mate
J129 J130 J131 #0
CA50 JD14
24VDC10% JD15
1.0A
J44
Power
Device No. selection Mate
switches #1
JD14
JD15
J44
(1) When using the CRT sharing function, mount the device No.
selection switches on the cabinet.
(2) The total length of the cables (J129, J130, J131, J44 x n) linking the
detachable LCD/MDI unit to the Power Mate units must not exceed
50 m.
a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 24V line
and 0V line. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine
the cable length so that 24 VDC 10% is available at connector
CA50 of the detachable LCD/MDI unit.
the last Power Mate unit.
(5) The connections from Power Mate #0 to any additional Power Mate
units are the same as those for the CRT/MDI unit.
connectors on the connector panel that are shaded ( ) in the above
158
Cabinet
Power Mate
CA50 (01) RXD Connection Connector panel RXD JD14 (01)
CA50 (02) *RXD panel *RXD JD14 (02)
TXD JD14 (03)
CA50 (03) TXD
*TXD JD14 (04)
CA50 (04) *TXD
0V JD14 (11, 12)
CA50 (15) ATCH1 (NOTE 1) to DI
ATCH
CA50 (16) ATCH2 ITPGA JD14 (05)
(NOTE 2) *ITPGA JD14 (06)

+24V CA50 (09, 10) +24V
ITPGB JD14 (07)
CA50 (19, 20) 0V *ITPGB JD14 (08)
CA50 (05) FG SI0 JD14 (09)
(Cabinet) Shield *SI0 JD14 (20)
CA50 (06) *SEL0 SI1 JD14 (13)
Device No.
CA50 (07) *SEL1 *SI1 JD14 (14)
selection
CA50 (08) *SEL2 switches on SI2 JD14 (15)
the machine
CA50 (14) *SEL3 operator’s 0V +24V *SI2 JD14 (16)
CA50 (17) *SEL4 panel External JD14 (17)
SI3
power
CA50 (18) *SEL7 *SI3 JD14 (18)
supply
NOTE
connected.
159

See Section 7.5.4.1.2).
See Section 7.5.4.1.3).
JD14 (PCR– EV20MDT)
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0V
J131
03 TXD 13 SI1
04 *TXD 14 *SI1
HONDA TSUSHIN KO- 05 ITPGA 15 SI2

GYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 *ITPGA 16 *SI2
FANUC specifications 07 ITPGB 17 SI3

Soldering type (with
case) 08 *ITPGB 18 *SI3
A02B–0120–K301
09 SI0 19
Crimp type (with case)
A02B–0120–K302
10 20 *SI0
160

JD14 Power Mate
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
05
ITPGA ITPGA
06
*ITPGA *ITPGA
07
ITPGB ITPGB
08
*ITPGB *ITPGB
09
SI0 SI0
20
*SI0 *SI0
13
SI1 SI1
14
*SI1 *SI1
15
SI2 SI2
16
*SI2 *SI2
17
SI3 SI3
18
*SI3 *SI3
11
0V 0V
12
0V 0V
Shield
Cable
clamp
Recommended cable
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd., Hitachi Cable, Ltd.
161
6) Details of connector panel
RXD RXD
*RXD *RXD
TXD TXD
To connection *TXD *TXD

panel
ATCH ITPGA
R1
+24V *ITPGA
0V ITPGB
R2
*ITPGB
SI0 To connector JD14 on

R3 Power Mate
*SI0
SI1
R4
*SI1
SI2
R5
*SI2
SI3
R6
*SI3
0V
ATCH To DI on Power Mate
+24V
To external power
0V supply
R1 to R6 : 200W 1 / 4W
162
7.6 The following three types of DPL/MDI units are available:

CONNECTION WITH
THE DPL/MDI
CE Maximum line length Relaying Cable
marking
DPL/MDI unit Not compatible 2m Not allowed Provided with the unit (2 m).
Long–distance DPL/MDI unit Not compatible 40m Allowed To be prepared by the machine tool builder.
A cable (2 m/7 m/14 m) manufactured by FA-
NUC can be used for the DPL/MDI side cable.
Dustproof DPL/MDI unit Compatible 40m Allowed Only a cable (2 m/7 m/14 m) manufactured by
FANUC must be used for the DPL/MDI side
cable.
(1) Connection using no junction cable
Power Mate DPL/MDI
D15.M J6 D15.M
M4 CNPR
(2) Connection using junction cable J13
Power Mate Panel DPL/MDI
D15.M D15.F J6
M4 CNPR
J13 D15.M D15.M
Junction cable
(3) Precautions on connection

Be sure to turn off the power to the Power Mate before pulling out or
plugging in the connector on the DPL/MDI. Other connectors of the
contacts for the Power Mate and junction connector can be pulled out
and plugged in at any time.
163
(4) Details of cable J6
Power DPL/MDI
Mate
M4, CNPR
panel
(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) RXD TXD (12)
(11) *RXD *TXD (13)
(12) TXD RXD (10)
(13) *TXD *RXD (11)
(05) +5V +5V (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS CTS (15)
(14) *RTS *CTS (08)
(15) CTS RTS (06)
(08) *CTS *RTS (14)
Shell Shell
Shield
Male Always connect the shell of each connector to 0V. Female
The following three types of cables (with connectors) can be

purchased from FANUC.
The DPL/MDI unit is delivered together with a 2–m cable. For the
dustproof DPL/MDI unit, select one of the cables listed in the table
below.
Cable length Order drawing No. Cable resistance
2m type A02B–0118–K820 0.44W
7m type A02B–0118–K821 1.55W
14m type A02B–0118–K822 3.11W
The following connectors are used on both the Power Mate and the
DPL/MDI.
D–SUB 15–pin male connector of the M3 screw–lock type ( 2)
Ordr the following drawing No. when purchasing the above FANUC
connector. Note that this connector cannot hold cables with a
diameter of 8 mm or more. Select proper wires for cabling.
Drawing No.: A02B–0118–K900
(17JE–23150–02 (D8B) of Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
Co., Ltd)
As shown in the figure above, pair off the following cables into
twisted pairs: RXD and *RXD, TXD and *TXD, RTS and *RTS, and
CTS and *CTS. If any of these cables are incorrectly paired,
problems caused by noise may result.
Determine the length of the cable by referring to (6) below.
164
(5) Details of cable J13
Power Junction
Mate connector
M4
(01) 0V 0V (01)
(04) *ATCHPGM *ATCHPGM (04)
(09) *ATCHOPP *ATCHOPP (09)
(10) RXD RXD (10)
(11) *RXD *RXD (11)
(12) TXD TXD (12)
(13) *TXD *TXD (13)
(05) +5V +5V (05)
(07) 0V 0V (07)
(06) RTS RTS (06)
(14) *RTS *RTS (14)
(15) CTS CTS (15)
(08) *CTS *CTS (08)
Shell Shell
Shield
Male Female
Always connect the shell of each connector to 0V.
Relaying is allowed for the long–distance and dustproof DPL/MDI

units.
Cables need to be prepared by the machine tool builder.
Power Mate side connector is following.
D–SUB 15–pin male connector of the M3 screw–lock type ( 1)
Order the following drawing No. when purchasing the above FANUC
connector. Note that this connector cannot hold cables with a
diameter of 8 mm or more. Select proper wires for cabling.
(17JE–23150–02 (D8B) of Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
Co., Ltd)
Use the following junction connector on the DPL/MDI:
D–SUB 15–pin female connector of the M3 jack–socket type
( 1)
Order the following drawing Nos. when purchasing this connector:
17JE–13150–02 (D1) connector ( 1) of
Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
17L–003B jack socket ( 1) of
Daiichi Denshi Kogyo
The following figure is an example of the mounting holes on the panel
when the above connector is used. Mount the connector from behind
the panel, and fasten the connector to the panel by sandwiching the
panel between the jack socket (fitting fixture) and a nut for the M3
screw. The nut for the M3 screw must be prepared by the machine tool
builder. The maximum thickness of the panel is 1.3 mm.
165
B"0.1 Panel
Nut
E or more 2–φ3.2"0.1 Connector
11.4 or more Male

connector
10° Jack socket
4–R3.4 Inside Outside
surface surface
B=33.32, E=28.8 (Unit : mm)
As shown in the figure above, pair off the following cables into
twisted pairs: RXD and *RXD, TXD and *TXD, RTS and *RTS, and
CTS and *CTS. If any of these cables are incorrectly paired,
problems caused by noise may result. Determine the length of the
cable by referring to (6) below.
(6) Selection of the cable
Select cables by applying the formula shown below so that the total
resistance of the wires for the power system (0 V and +5 V) is 3.9
ohms or less. Note, however, that a cable of 40 m or longer must not
be used even if it satisfies the formula.
ȏ R A t 3.9
1000
ȏ : Cable length [m]
R : Resistance of the wire for the power system [ohms/km]
A+ 1 ) 1
Number of wires for ) 5V Number of wires for 0V
Example:When two wires are used for each of 0 V and +5 V, and the
resistance of the wire is 233 ohms/km
A=1/2+1/2=1
233
ȏ 1000
1 t 3.9
∴ ȏ < 16.7 ...

Therefore, a cable of up to 16.7 m can be used.
166
7.7
I/O DEVICE
INTERFACE
7.7.1 (1) RS–232–C interface signal names

RS–232–C Interface Generally, the RS–232–C interface uses the following signals:
Specification
Output
SD (Send data)
Input
RD (Receive data)
RS (Request to send) When CS is not used,
CS (Ready for sending) connect CS to RS.
ER (Equipment ready) When DR is not used,

connect DR to ER.
DR (Data set ready)
CD (Signal quality detect) Be sure to connect ER
SG (Signal ground) with CD.
FG (Frame ground)
Fig.7.7.1(a) RS–232–C interface
167
(2) RS–232–C interface signals

RS–232–C
Signal name Input/output Description
circuit number
SD 103 Output Send data Start bit Stop bit
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RD 104 Input Receive data OFF
(The ISO code for 0 is sent)
RS 105 Output Request to send

This signal is turned on when data output from the NC machine is started; it
is turned off when data output from the NC machine is terminated.
CS 106 Input Ready for sending
When this signal and the DR signal are on, data can be output from the NC
machine. If the I/O device is not ready in time, for example, for punch–out
operation, this signal, when turned off, causes the NC machine to stop data
transmission after sending a maximum of two characters including charac-
ters currently being transmitted. When this signal is not used, be sure to con-
nect this signal to the RS signal on the NC.
DR 107 Input Data set ready
When this signal is no, the I/O device is ready. Generally, this signal is con-
nected with a signal for indicating the power–on state(*1) of the I/O device
(ER signal on the I/O device side). The NC sends data when this signal is
on. If this signal is turned off during data transmission, alarm No.086 occurs.
When this signal is not used, be sure to connect this signal to the ER signal
on the NC.
ER 108.2 Output NC equipment ready
When this signal is on, the NC machine is ready for operation. An I/O device
regards the SD signal sent while the ER signal is on, as valid information.
CD 109 Input Signal quality detect
This signal is not used for connection with an I/O device. Be sure to connect
this signal with the ER signal on the NC in the cable.
SG 102 Signal ground
FG 101 Frame ground
NOTE
The signal is turned on and off as follows:
–3V or lower +3V or higher
Function OFF ON
Signal Condition Marking Spacing
(3) RS–232–C interface transmission system

(a) Start–stop system
In general, two systems can be used for serial interface
transmission: the start–stop system and synchronous system.
With Power Mate the start–stop system is used.
Start–stop system: Information bits are transmitted preceded by
a start signal and followed by a stop signal.
168
1 character in the start–stop system
b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8
Start bit Information bits Stop bits

(8 bits including a parity bit) (2 bits)
(For bit correspondence information, see the description of the SD and

RD signals in ltem 2).
(b) Codes
The following codes are used:
i) EIA code + control codes DC1 to DC4
ii) ISO code + control codes DC1 to DC4
An I/O device must be able to identify the following control
codes output from the NC system:
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
DC1 Start tape reader Ę ° Ę
DC2 Specify tape punch Ę ° Ę
DC3 Stop tape reader Ę Ę ° Ę Ę
DC4 Release tape punch Ę ° Ę
NOTE
The control codes above are commonly used regardless of
whether the EIA code or ISO code is used.
With this interface, control codes DC1 to DC4 are used. Note the
following:
(a) The NC machine can control an I/O device by sending DC1
to DC4.
(b) An I/O device can perform the operations below if it is not
ready to receive data from the NC machine.
(i) The I/O device can temporarily stop data transmission
from the NC machine by using the CS signal on the NC.
The CS signal, when turned off and sent to the NC
machine, causes the NC machine to stop data
transmission after sending a maximum of two
charactersincluding characters currently being
transmitted. When the CS signal is turned on again, data
transmission resumes.
(ii) When control code DC3 is sent to the NC machine, the
NC machine stops data transmission after sending 10 or
less characters. Then, when control code DC1 is sent to
the NC machine, the NC machine resumes data
transmission. When an I/O device containing an
ISO/EIA converter is used, the device needs to satisfy the
specifications of Table 7.7.1 (a).
169
Table 7.7.1
ISO code EIA code
Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 f f ° 0 f ° Numeral 0
1 f f f ° f 1 ° f Numeral 1
3 f f ° f f 3 f ° f f Numeral 3
7 f f f ° f f f 7 ° f f f Numeral 7
8 f f f f ° 8 f ° Numeral 8
9 f f f ° f 9 f f ° f Numeral 9
A f ° f a f f ° f Address A
B f ° f b f f ° f Address B
C f f ° f f c f f f ° f f Address C
D f ° f d f f ° f Address D
E f f ° f f e f f f ° f f Address E
F f f ° f f f f f f ° f f Address F
G f ° f f f g f f ° f f f Address G
H f f ° h f f f ° Address H
I f f f ° f i f f f f ° f Address I
J f f f ° f j f f ° f f Address J
K f f ° f f k f f ° f Address K
L f f f ° f l f ° f f Address L
M f f ° f f m f f ° f Address M
N f f ° f f n f ° f f Address N
O f f f ° f f f o f ° f f Not used at significant information section
in ISO code.
Assumed as program No. in EIA code.
P f f ° p f f ° f f f Address P
Q f f f ° f q f f f ° Address Q
R f f f ° f r f f ° f Address R
S f f ° f f s f f ° f Address S
T f f f ° f t f ° f f Address T
U f f ° f f u f f ° f Address U
V f f ° f f v f ° f f Address V
W f f f ° f f f w f ° f f Address W
X f f f f ° x f f ° f f f Address X
Y f f f ° f y f f f ° Address Y
Z f f f ° f z f f ° f Address Z
DEL f f f f f ° f f f Del f f f f ° f f f Delete (cancel an error punch).
Not punched. Can not be used in signifi-
NUL ° Blank °
cant section in EIA code.
BS f f ° BS f f ° f Back space
HT f ° f Tab f f f ° f f Tabulator
LF or NL f ° f CR or EOB f ° End of block
CR f f ° f f Carriage return
SP f f ° SP f ° Space
% f f ° f f ER f ° f f Absolute rewind stop
( f f ° ( 2–4–5 ) f f ° f Control out (a comment is started)
) f f f f ( 2–4–7 ) f f f Control in (the end of a comment)
+ f f ° f f + f f f ° Positive sign
– f f ° f f – f ° Negative sign
: f f f ° f Colon
/ f f f ° f f f / f f ° f Optional block skip
. f f ° f f . f f f ° f f Period (A decimal point)
# f f ° f f Sharp
$ f ° f Dollar sign
& f f ° f f & f ° f f Ampersand
’ f ° f f f Apostrophe
* f f f ° f Asterisk
, f f f ° f , f f f f f Comma
; f f f f ° f f Semicolon
< f f f ° f Left angle bracket
= f f f f ° f f Equal
> f f f f ° f f Right angle bracket
? f f f ° f f f Question mark
@ f f ° Commercial at mark
” f f Quotation
170
NOTE
When an I/O device containing an ISO/EIA converter is
used, pay special attention to the following in Table 7.7.1(a).
Control–out (start of a comment)

Control–in (end of a comment)
EIA code ( ............... ) CR O ...............
Condition 1 Condition 1 Condition 3 Condition 2
ISO code ( ............... ) LF : ...............
Condition 1 In the EIA code, a card punched at bits 2, 4, and 5

corresponds to the ISO code for the left parenthesis
“(.” A card punched at bits 2, 4, and 7 corresponds
to the ISO code for the right parenthesis “).”
Condition 2 The EIA code for O is converted to the ISO code
for the colon (:).
Condition 3 The EIA code for CR is converted to the ISO code
for LF .
NOTE
Control codes DC1 to DC4 are transmission codes output
from the NC machine, and need not be fed as paper tape
information.
(iii) Transmission rate (baud rate)

The transmission rate (baud rate) indicates the number
of bits sent per second. One of the following baud rates
can be selected by parameter setting:
600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
Example: When 4800 baud is used
Assuming that 1 start bit and 2 stop bits are used
(11 bits/character).
Then,
Number of transmission characters per second=
4800/11 characters per second (maximum)
(iv) Cable length
The cable length varies from one I/O device to another.
For the required cable length, consult with each I/O
device supplier.
171
When the NC receives (1) The NC machine sends a DC1 code.

data (for reading into (2) Upon receipt of the DC1 code, the I/O device starts data transmission
memory) to the NC machine.
(3) While the NC machine is processing, it sends a DC3 code.
(4) Upon receipt of the DC3 code, the I/O device stops data transmission
to the NC machine.
When the DC3 code is sent, the I/O device is to stop data transmission
after sending 10 or less characters. If more than 10 characters are sent,
alarm no.087 occurs.
(5) The NC machine sends another DC1 code when its processing is
completed.
(6) Upon receipt of the DC1 code, the I/O device resumes data
transmission to the NC machine in order to send the remaining data.
(7) Upon completion of data read operation, the NC machine sends
another DC3 code.
(8) The I/O device stops data transmission.
10ms or more 100ms or more
ER (output)
RS (output)
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ ÅÅ
DC1 DC3 DC1 DC3
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
SD (output)
ER code
RD (input)
DR (input)
ÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
CS (input)
1ms or more 10 or less characters
Fig.7.7.1(b)
172
When the NC sends data (1) The NC machine sends a DC2 code.
(punch–out) (2) The NC machine sends punch–out information.
(3) While the I/O device is processing data:
(a) The CS signal on the NC can be turned off to cause the NC
machine to stop data transmission after sending a maximum of
two characters including characters currently being transmitted.
When the CS signal is turned on again, data transmission
resumes. (See Fig. 7.7.1 (c).)
(b) When a DC3 control code is sent to the NC machine, the NC
machine stops data transmission after sending 10 or less
characters, which are counted starting at the time of DC3 code
transmission. Then, when a DC1 control code is sent to the NC,
the NC machine resumes data transmission. (See Fig. 7.7.1 (d).)
(4) Upon completion of data transmission, the NC machine sends a DC4
code.
ER (output)
RS (output)
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
DC2 DC4
SD (output)
DR (input)
CS (input)
1ms or more 2 or less characters
Fig.7.7.1(c)
ER (output)
ÅÅÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅ
RS (output)
DC2 DC4
SD (output)
ÅÅ ÅÅÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅÅÅ
ÅÅ Å
DC3 DC1
RD (input)
10 or less characters
DR (input)
CS (input)
1ms or more
Fig.7.7.1(d)
173
(5) Connecting the RS–232–C interface with an I/O device
NC I/O device
SD SD
RD RD
RS RS
CS CS
ER ER
DR DR
CD CD
SG SG
FG FG
174
7.7.2
RS–232–C Serial Port
Power Mate Relay connector
(DBM–25S)
1 FG
(PCR-EV20MDT) 14
2 SD
1 RD 11 SD 15
3 RD
2 0V 12 0V 16
J42 4 RS
3 DR 13 ER 17
5 CS
4 0V 14 0V 18
6 DR
5 CS 15 RS 19
Connector 7 SG
6 0V 16 0V PCR–E20FA 20 ER
8 CD
7 CD 17 or 21
9
8 0V 18 PCR–E20FS 22
Case: PCR– 10
9 19 +24V 23
V20CA 11
10 +24V 20 24
12
25 +24V
13
Cable wiring J42
Power Mate Relay connector

1 3
RD RD
2
0V
3 6
DR DR
4
0V
5 5
CS CS
6
0V
7 8
CD CD
8
0V
9
10
+24V
11 2
SD SD
12
0V
13 20
ER ER
14
0V
15 4
RS RS
16 7
0V SG
17
18
19 25
24V +24V
20 1
FG
Shield
Recommended cable material

A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10–pair) (line length: 15m or less)
175
7.7.3
FANUC FLOPPY
Relaying connector signal layout
CASSETTE and Handy
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
File Connection
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24
Cable side connector

Connector : DBM-25P
(JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONIC INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Lock metal : DDB–C2–J9
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Power Mate Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
JD5 ELECTRONIC
Relaying
(PCR-EV20MDT) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V FANUC
FLOPPY
3 DR 13 ER
CASSETTE/
4 0V 14 0V FG HANDY
5 CS 15 RS FILE
6 0V 16 0V +24V10%
Connector Appendant 1.0A
7 CD 17 PCR-E20FA
8 0V 18 or
9 19 +24V PCR-E20FS
10 +24V 20
Case: PCR-
V20CA
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay
cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0284#10P
(Line length : 15m or less)
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface
when connecting FANUC cassette/Handy file.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 The Power Mate can be used to route 24 VDC power to the
FANUC Floppy Cassette/Handy File. In this case,
additional 24 VDC (1.0 A) power needs to be fed to the
Power Mate.
176
7.7.4
When External Power
Relaying connector signal layout
Supply Is Used
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
FG SD RD RS CS DR SG CD
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
ER +24
Cable side connector

Connector : DBM-25P
Lock metal : DDB–C2–J9
Relaying connector
Connector : DBM-25S
(JAPAN AVIATION
ELECTRONIC
INDUSTRY., LTD.)
Power Mate Lock metal : D20418-J2
(JAPAN AVIATION
JD5 ELECTRONIC
Relaying
(PCR-EV20MDT) INDUSTRY., LTD.)
cable
1 RD 11 SD
2 0V 12 0V FANUC
FLOPPY
3 DR 13 ER
CASSETTE/
4 0V 14 0V FG HANDY
5 CS 15 RS FILE
6 0V 16 0V +24VDC
24 VDC Appendant 10%
7 CD 17
10A 1.0A
8 0V 18
9 19 (+24V) 0V is conĆ
10 (+24V) 20
nected to
SG.
NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector, relay
cable and 24VDC.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification : A66L-0001-0284#10P
(Line length : 15m or less)
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface
when connecting FANUC cassette/Handy file.
The baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 If 24 VDC power is supplied to the FANUC Floppy
Cassette/Handy File from another power supply, 24 VDC
(1.0 A) power for FANUC I/O devices need not be fed to the
Power Mate.
177
7.8
EXTERNAL PULSE
INPUT INTERFACE
7.8.1
Diferential Input Type
(Position Coder Type) Power Mate
JA12 Name Description

(PCR–EV20MDT)
PA, *PA A–phase signal
1 11
2 12 0V B–phase signal
PB, *PB
3 (HA) 13
4 (HB) 14 0V
5 PA 15
6 *PA 16 0V
7 PB 17
8 *PB 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V)
Cable wiring
External pulse
Power Mate generator
5
PA PA
6 #24AWG
*PA *PA
7 pair
PB PB
8
*PB *PB
12,14,16
0V 0V #20AWG
SHIELD
Recommended cable material

A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG+6×#24AWG×3)
#20AWG = 0.0394W/m
NOTE
1 This interface cannot be used together with an external
pulse input interface of single–phase input type.
2 The Power Mate can supply power to a unit requiring not
more than 0.35 A at 5 V. In this case, pay careful attention
to the voltage drop caused by the cable resistance. Assume
4.95 V for the 5 V power of the Power Mate.
3 Line length is 5m or less.
178
(a) Operating conditions

The maximum allowable frequency for the input signal is 100 kHz
(the frequency is, however, multiplied by four in the CNC).
1 Pulses for positive–direction move command
PA
*PA
PB
*PB
TP TP TP TP
TCYC
2 Pulses for negative–direction move command
PA
*PA
PB
*PB
TP TP TP TP
TCYC TP : 1.2 µs or longer

TCYC : 10 µs or longer
Fig.7.8.1(a) Input pulse waveforms
Pulses for positive– Pulses for negative–

direction move direction move
Externally input pulses command command
PA
PB
Positive–
Output from direction
the discriminator pulses
for the CNC
Negative–
direction
pulses
Fig.7.8.1(b) Sequence
179
(b) Recommend circuit
External pulse generator Power Mate
SN75113 or equivalent Connector JA12 Receiver circuit
4,3
5 5 PA
PA
6
6 *PA
7 1,2
9
10 12,13
7 PB
11
PB
8 *PB
14,15
The numbers indicate

the pin numbers of the
SN75113. 12,14,16
Fig.7.8.1(c) Recommended circuit
180
7.8.2
Single–phase Input
Type (Using a Manual Power Mate External pulse generator
Pulse Generator) JA12
(PCR–EV20MDT)
1 11
2 12 0V
0V HA HB
3 HA 13
4 HB 14 0V
5 (PA) 15
6 (*PA) 16 0V
7 (PB) 17
8 (*PB) 18 (+5V)
9 (+5V) 19
10 20 (+5V)
Cable connection
3
HA1 HA #24AWG
4 pair
HB1 HB
12,14,16
0V 0V #20AWG
Shield
Recommended wire
A66L–0001–0286 (#20AWG x 6 + #24AWG x 3 pairs)
#20AWG=0.0394W/m
NOTE
1 This interface cannot be used simultaneously with the an
external pulse input interface of differential input type.
2 The Power Mate can supply power to devices requiring
5 V, 0.35 A or less. In this case, pay careful attention to the
voltage drop caused by the cable resistance. Assume 4.95
V for the 5 V power of the Power Mate.
3 Line length is 50m or less.
181
Command pulses The following figure shows the relationship between the command pulses
and electrical specifications of the HA and HB signals.
HA
T
T14
HB
1 1
T4 T4
Positive–
direction
pulses
Negative–
direction
pulses
Tu330µsec
Direction reversed
Threshold voltages of The threshold voltages of the Power Mate receiver are:
the Power Mate receiver Vth(°) = 3.3 V
Vth(±) = 2.1 V
Recommended circuit
VCC
300 W
to CNC OUTPUT
0V
182
7.9 Servo amplifier interface of Power Mate–H is type B.

INTERFACE WITH
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Cables J93 to J98
Power Mate Servo amplifier module
JSn JSnB
1 IRn 11 ISn 1 IRn 11 ISn
2 GDRn 12 GDSn 2 GDRn 12 GDSn
3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn 3 *PWMAn 13 *ENBLn
4 0V 14 0V 4 0V 14 0V
5 *PWMCn 15 PDN 5 *PWMCn 15 PDN
6 0V 16 *PDn 6 0V 16 *PDn
7 *PWMEn 17 PREQn 7 *PWMEn 17 PREQn
8 0V 18 *PREQn 8 0V 18 *PREQn
9 *DRDYn 19 0V n: Axis 9 *DRDYn 19 0V

10 *MCONn 20 0V number 10 *MCONn 20 0V
(1 to 6)
Cable connection
1 1
IRn IRn
2 2
GDRn GDRn
3 3
*PWMAn *PWMAn
4 4
0V 0V
5 5
*PWMCn *PWMCn
6 6
0V 0V
7 7
*PWMEn *PWMEn
8 8
0V 0V
9 9
*DRDYn *DRDYn
10 10
*MCONn *MCONn
11 11
ISn ISn
12 12
GDSn GDSn
13 13
*ENBLn *ENBLn
14 14
0V 0V
15 15
PDn PDn
16 16
*PDn *PDn
17 17
PREQn PREQn
18 18
*PREQn *PREQn
19 19
0V 0V
20 20
0V 0V
Shield
Recommended wire
A66L–0001–0284#10P(#28AWG 10 pairs)
Recommended cable specification
A02B–0120–K800(5m)
183
Notes on cable fabrication:

The IRn and ISn signals are sensitive to noise. So, use internal paired
wires of the cable for these signals.
For an explanation of how to connect the servo amplifier or the servo
motor, refer to the manual supplied with those motors.
184
7.10
CONNECTION TO
THE HANDY
OPERATOR’S PANEL
7.10.1 The handy operator’s panel has machine operator’s panel functions for
Outline teaching operations, as well as DPL/MDI functions for displaying and
setting the Power Mate parameters and programs.
Cabinet Machine Handy operator’s panel

operator’s
panel
Emer-
gency
stop
contact
CRT/MDI
interface
Connection
panel
Connector
Safety relay
panel
Handy operator’s
panel enable
switch
Servo External pow-
amplifier er supply
24 VDC
(1) The machine operator’s panel functions are implemented by Power

Mate ladder programs.
(2) The key sheet can be modified to suit the specific needs of the
machine tool builder. So, a dedicated machine operator’s panel can
be produced easily.
(3) No cables are provided with the handy operator’s panel.
(4) The customer is responsible for preparing a connector panel, external
power supply, safety relay, emergency stop contact, and connection
panel.
(5) The customer is responsible for preparing all inter–unit connection
cables.
(6) The CE standard does not allow the handy operator’s panel to be made
detachable by installing a connection panel in the cabinet. (This is
because the CE standard does not allow emergency stop operation to
be bypassed.) In this case, keep the handy operator’s panel connected
at all times.
185
7.10.2 The handy operator’s panel has an emergency stop button and deadman’s
Emergency Stop switches (right side and left side). In any of the following cases, the
emergency stop state is assumed, and the Power Mate and servo amplifier
are so notified:
1) When the emergency stop button is pressed
2) When the deadman’s switch enable switch is on, and both of the
deadman’s switches are released
3) When a handy operator’s panel error occurs, disabling normal
communications, while the handy operator’s panel is being used
Notifying the Power Mate The Power Mate is notified of an emergency stop by means of
of an emergency stop communication from the handy operator’s panel when the emergency
stop state is set with the handy operator’s panel.
When the handy operator’s panel is connected as shown in the figure
below, pressing the DOOR OPEN LIMIT switch or the emergency stop
switch on the machine operator’s panel also places the handy operator’s
panel in the emergency stop state.
Notifying the servo To notify the servo amplifier of an emergency stop, the emergency stop
amplifier of an contact of the handy operator’s panel is connected in series with a separate
emergency stop emergency stop contact such as that of the machine operator’s panel or the
door open limit switch. If any of these contacts is closed, the relay for
emergency stop input to the servo amplifier is activated.
Machine op- Door open limit Handy operator’s

erator’s panel switch, etc. panel
24V
Servo amplifier
Safety Emergency
relay stop input
186
7.10.3 The CE standard does not allow the handy operator’s panel to be made
Connection Allowing detachable by installing a connection panel in the cabinet. This is because
the CE standard does not allow emergency stop operation to be bypassed.
the Handy Operator’s In this case, keep the handy operator’s panel connected at all times.
Panel to be Detached
1) Inter–unit connection
Cabinet
Connection
panel
Connector Power
Handy panel Mate
operator’s J118
panel J122 J120
JD14
CRS10
Terminating
24VDC10% Handy operator’s JD15
unit
0.2A panel enable
switch
J135 24 VDC
power
supply
Emergency
J121 J119
stop on ma-
chine opera-
tor’s panel,
etc.
Safety (NOTE 1)
relay
NOTE
1 Safety relay:
This safety relay acts as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and a contact
for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier Series Safe
Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
2 The total length of the cables (J118, J122, and J120) between the handy operator’s panel and
the Power Mate must not exceed 50 m.
3 Cables J118, J122, and J135 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line for the handy operator’s
panel. The 24 VDC power is subject to a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of
the 0V and 24V lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the cable length
so that 24 VDC +10% is available at connector CRS10 of the handy operator’s panel.
4 Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0166–D003) to connector JD15 of the Power Mate. The CRT
terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) cannot be used.
187
The CE standard is not satisfied by this method.

Cabinet
Handy operator’s panel Connection Connector
CRS10 (01) RXD panel panel RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate
CRS10 (02) *RXD *RXD JD14 (02)
CRS10 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)
CRS10 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)
+5V CRS10 (15) ATCH1 ATCH1 JD14 (09)
CRS10 (16) ATCH2 ATCH2 JD14 (20)
0V JD14 (11, 12)

Emergency
stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP *ESP to DI
Deadman’s
switch enable (Separate emergency
switch EMGEN (NOTE2) Emergency Operator’s
CRS10 (13) stop contact such as panel +24V
door open limit switch) stop SB1
Deadman’s switch (right)
SQ1
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM (NOTE1)
+24V 0V 24VDC
CRS10 (09, 10) +24V SR1 (NOTE 3)
KT1
CRS10 (19, 20) 0V Safety
relay +24V
CRS10 (05) FG Servo amplifier
(Plastic case Shield
with conductive ESP
coating)
NOTE
1 While the switch is off, the handy operator’s panel emergency stop operation is bypassed.
While the switch is on, power is fed to the handy operator’s panel, such that emergency stop
operation is enabled.
2 When the deadman’s switch enable switch is not being used, never make this connection.
Thus, the deadman’s switches are enabled at all times.
3 A separate safety relay is required to act as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo
amplifier, and also as a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control
Motor Amplifier α Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations
(A–71429–S13J).”
4 To attach or detach a handy operator’s panel while the Power Mate is turned on, 0V of the Power
Mate must be connected to 0V of the handy operator’s panel before any other line.
5 Unless +24 V is supplied to EMGTP (CRS10–11), the handy operator’s panel is placed in the
emergency stop state.
188
2) Connection panel
The connection panel can be used to make the handy operator’s panel
detachable from the cabinet.
On the connection panel, install a connector to which the handy
operator’s panel cable can be attached, and also install a switch to
enable/disable the handy operator’s panel.
Handy operator’s panel enable switch
A switch with contact A and contact B is required. contact A is used Example of switch
to feed 24 VDC to the handy operator’s panel, while contact B is CONNECT
used for bypassing handy operator’s panel emergency stop while the
switch is set to DISCONNECT.
DIS–
CONNECT
The CE standard does not allow emergency stop opera-
tion to be bypassed.
Handy operator’s Handy operator’s panel Connector panel

panel enable switch
24V
24 VDC input SR1
Emergency stop
To connector
Connection panel panel relay
(1) While the enable switch is set to DISCONNECT (while the switch is
off)
D The handy operator’s panel does not receive 24 VDC, hence cannot
be used.
D Emergency stop cannot be performed from the handy operator’s
panel.
(2) While the enable switch is set to CONNECT (while the switch is on)
D The handy operator’s panel receives 24 VDC, hence can be used.
D Emergency stop can be performed from the handy operator’s panel.
The emergency stop described above occurs when the emergency stop
button on the handy operator’s panel is pressed, or when the deadman’s
switch enable switch is on and both of the deadman’s switches are
released.
189
Handy operator’s
panel
CRS10
04 03 02 01 Connection panel
(connector panel)
*TXD TXD *RXD RXD J118
10 09 08 07 06 05
+24V +24V FG
(1)Soldering type
16 15 14 13 12 11 HR22–12TPD–20S
(housing and
ATCH2 ATCH1 EMGEN EMGDM EMGTP
contact)
20 19 18 17 (2)Crimp type
S Housing
0V 0V HR22–12TPD–20SC
S Contact
HR22–SC–122
S Manual crimping tool
HR22–TA2428HC
FANUC specification
A02B–0211–K381
The following are included:

S HR22–12TPD–20SC x1
S HR22–SC–122 x20
190
Handy operator’s panel Connection panel

CRS10 (connector panel)
01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
Shielded
#24AWG pair
03
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
+24V +24V
10
+24V +24V
11
EMGTP EMGTP
12
EMGDM EMGDM
13 #24AWG
EMGEN EMGEN
15
ATCH1 ATCH1
16
ATCH2 ATCH2
19
0V 0V
20
0V 0V
05 Drain
FG wire FG
Shield (NOTE 1)
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0298: Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
(Shielded #24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10, drain wire, external cable diameter: 8.5 mm)
NOTE
1 FG
S Using a drain wire, connect CRS10(05) to the FG terminal of the connector panel.
S Connect the FG terminal on the connector panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
2 The external diameter of the cable used with connector CRS10 is 8.5 mm. If the external
191
JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)
01 RXD 11 0V
02 *RXD 12 0V
J120
03 TXD 13
04 *TXD 14
HONDA TSUSHIN 05 15
KOGYO CO., LTD.
PCR–E20F 06 16
FANUC specifications 07 17
SSoldering type (with
case) 08 18
A02B–0120–K301
SCrimp type (with case)
09 ATCH1 19
A02B–0120–K302
10 20 ATCH2

Connector JD14 Power Mate
panel 01
RXD RXD
02
*RXD *RXD
Shielded
03
#28AWG pair
TXD TXD
04
*TXD *TXD
09
ATCH1 ATCH1
20
ATCH2 ATCH2
11 #28AWG
0V 0V
12
0V 0V
Shield
Cable clamp
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG 10 pairs):
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
192
5) Details of cables J119 and J121
Emergency stop on
the machine opera-
tor’s panel To Power Mate *ESP input
24V
Connector
J121 panel
(Separate emergen-
cy stop contact such
as the door open
limit switch)
Handy operator’s panel J118
Emergency stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP
Deadman’s switch The deadman’s switches can be en-

enable switch EMGEN abled at all times by not making this
CRS10 (13)
connection.
Deadman’s
switch (right)
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM J119
Safety
relay
(NOTE)
NOTE
Safety relay:
This safety relay acts both as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and as
a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to the ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α
Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
Enable the safety relay on the handy operator’s panel by connecting the emergency stop
contact of the handy operator’s panel in series with a separate emergency stop contact such
as the emergency stop contact of the machine operator’s panel or the door open limit switch.
With the connection shown above, the safety relay is switched off when:
1) The emergency stop button is pressed, or
2) The deadman’s switch enable switch is on (with the contact open), and both of the
deadman’s switches are released.
So, the contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier and the MCC contact are opened
to turn off the power.
193
Connection Connector
panel panel
RXTP RXTP Shielded

#24AWG pair
*RXTP *RXTP
TXTP TXTP Shielded

#24AWG pair
*TXTP *TXTP
#24AWG +24V +24V
#24AWG +24V +24V
EMGEN EMGEN
EMGDM EMGDM
#24AWG
EMGTP EMGTP #24AWG

#24AWG
ATCH1 ATCH1
ATCH2 ATCH2
0V 0V
0V 0V
(NOTE 1) Drain
FG wire (NOTE 2)
Handy operator’s Shield

panel enable switch
EMGTP
EMGDM
+24V
+24V
Recommended cables:
cable A66L–0001–0298 (#24AWG pair x 2, #24AWG x 10), Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
cable #24AWG 5
cable Twisted–pair cable with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2 (FG)
NOTE
1 FG on the connection panel:
Connect the FG terminal on the connection panel to the frame ground. For this connection,
use a twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J118 to ground.
2 FG on the connector panel:
On the connector panel, connect this FG terminal to the frame ground. For this connection, use
twisted–pair cable, 100 to 300 mm long and with a cross–sectional area of at least 2 mm2.
At this FG terminal, connect the shield of cable J122 to ground.
194
Connector panel
External power
supply J135
24VDC
External power Connector panel

supply
24VDC +24V
0V 0V
Power Mate
Terminating unit JD15
01
RD B
R 02 Direct resistor connection
RD A
Terminating resistor (Power Mate side) R

For R in the terminating unit, use a 100–ohm 1/2W resistor.
195
7.10.4
Keeping the Handy 1) Inter–unit connection diagram
Operator’s Panel
Connected at All Times
Cabinet
Connector Power
Handy panel
operator’s Mate
panel J118 J120
JD14
CRS10
24VDC 10% Terminating JD15

0. 2A unit
J135 24 VDC
power
supply
Emergency stop
on machine op- J121 J119
erator’s panel,
etc.
Safety
relay (NOTE 1)
NOTE
1 The safety relay acts both as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo amplifier, and as
a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to ”FANUC Control Motor Amplifier α Series
Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
2 The total length of the cables (J118 and J120) between the handy operator’s panel and the
Power Mate must not exceed 50 m.
3 Cables J118 and J135 also serve as a 24 VDC power supply line to the handy operator’s panel.
The 24 VDC power is subject to a voltage drop corresponding to the total resistance of the 0V
and 24V lines. Taking this voltage drop into consideration, determine the cable length so that
24 VDC 10% is available at connector CRS10 of the handy operator’s panel.
4 Attach a terminating unit (A02B–0166–D003) to connector JD15 of the Power Mate. The CRT
terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001) cannot be used.
5 For details of connecting cables J118 to J121 and J135, see Section 7.10.3.
196

Handy operator’s panel
CRS10 (01) RXD Connector panel RXD JD14 (01) Power
Mate
CRS10 (02) *RXD *RXD JD14 (02)
CRS10 (03) TXD TXD JD14 (03)
CRS10 (04) *TXD *TXD JD14 (04)
+5V CRS10 (15) ATCH1 ATCH1 JD14 (09)
CRS10 (16) ATCH2 ATCH2 JD14 (20)
0V JD14 (11, 12)

Emergency
stop CRS10 (11) EMGTP *ESP to DI
Deadman’s
switch en- (Separate emergency
able switch Operator’s panel
CRS10 (13) EMGEN (NOTE 1) stop contact such as the Emergen-SB1 +24V
door open limit switch) cy stop
Deadman’s
switch (right)
SQ1
Deadman’s
switch (left) CRS10 (12) EMGDM
+24V
CRS10 (09, 10) +24V 0V 24VDC
(NOTE 2)
CRS10 (19, 20) 0V KT1
Safety
relay +24V
CRS10 (05) FG Servo amplifier
(Plastic case with Shield ESP
conductive coating)
NOTE
1 When the deadman’s switch enable switch is not used, do not make this connection. Thus, the
deadman’s switches are enabled at all times.
2 A separate safety relay is required to act as a contact for emergency stop input to the servo
amplifier, and as a contact for the MCC contactor. For details, refer to ”FANUC Control Motor
Amplifier α Series Safe Circuit Conditions and Sample Configurations (A–71429–S13J).”
3 Unless +24 V is supplied to EMGTP (CRS10–11), the handy operator’s panel is placed in the
emergency stop state.
7.10.5 When using the handy operator’s panel, set the Power Mate rotary
Power Mate Setting switches as follows:
1) Set RSW to 0.
2) Set MTSW to 3.
197
7.11 The connection unit is used to connect the master units of different
FANUC I/O Link systems, such as the CNC and F–D Mate, with the I/O
FANUC I/O LINK Link and transfer the DI/DO signals between the master units.
CONNECT UNIT
System A System B
CNC or Power Power CNC or

F–D Mate supply supply F–D Mate
of +24V of +24V
I/O Link I/O Link

Slave Slave

FANUC I/O Link
connection unit
DI DO
DO DI

I/O Link Master : F–D Mate, FS–16, FS–15, Power Mate

I/O Link Slave : I/O unit, Power Mate
: FANUC I/O Link
Fig.7.11 System Using the FANUC I/O Link Connection Unit
The I/O data can be sent between the master units of two independent
FANUC I/O Link systems. While a FANUC I/O Link system is turned
off, or stopped for adjustment or maintenance, another FANUC I/O Link
system on the same line can be operated. All the DI data sent from the
stopped system is automatically processed as 0. If normal
communication between two systems is interrupted by a sudden stop of
one system, it takes from several tens to several hundreds of milliseconds
to start that function. During this period, the most recent data before the
system stop is transferred. Take this into account when designing the
systems.
198
(1) Specifications
Item Description
Function of the I/O Link The I/O Link has two I/O Link interfaces in the slave
mode and transfers the DI/DO data between the in-
terfaces.
[Interfaces]
Electric/optical
Electric/electric Select a desired interface.
Optical/optical
Maximum number of DI/DO DI: 256, DO: 256

signals (The actual number of signals to be used depends on
the signal assignment by the host unit.)
Outside dimensions 180 × 150 × approx. 50mm

W H D
See Appendix A.
Installation method The connection unit is a separate unit. It is installed

in the power magnetics cabinet.
For the installation dimensions, see Appendix A.
Operating environment Temperature : 0°C to 60°C

Relative humidity : 5% to 75% (No condensation is
allowed.)
Vibration : 0.5 G or less
Power supply 24VDC10% 0.2A
Ordering code
Interface Code
Electric/optical interface A20B–2000–0410
Electric/electric interface A20B–2000–0411
Optical/optical interface A20B–2000–0412
199
(2) Connection
(a) Example of a connection diagram
AC power input AC power input
External power External power

Master unit supply of +24 V supply of +24 V Master unit
of the I/O of the I/O
Link Link
(1) (1)
JD1A (3) (3) JD1A
Optical I/O
JD1A1 for Link adapter
CP* CP*
Power Mate
Electric Optical
interface interface (2)
JD1B* COPB*
JD1A* COPA*
(2)
(1)
FANUC I/O Link * : 1 or 2 (channel number)
connection unit
(electric/optical interface)
: Signal cable (electric)
The frame of the FANUC I/O Link connection
(2) : Signal cable (optical)
unit must be connected to a proper ground.
(3) : Power cable
[Connectors of the I/O Link connection unit]
Electric/ Electric/ Optical/

optical interface electric interface optical interface
Connectors of the Connectors of the Connectors of the

I/O Link interface I/O Link interface I/O Link interface
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2
JD1A1 COPA2 JD1A1 JD1A2 COPA1 COPA2
JD1B1 COPB2 JD1B1 JD1B2 COPB1 COPB2
CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2 CP1 CP2
200
(b) Signal cable (electric)
JD1A1/JD1A2 JD1B1/JD1B2
11 0V 1 RXB 11 0V 1 RXA
12 0V 2 RXB 12 0V 2 RXA
13 0V 3 TXB 13 0V 3 TXA
14 0V 4 TXB 14 0V 4 TXA
15 0V 5 15 0V 5
16 0V 6 16 0V 6
17 7 17 7
18 8 18 8
19 9 19 9
20 10 20 10
Connect unit JD1A1/JD1A2 Another unit JD1B

or
Another unit JD1A Connect unit JD1B1/JD1B2
RXB (01) (03) TXA

RXB (02) (04) TXA Twisted–pair cable
TXB (03) (01) RXA
TXB (04) (02) RXA
(09) (09)
(*) (18) (18) (*) Since the electric interface
(20) (20) of the connection unit does
0V (11) (11) 0V not have +5 V pins, the opti-
0V (12) (12) 0V cal I/O Link adapter cannot
be connected.
0V (13) (13) 0V
To use the optical interface,
0V (14) (14) 0V use a unit equipped with the
0V (15) (15) 0V optical interface.
0V (16) (16) 0V These connections can be
omitted.
Shield
Frame ground (Ground the cable at either end.)
· Connecter on the cable : PCR–E20FA (Honda Tsushin)
· Cable : A66L–0001–0284#10P or equivalent
· Cable length : Up to 10m
(c) Signal cable (optical)

D Code:A66L–6001–0009#XXXX
XXXX indicates a specified cable length. The cable length can
be specified as follows:
1 m: L1R003
10 m: L10R03
100 m: L100R3
D Cable length: Up to 200 m
(d) Power cable
CP1/CP2 connector
1 2 3 Connector for Y
Y + 24V 0V (Input)
X + 24V 0V (Output)
201
D +24 VDC is supplied through the connector for Y. The power

can be supplied from X to the next unit if the power capacity
is not exceeded.
(X may be used for input, and Y may be used for output.)
D Power must be supplied to both CP1 and CP2.
D Connector on the cable
Connector for Y : A63L–0001–0460#3LKY
(AMP(Japan), Ltd.)
Connector for X : A63L–0001–0460#3LKX
(AMP(Japan), Ltd.)
Contact : A63L–0001–0456#BS
(AMP(Japan), Ltd.)
D Wire : Vinyl, electric wire, AWG20–16
D Wire length : Determine the wire length required to provide the
rated supply voltage at the receiving, taking into
account the voltage drop due to the resistance of
the wire and power fluctuation.
(e) Connecting the frame ground
Connect the frame of this unit to a frame ground (class 3 or
higher), using a wire with a cross–sectional area of 5.5 mm2 or
greater.
An M4 terminal for frame ground is provided.
202
7.12
CONNECTING A
TOUCH PANEL
7.12.1 Touch panels manufactured by Digital Corporation can be connected to

Outline the Power Mate–H.
A touch panel program can read Power Mate–H information such as input
relay, output relay, internal relay, keep relay, data table, timer, and counter
information. Also, a touch panel screen can be created by using the read
information.
Through touch panels, Power Mate–H information such as internal relay,
keep relay, data table, timer, and counter information can be set.
7.12.2 The following touch panels, manufactured by Digital Corporation, can be

Supported Touch connected to the Power Mate: Contact Digital Corporation to check if the
touch panels can be used with other series.
Panels (Digital
D GP–450E
Corporation)
D GP–550T
D GP–550S
7.12.3
Connection
DPL/MDI
Touch panels Power Mate

manufactured by
Digital Corporation
SGP–450E
SGP–550T J123 JD14
SIO
SGP–550S (CRT/MDI
interface)
JD15
Terminating unit M4
(1) A touch panel connection module must be installed in the Power

Mate. The CRT control module and HSSB connection module
cannot be used together with a touch panel connection module. This
means that, with the Power Mate–H controller for touch panels, the
CRT/MDI unit, separate CRT, PDP, and LCD units, separate MDI
unit, HSSB handy operator’s panel, and etc. cannot be used.
(2) In a system that uses a touch panel, a DPL/MDI unit is also required
for maintenance.
(3) The customer is responsible for preparing cable J123.
(4) The customer is responsible for preparing a terminating unit. The
specification number of the appropriate FANUC unit is
A02B–0166–D003. The CRT terminating unit (A02B–0124–D001)
cannot be used.
203
7.12.4
Power–on Sequence
Power Mate power–on
Touch panel power–on
t: Within 254 (in seconds)
Set (t+1) in the touch panel system setting item ”start time.”
No problem arises if the Power Mate is turned on earlier than the touch
panel.
7.12.5 The following Power Mate address data can be read from the touch panel:
Power Mate Data that D Input address: X0000 to X0127
X1000 to X1063
can be Read from the
D Output address: Y0000 to Y0127
Touch Panel Y1000 to Y1063
D Internal relay: R0000 to R0999
D Keep relay: K0000 to K0019
D Data table: D0000 to D1859
D Timer: T0000 to T0079
D Counter: C0000 to C0079
7.12.6
Power Mate Data That D Internal relay R000 to R0999
Can Be Set Through
the Touch Panel D Counter C0000 to C0079
204
7.12.7
Details of Cable J123
and the Terminating
Unit
Touch panel Power Mate–H
SIO (D–SUB 25–pin: Female) JD14 (PCR–EV20MDT)

Connector:DBM–25P
(male)
01 Lock metal: DB– C2– J9 01 RD B 11 0V
14 (Japan Aviation
02 Electronics Indus 02 RD A 12
15 SD B try, Ltd.)
03 03 SD B 13
16 RD B
04 04 SD A 14
17 J123
05 05 15
18 CS B
06 06 16
19 ER B PCR–E20F
07 SG (HONDA TSUSHIN 07 17
20 KOGYO CO., LTD.)
08 08 18
21 CS A
09 TRMX 09 19
22 ER A
10 RD A 10 20
23
11 SD A
24 JD15 (PCR–EV20MDT)
12
25 01 RD B 11
13
PCR–E20F
(HONDA TSUSHIN 02 RD A 12
KOGYO CO., LTD.)
03 13
04 14
Terminating 05 15
unit
06 16
07 17
08 18
09 19
10 20
205
Cable J123 Power Mate

JD14
Touch panel
SIO
15 01
SD B RD B
11 02
SD A RD A
16 03 #28AWG
RD B SD B twisted pair
10 04
RD A SD A
07 11
SG 0V #28AWG
09 Shield
TRMX
18
CS B
19
#28AWG ER B
21
CS A
22
ER A
Power Mate
Terminating unit JD15
01
RD B
R 02 Direct resistor connection
RD A
1) Recommended cable:
KA66L–0001–0284#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs, shielded): Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.
#28AWG
2) Terminating resistor (Power Mate side) R
For R in the terminating unit, use a 100–ohm 1/2W resistor.
206
7.13
HIGH–SPEED SERIAL
BUS INTERFACE
7.13.1 The Power Mate can be connected, via the FANUC high–speed serial bus
Outline (referred to as the HSSB), to a FANUC intelligent terminal or
commercially available personal computer.
1) Connection to a FANUC intelligent terminal
Power Mate FANUC

intelligent terminal
HSSB (optical fiber cable)

HSSB
adaptor
2) Connection to a commercially available personal computer
Commercially available
personal computer
Power Mate
HSSB interface
board
HSSB (optical fiber cable)

HSSB
adaptor
(1) Install an HSSB adaptor at the bottom of the Power Mate.

(2) The optical fiber cable must be separately purchased from FANUC.
(3) For details of the FANUC intelligent terminal, the commercially
available personal computer connected via the HSSB, and the HSSB
interface board installed in the personal computer, refer to the relevant
manuals.
207
7.13.2
Connection
Power Mate
M4 HSSB interface board

Optical fiber cable
M4A FANUC intelligent

HSSB terminal or com-
COP7 COP7 mercially available
adaptor
personal computer
M4
DPL/MDI
(1) An HSSB adaptor is to be directly connected to connector M4 at the

bottom of the Power Mate unit.
(2) An optical fiber cable is to be connected to optical connector COP7
on the HSSB adaptor and to COP7 on the HSSB interface board. No
connection is made to COP7 on the main unit of the intelligent
terminal. Optical fiber cables of the following lengths are available
from FANUC:
5m : A66L–6001–0021#L5R003
20m: A66L–6001–0021#L20R03
50m: A66L–6001–0022#L50R03
(3) For connection to multiple Power Mate–H units, as many HSSB
interface boards as the number of Power Mate–H units are required.
(4) A DPL/MDI unit can be connected to connector M4B of the HSSB
adaptor.
7.13.3
Supplement (1) An HSSB connection module must be installed in the Power Mate.
(2) An HSSB adaptor must be attached to the Power Mate. After
connecting an HSSB adaptor, tighten the screw locks. Sufficient
space for installing the HSSB adaptor, as well as for maintenance,
must be provided.
(3) When an HSSB connection module is used, the CRT control module
and touch panel connection module cannot be used. This means that
the CRT, PDP, and LCD units, detachable LCD unit, touch panel
(manufactured by Digital Corporation), and handy operator’s panel
cannot be used.
(4) The version of the base printed circuit board of the Power Mate–H
must be 06F or later.
(5) For details of the version of the basic functions of the Power Mate–H
that are compatible with the HSSB, contact FANUC.
208
7.14
ANALOG SERVO
INTERFACE
7.14.1 The Power Mate–H supports analog servo control based on the speed
Outline command signal (VCMD). The pulse coder interface of the Power
Mate–H is a serial pulse coder interface, so that a parallel/serial interface
conversion unit (for each axis) is also required.
7.14.2
System Configuration
Power Mate–H
K1 VCMD
Connector Analog servo
JSn amplifier
panel
K5
Parallel feedback
Serial feedback K4
K2 Parallel/serial
interface con- (TG)
n = 3 to 6 K3 version unit
External 5 V (Pulse
power sup- encoder) Analog motor
ply
FANUC can supply only the Power Mate–H and parallel/serial interface
conversion unit. The customer is responsible for preparing the connector
panel, analog servo amplifier, analog motor, external 5 V power supply,
and inter–unit cables.
The external 5 V power supply is used for the parallel/serial interface
conversion unit and pulse encoder (when operating on 5 V).
7.14.3 The Power Mate–H has a 1st/2nd axis digital servo module in the basic
Axis Configuration unit. For the 3rd/4th and 5th/6th modules, the user can select a digital
servo module or analog servo module in 2–axis steps.
1st/2nd Digital servo axis only
3rd/4th Digital servo axis or analog servo axis (Specification: A02B–0211–J120)
5th/6th Digital servo axis or analog servo axis (Specification: A02B–0211–J121)
209
7.14.4
Details of Connection 1) Connector panel
The servo interface of the Power Mate–H is provided with connectors
for both analog servo interface signals and serial pulse coder interface
signals. So, a connector panel is required to connect the Power
Mate–H to each unit.
From the connector panel, power is fed to the parallel/serial interface
conversion unit. Power to the pulse encoder is then provided from the
parallel/serial interface conversion unit.
2) Overall connection diagram
Power Mate–H Connector Analog servo amplifier

n=3 to 6 VCMD panel VCMD Power line
(JSn–03)
EC EC Tachogenerator To motor
(JSn–04)
*ENBL *ENBL
(JSn–07)
0V 0V
(JSn–08)
OVL OVL
(JSn–05)
0V 0V
(JSn–06)
*PRDY *PRDY
(JSn–10)
0V 0V
(JSn–20)
*VRDY *VRDY
(JSn–09)
0V 0V
(JSn–19)
0V
(JSn–14) A Pulse
PD PD Parallel/serial interface (CN1–16)
encoder
(JSn–15) (CN2–01) conversion unit *A
*PD *PD (CN1–17)
(JSn–16) (CN2–02) B
PREQ PREQ (CN1–18)
(JSn–17) (CN2–05) *B
*PREQ *PREQ (CN1–19)
(JSn–18) (CN2–06) Z
+5V (CN1–14)
(CN2–09, 18, 20) *Z
+5V 0V (CN1–15)
External 5 V (CN2–12, 14, 16) 5V
power supply 0V (CN1–04, 05, 06)
0V
(CN1–01, 02, 03)
210
3) Details of signals
1. VCMD, EC (output)
VCMD and EC are the speed command signals for the servo
amplifier. The voltage of VCMD with respect to EC represents
the speed command voltage. (The speed command voltage is
enabled only while the *ENBL signal is on.)
Electrical characteristics
Output voltage : –10 V to +10 V
Output current : 2 mA
Output impedance : 100 ohms
2. *ENBL (output)
*ENBL is the enable signal for the servo amplifier. While this
signal is on (connected to 0V), the VCMD signal is enabled.
Power *ENBL
Mate
0V Servo amplifier
Semicon-
ductor
contact
Maximum load current when output is on:
No more than 200 mA, including momentary values
Maximum output voltage when output is on:
6IL (volt), where IL: Load current
Withstand voltage when output is off:
No more than 24 V, including momentary values
Leakage current when output is off:
No more than 100 mA
3. OVL (input)
OVL is the overload alarm signal issued by the servo amplifier.
When this signal enters the release state (high level), the Power
Mate assumes that the servo system has entered the overload
state, and turns off the *PRDY and *ENBL signals for the axis.
If this signal is not used, connect OVL and 0V to each other (low
level).
When an overload alarm is issued, the servo amplifier must stop
the motor regardless of the state of the VCMD signal.
5V Power Mate
Servo amplifier
OVL Receiver
circuit
0V
211
Absolute maximum rating
Item Sym- Specification Unit Supplement
bol
Input voltage range Vin –3.6 to +13.6 V
Input characteristics
Item Sym- Specification Unit Supplement
bol
High level input voltage VH 3.6 to 10.5 V (NOTE)
Low level input voltage VL 0 to 1.0 V
+1.5 max mA Vin= 5V

High level in
input
ut current Iih
+8.8 max mA Vin=10V
Low level input current Iil –8.0 max mA Vib= 0V
The plus sign (+) of Iih and Iil represents the direction of flow into
the receiver, while the minus sign (–) represents the direction of
flow from the receiver.
NOTE
The input release state is also assumed to be the high level.
4. *PRDY (output)
*PRDY is the ready signal, issued by the Power Mate to the servo
amplifier. The electrical characteristics of this signal are the same
as those of *ENBL.
5. *VRDY (input)
*VRDY is the ready signal issued by the servo amplifier. When
the power to the servo amplifier is turned on to set the normal
startup state, and the *PRDY signal from the Power Mate is
subsequently turned on, the servo amplifier must immediately
turn on (short–circuit) the *VRDY signal. If the servo amplifier
encounters an error, the *VRDY signal must be turned off
(released) to report the error to the Power Mate. If this signal is
not used, connect *VRDY and 0V to each other (low level), and
set bit 1 (CVR) of parameter No. 1800 to 1.
If the servo amplifier encounters an error, stop the motor
regardless of the state of the VCMD signal.
The electrical characteristics of this signal are the same as those
of OVL.
6. PD, *PD (input), PREQ, *PREQ (output)
These signals are serial pulse coder interface signals, converted
by the parallel/serial interface conversion unit.
7. A, *A, B, *B, Z, *Z
These signals are received from the pulse coder.
D A–phase and B–phase signals (A, *A, B, *B)
The A–phase and B–phase signals are shifted by 90 degrees
relative to each other, and are used to transfer incremental
position information. A position is detected, assuming that
the direction of movement is positive while the B–phase
signal is advanced, or that the direction of movement is
negative while the A–phase signal is advanced.
212
Movement in the posi-

tive direction
A–phase signal
B–phase signal
Movement in the negative

direction
A–phase signal
B–phase signal
The differential input signals shown below are applied to the

connectors. The time duration, TD, from point α where the
relative potential difference between A and *A becomes 0.5
V or more, to point β where the relative potential difference
between B and *B becomes 0.5 V or less, must satisfy the
condition indicated below. (This condition may restrict the
maximum speed of movement.)
TD y 280ns
a
A / *A
0. 5V
*A / A
b
B / *B
0. 5V
*B / B
TD
213
D Z–phase signal (Z, *Z)

The Z–phase signal (one–rotation signal) requires a signal
width of no less than one period of the A–phase or B–phase
signal.
If the motor does not have this signal, ensure that the machine
supplies this signal.
An absolute pulse coder supports the following reference
position setting modes, which do not use the Z–phase signal:
1 External reference position setting
2 Butt–type reference position setting
In these cases, the following terminating processing is
required to protect against a disconnection alarm:
Parallel/serial interface
conversion unit
*Z
CN1 (15)
0V
CN1 (1, 2 or 3)
214
4) Connecting the Power Mate, external 5 V power supply, and

connector panel
Power Mate–H Connector panel

JSn (PCR–EV20MDT) n : 3 to 6
01 11
02 12
03 VCMD 13
04 EC 14 0V
K1
05 OVL 15 PD
06 0V 16 *PD Connector
PCR–E20FS
07 *ENBL 17 PREQ Connector case
PCR–V20LB
08 0V 18 *PREQ
09 *VRDY 19 0V
10 *PRDY 20 0V
External 5 V power K2
supply
215
Details of cable K1
Maximum allowable cable length: 50 m (between the Power
Mate and analog servo amplifier)
Power Mate
Connector panel
JS3 to JS6
VCMD VCMD
Individually 03
shielded twisted EC EC
pair #24AWG 04
*ENBL *ENBL
07
0V 0V
08
OVL OVL To analog ser-
05 vo amplifier
0V 0V
06
*PRDY *PRDY
10
0V 0V
20
*VRDY *VRDY
Twisted pair 09
#24AWG 0V 0V
19
PD PD
15
*PD *PD
16
PREQ PREQ To parallel/serial in-
17 terface conversion
unit
*PREQ *PREQ
18
0V 0V
14
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0206 (Individually shielded twisted pair #24AWG x 3 pairs + twisted pair #24AWG x 7 pairs)
The external cable diameter is f11, preventing the use of the cable, as is, with connector case PCR–
V20LB (f8). Peel back the sheath at the point where the cable meets the connector to reduce the cable
diameter.
NOTE
When OVL or *VRDY is not used, connect it to 0V.
216
Details of cable K2
+5V +5V
External 5V
Connector
power sup-
0V 0V panel
ply
The external 5 V power supply is used for the parallel/serial interface

conversion unit and pulse encoder (when operating on 5 V).
For each parallel/serial interface conversion unit, 5 V 5%, 250 mA
must be supplied. For details of the power required by the pulse
coder, refer to the manual provided with the pulse corder. Take the
voltage drop caused by the cable resistance into consideration.
Connect 0V to 0V (JSn–14) of the Power Mate.
5) Connection between the connector panel and parallel/serial interface
conversion unit
Connector Parallel/serial interface conversion unit

panel
01 PD 11
02 *PD 12 0V
03 13
04 14 0V
K3
05 PREQ 15
06 *PREQ 16 0V
Connector
FI–40–2015S 07 17
Case
FI–20–CV 08 18 +5V
09 +5V 19
10 20 +5V
217
Details of cable K3
Connector Parallel/serial interface

panel conversion unit
CN2
PD PD
01
From JSn of Power *PD *PD
Mate–H 02
#24AWG
PREQ PREQ twisted pair
05
*PREQ *PREQ
06
0V 0V
12
0V 0V
14
0V 0V
16
#20AWG
From external 5 V +5V +5V
power supply 09
+5V +5V
18
+5V +5V
20
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0286
(#20AWG x 6 + #24AWG x 3 pairs, group shielded cable)
Maximum allowable cable length: 50 m
Note that the maximum length is limited by the voltage drop caused
by the resistance of the power cable.
1. Parallel/serial interface conversion unit
For each parallel/serial interface conversion unit, 5 VDC 5%,
250 mA must be supplied through connector CN2.
2. Pulse encoder
When a pulse encoder operating on 5 V is used via the
parallel/serial interface conversion unit, the power required by
the pulse encoder must be supplied.
218
6) Connection between parallel/serial interface conversion unit and

pulse encoder
Connector pin assignment
Parallel/serial interface conversion unit

Pulse encoder
01 0V 14 Z
08
02 0V 15 *Z
09
03 0V 16 A K4
10
Connector
04 +5V 17 *A MR–20LF
11 (HONDA
05 +5V 18 B TSUSHIN
12 KOGYO
06 +5V 19 *B CO., LTD.)
13
07 20
219
Details of cable K4
Maximum allowable cable length: 50 m
Parallel/serial interface Pulse encoder

conversion unit
CN1
A A
16
*A *A
17
B B
18
#24AWG *B *B
twisted pair 19
Z Z
14
*Z *Z
15
+5V +5V
04
+5V +5V
05
+5V +5V
06
#20AWG 0V 0V
01
0V 0V
02
0V 0V
03
#24AWG 08
#24AWG 09
Recommended cable:
A66L–0001–0286
(#20AWG x 6 + #24AWG x 3 pairs, group shielded cable)
NOTE
Always connect pin 08 with pin 09.
220
7.14.5
Parallel/Serial Interface 1) Specifications
Conversion Unit Item Specifications
Applicable motor (number of poles, pulse 8 poles 10,000 p/rev

coder resolution) 8 poles 2,500 p/rev
Power supply 5V5%

250mA
Input signal (parallel interface CN1) A, *A, B, *B, Z, *Z

(Line receiver for RS422–compatible sig-
nals)
Response frequency 100KHz
Error detection function Cable disconnection detection (CN1)
Operating temperature range 0°C to 55°C
2) Order drawing number

A06B–6061–H016
3) Parameter setting
The format of the serial output of this unit is the same as the output
format of serial pulse coder C. Perform servo parameter setting for
servo pulse coder C.
Therefore, the 9066 series servo software cannot be used.
4) Setting the pins on the board
Setting pins SP1 to SP3 of this unit are used to match the pulse input
from the A/B–phase pulse coder with the pulse output, 40,000 p/rev,
of serial pulse coder C.
SP1 SP2 SP3 Remarks
10,000 p/rev B B A Multiplies the number of

pulses by 4.
2,500 p/rev A A A Multiplies the number of

pulses by 16.
Either setting is acceptable for the analog servo interface. An

arbitrary number of position feedback pulses can be set with DMR.
(Velocity feedback pulses are not used.)
5) Alarm detection
This unit detects disconnection of the cable linking the pulse coder
to the parallel/serial interface conversion unit. The disconnection
alarm causes serial pulse coder alarm No. 350, and sets bit 5 (LEDAL)
of diagnose No. 204 to 1.
Bit 5 (LEDAL) of diagnose No. 204 may be set to 1 by an LED error
in the serial pulse coder, as well as by this alarm.
6) External dimensions and installation method of the parallel/serial
interface conversion unit
Mount the unit on a DIN rail, and install the unit in an enclosed
cabinet.
221
External dimensions of parallel/serial interface conversion unit
A20B– 2001– 036

Depth when cables are at-
tached: Approx. 110 mm
SP1
max. SP2
110
mm SP3
max. 110 mm
Compatible DIN rail:

D DIN EN50022 type
D DIN EN50035 type
7.14.6 Use the procedure below for parameter setting.

Parameter Setting 1) Set the following parameters on the servo setting screen or parameter
setting screen:
Name Parameter No. Setting
Initial setting bit No.2000 Change the setting of bit 1 from 1 to 0.
Motor No. No.2020 50
AMR No.2001 00000000
CMR No.1820 Set the parameter to the same value as for

the digital servo system according to the
machine system.
Feed gear No.2084 Enter the fraction in lowest terms of N/M =

N/M – (Desired number of pulses per motor revolu-
No.2085 tion [after DMR])/(Number of feed–back
pulses per motor revolution [before DMR]).
Move direction No.2022 111 (CCW) or –111 (CW)
Number of move No.2023 1536.797 E

pulses E: Voltage value (V) corresponding to a spe-
cified speed of 1000 rpm
Number of position No.2024 As with the digital servo system, set the
pulses number of pulses per motor revolution
(before DMR).
Reference counter No.1821 As with the digital servo system, set the
number of pulses per motor revolution (after
DMR).
2) Turn off the power, then turn on the power.

3) Set both of the following parameters to 1:
Bit 4 (analog interface enable bit) of parameter No. 2009
Bit 4 (analog interface enable bit for the Power Mate–H) of parameter
No. 2018
4) Turn off the power, then turn on the power. (This completes the
setting.)
222
II. PMC INTERFACE
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 1. ADDRESS LIST
1 ADDRESS LIST
Address of interface signal between Power Mate and PMC.

When a PMC is used, a PMC module is required. For systems that do not
use a PMC, see Chapter 32.
Power Mate–H PMC MT
G000 to X000 to
F000 to Y000 to
MT ³ PMC Bit No.

(I/O card, I/O unit) Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MT ³ PMC Bit No.

(Built–in I/O card) Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1002 *DEC6 *DEC5 *DEC4 *DEC3 *DEC2 DEC1
MT ³ PMC Bit No.

(Internal I/O) Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
225
1. ADDRESS LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
PMC ³ CNC Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G004 FIN
G005 AFL MFIN
G006 OVC *ABSM
G007 RLSOT *FLWU ST
G008 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT
G009 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
G010 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
G011 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
G012 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
G014 ROV2 ROV1
G018 HS1C HS1B HS1A
G019 RT MP2 MP1
G043 ZRN MD4 MD2 MD1
G044 MLK BDT1
G045 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
G046 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK
G053 UNIT
G054 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
G055 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8
G058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
G066 EPCON IGNVRY
G100 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
G102 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1
G106 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
G110 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
G112 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1
G124 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
G126 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1
G130 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
G132 +MIT6 +MIT5 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
226
PMC ³ CNC Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G134 –MIT6 –MIT5 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
G136 EAX6 EAX5 EAX4 EAX3 EAX2 EAX1
G142 EBUFA ECLRA ESTPA ESOFA ESBKA EFINA
G143 EMSBKA EC6A EC5A EC4A EC3A EC2A EC1A EC0A
G144 EIF7A EIF6A EIF5A EIF4A EIF3A EIF2A EIF1A EIF0A
G145 EIF15A EIF14A EIF13A EIF12A EIF11A EIF10A EIF9A EIF8A
G146 EID7A EID6A EID5A EID4A EID3A EID2A EID1A EID0A
G149 EID31A EID30A EID29A EID28A EID27A EI26DA EID25A EID24A
G150 DRNE RTE OVCE ROV2E ROV1E
G151 *FV7E *FV6E *FV5E *FV4E *FV3E *FV2E *FV1E *FV0E
G154 EBUFB ECLRB ESTPB ESOFB ESBKB EFINB
G155 EMSBKB EC6B EC5B EC4B EC3B EC2B EC1B EC0B
G156 EIF7B EIF6B EIF5B EIF4B EIF3B EIF2B EIF1B EIF0B
G157 EIF15B EIF14B EIF13B EIF12B EIF11B EIF10B EIF9B EIF8B
G158 EID7B EID6B EID5B EID4B EID3B EID2B EID1B EID0B
G161 EID31B EID30B EID29B EID28B EID27B EI26DB EID25B EID24B
G166 EBUFC ECLRC ESTPC ESOFC ESBKC EFINC
G167 EMSBKC EC6C EC5C EC4C EC3C EC2C EC1C EC0C
G168 EIF7C EIF6C EIF5C EIF4C EIF3C EIF2C EIF1C EIF0C
G169 EIF15C EIF14C EIF13C EIF12C EIF11C EIF10C EIF9C EIF8C
G170 EID7C EID6C EID5C EID4C EID3C EID2C EID1C EID0C
G178 EBUFD ECLRD ESTPD ESOFD ESBKD EFIND
G179 EMSBKD EC6D EC5D EC4D EC3D EC2D EC1D EC0D
G180 EIF7D EIF6D EIF5D EIF4D EIF3D EIF2D EIF1D EIF0D
227
PMC ³ CNC Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G181 EIF15D EIF14D EIF13D EIF12D EIF11D EIF10D EIF9D EIF8D
G182 EID7D EID6D EID5D EID4D EID3D EID2D EID1D EID0D
G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01
G205 LED09
G206 ZPEXT1 ZR1 RTN31 RTN21 RTN11
G212 SKIPP
G213 ACT
G214 WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1
G216 TRQ6E TRQ5E TRQ4E TRQ3E TRQ2E TRQ1E
G217 TRQ17 TRQ16 TRQ15 TRQ14 TRQ13 TRQ12 TRQ11 TRQ10
G225 PALM PAL6 PAL5 PAL4 PAL3 PAL2 PAL1 PAL0
G226 EBUFE ECLRE ESTPE ESOFE ESBKE EFINE
G227 EMSBKE EC6E EC5E EC4E EC3E EC2E EC1E EC0E
G228 EIF7E EIF6E EIF5E EIF4E EIF3E EIF2E EIF1E EIF0E
G229 EIF15E EIF14E EIF13E EIF12E EIF11E EIF10E EIF9E EIF8E
G230 EID7E EID6E EID5E EID4E EID3E EID2E EID1E EID0E
G233 EID31E EID30E EID29E EID28E EID27E EI26DE EID25E EID24E
G238 EBUFF ECLRF ESTPF ESOFF ESBKF EFINF
228
PMC ³ CNC Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G239 EMSBKF EC6F EC5F EC4F EC3F EC2F EC1F EC0F
G240 EIF7F EIF6F EIF5F EIF4F EIF3F EIF2F EIF1F EIF0F
G241 EIF15F EIF14F EIF13F EIF12F EIF11F EIF10F EIF9F EIF8F
G242 EID7F EID6F EID5F EID4F EID3F EID2F EID1F EID0F
G243 EID15F EID14F EID13F EID12F EID11F EID10F EID9F EID8E
G244 EID23F EID22F EID21F EID20F EID19F EID18F EID17F EID16F
G245 EID31F EID30F EID29F EID28F EID27F EI26DF EID25F EID24F
G251 EDGN EPARM EVAR EXPRG
G252 EDG07 EDG06 EDG05 EDG04 EDG03 EDG02 EDG01 EDG00
G253 EDG15 EDG14 EDG13 EDG12 EDG11 EDG10 EDG09 EDG08
G254 EDN07 EDN06 EDN05 EDN04 EDN03 EDN02 EDN01 EDN00
G255 EDN15 EDN14 EDN13 EDN12 EDN11 EDN10 EDN09 EDN08
229
CNC ³ PMC Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
F001 MA DEN BAL RST AL
F002 CUT
F003 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MMDI MJ MH
F004 MZRN
F007 MF
F009 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
F010 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
F011 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
F012 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
F013 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
F053 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY
F054 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
F094 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
F096 ZP26 ZP25 ZP24 ZP23 ZP22 ZP21
F098 ZP36 ZP35 ZP34 ZP33 ZP32 ZP31
F102 MV6 MV5 MV4 MV3 MV2 MV1
F104 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
F106 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1
F110 MDTCH6MDTCH5MDTCH4MDTCH3MDTCH2MDTCH1
F120 ZRF6 ZRF5 ZRF4 ZRF3 ZRF2 ZRF1
F129 *EAXSL EOV0
F130 EBSYA EOTNA EOTPA EGENA EDENA EIALA ECKZA EINPA
F131 EMFA
F132 EM28A EM24A EM22A EM21A EM18A EM14A EM12A EM11A
F133 EBSYB EOTNB EOTPB EGENB EDENB EIALB ECKZB EINPB
F134 EMFB
230
CNC ³ PMC Bit No.
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F135 EM28B EM24B EM22B EM21B EM18B EM14B EM12B EM11B
F136 EBSYC EOTNC EOTPC EGENC EDENC EIALC ECKZC EINPC
F137 EMFC
F138 EM28C EM24C EM22C EM21C EM18C EM14C EM12C EM11C
F139 EBSYD EOTND EOTPD EGEND EDEND EIALD ECKZD EINPD
F140 EMFD
F141 EM28D EM24D EM22D EM21D EM18D EM14D EM12D EM11D
F168 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
F169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW9
F175 SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57
F180 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
F209 WVRDY WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1
F210 K7 K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1 K0
F211 KCAN KEOB KSLH KNO KPRD KMNS K9 K8
F212 KRED KWRT KINP KDLT KINS KALT
F213 KALM KPRM KVAR KPRG KPOS
F214 KH KQ KP KUP KDWN
F217 KX KR KG KN KO
F218 KSHRP KT KS KM KF
F220 SVER1 IPL1 SUP1
F228 EBSYE EOTNE EOTPE EGENE EDENE EIALE ECKZE EINPE
F229 EMFE
F230 EM28E EM24E EM22E EM21E EM18E EM14E EM12E EM11E
231
CNC ³ PMC Bit No.

Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F231 EBSYF EOTNF EOTPF EGENF EDENF EIALF ECKZF EINPF
F232 EMFF
F233 EM28F EM24F EM22F EM21F EM18F EM14F EM12F EM11F
F236 APBL1 APBV1 APBZ1 APPS1 APPE1 APFE1 APOV1 APCM1
F250 ALSV ALOH ALOT ALPS ALPS3 ALPS2 ALPS1
F251 ALPS4 ALAPC
F254 DPL2 DPL1 DPL0
232
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 2. SIGNAL LIST
2 SIGNAL LIST
233
2. SIGNAL LIST PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
2.1
I/O SIGNAL LIST
(ORDER OF GROUP)
Signal
direction
Refer-
Group Signal name Symbol (address) CNC CNC ence
± °
PMC PMC
*1 CNC ready signal MA (F001#7) Ę 3.1
Servo ready signal SA (F000#6) Ę 3.2
*2 Emergency stop signal *ESP (G008#4, X000#4, X1000#4) Ę 4.1
External reset signal ERS (G008#7) Ę 4.2
Reset & rewind signal RRW (G008#6) Ę 4.3
*3 Alarm signal AL (F001#0) Ę 5.1
Battery alarm signal BAL (F001#2) Ę 5.2
Reset signal RST (F001#1) Ę 5.3
Rewinding signal RWD (F000#0) Ę 5.4
Moving direction signals MVDn (F106) Ę 5.5
In-position signals INPn (F104) Ę 5.6
Alarm classification signals ALPS1–ALPS3, ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, Ę 5.7
ALSV, ALAPC, ALPS4 (F250#0–#6, F251#0, #2)
APC alarm type signals APCMn, APOVn, APFEn, APPEn, APPSn, Ę 5.8
APBZn, APBVn, APBLn, (F236 to F241)
Dispaly of alarms from PMC PALM, PAL0–PAL6 (G225) Ę 5.9
Axis status signals INPn, SUPn, IPLn Ę 5.10
(F104) (F220#1 to F225#1) (F220#2 to F225#2)
Axis moving signal MVn (F102) Ę 5.11
*4 Mode select signal MD1 (G043#0), MD2 (G043#1), Ę 6.1
MD4 (G043#2)
Manual data input (MDI) signal MMDI (F003#3) Ę 6.2
Automatic operation (AUTO) signal MAUT (F003#5) Ę 6.2
Memory edit (EDIT) signal MEDT (F003#6) Ę 6.2
Handle mode (MH) signal MH (F003#1) Ę 6.2
Jog feed (JOG) signal MJ (F003#2) Ę 6.2
Manual reference position return signal MZRN (F004#5) Ę 6.2
TEACH IN JOG confirmation signal MTCHIN (F003#7), MJ (F003#2) Ę 6.2
TEACH IN STEP confirmation signal MTCHIN (F003#7), MH (F003#1) Ę 6.2
*5 Feed axis direction select signal +Jn (G100), –Jn (G102) Ę 7.1
Manual feedrate override signal *JV0–*JV15 (G010 ,G011) Ę 7.2
Manual rapid traverse select signal RT (G019#7) Ę 7.3
Rapid traverse override signal ROV1 (G014#0), ROV2 (G014#1) Ę 7.4
Manual absolute signal *ABSM (G006#2) Ę 7.5
*6 Interlock signal *IT (G008#0), *RILK (X000#6, X1000#6) Ę 8.1

Axis interlock signal *ITn (G130) Ę 8.2
Interlock signal for each axis and direction signal +MITn (G132), –MITn (G134) Ę 8.3
*7 Incremental feed signal MP1, MP2 (G019#4, #5) Ę 9
234
Signal
direction
Refer-
± °
PMC PMC
*8 Manual reference position return selection signal ZRN (G043#7) Ę 10.1
Reference position return deceleration signal *DECn (X002, X1002) 10.1
Reference position return end signal ZPn (F094) Ę 10.1
2nd reference position return end signal ZP2n (F096) Ę 10.2
3rd reference position return end signal ZP3n (F098) Ę 10.2
Reference position establishment signal ZRFn (F120) Ę 10.3
Dogless Reference Position setting and return ZRn (G206#4 to G211#4) Ę 10.4
ZPn (F094) Ę
External setting signal of the reference point ZPExTn (G206#6 to G211#6) Ę 10.5
Reference point setting function by pressing axis CLRCHn (F180) Ę 10.6
to stopper
*9 Memory protection key KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, KEY4 (G046#3–#6) Ę 11
*10 Cycle start signal ST (G007#2) Ę 12.1
Feed hold signal *SP (G008#5) Ę 12.2
Cycle start lamp signal STL (F000#5) Ę 12.3
Feed hold lamp signal SPL (F000#4) Ę 12.4
Automatic operation signal OP (F000#7) Ę 12.5
Workpiece number search signal PN0–PN7 (G009) Ę 12.6
Machine lock signal MLK (G044#1) Ę 12.7
Single block signal SBK (G046#1) Ę 12.8
Dry run signal DRN (G046#7) Ę 12.9
Override signal *FV0–*FV7 (G012) Ę 12.10
Override cancel signal OVC (G006#4) Ę 12.11
Optional block skip signal BDT1 (G044#0) Ę 12.12
BDT2–BDT9 (G045)
Mirror image signal MIn (G106#0–#5) Ę 12.13
*11 Signals in cutting mode CUT (F202#6) Ę 13
*12 Screen state signals DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 (F254#0–#2) Ę 14
*13 Miscellaneous function strobe signal MF (F007#0) Ę 15.1
Miscellaneous function code signal M00–M31 (F010–F013), Ę 15.1
Completion signal FIN (G004#3) Ę 15.1
High-speed M/S/T interface signal MFIN (G005#0) Ę 15.1
Distribution end signal DEN (F001#3) Ę 15.2
M decode signals DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 (F009#7–#4) Ę 15.3
Auxiliary function lock signal AFL (G005#6) Ę 15.4
Waiting function WFN1–WFN4 (F214#0–#3) Ę 15.5
WAT1–WAT4 (G209#0–#3) Ę 15.5
Simultaneous block start M821–M827 15.6
*15 PMC key data reference function K0, K1, K2, K3, K4, K5, K6, K7, K8, K9, KMNS, Ę 16
KPRD, KNO, KSLH, KEOB, KCAN, KALT, KINS,
KDLT, KINP, KWRT, KRED, KPOS, KPRG,
KVAR, KPRM, KALM, KDWN, KUP, KP, KQ, KH,
KO, KN, KG, KR, KX, KF, KM, KS, KT, KSHRP
(F210–F218)
235
Signal
direction
Refer-
± °
PMC PMC
*16 Software limit external setting +LMn (G110) Ę 17
–LMn (G112)
RLSOT (G007#7)
*17 Skip signals SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 Ę 18
(X000#0, #1, #2, #7), (X1000#0, #1, #2, #7)
SKIPP (G212#7)
*18 Servo off signal SVFn (G126) Ę 19.1
Follow-up signal *FLWU (G007#5) Ę 19.2
Servo position deviation monitor signal SVERn (F220#3 to F225#3) Ę 19.3
*19 I/O device external control function EXRD (G058#1), EXSTP (G058#2), Ę 20
EXWT (G058#3), EXPRG (G251#4) ,
EVAR (G251#5), EPARM (G251#6),
EDGN (G251#7),
EDG0–EDG15 (G252, G253)
EDN0–EDN15 (G254, G255)
RPBSY (F053#2), RPALM (F053#3), Ę
BGEACT (F053#4)
*20 External pulse input function EPCON (G066#6), HS1A, HS1B, HS1C Ę 21
(G018#0, #1, #2), MP1, MP2 (G019#4, #5)
*21 FANUC I/O Link slave function SDI00–SDI63 (X1020–) 22
SDO00–SDO63 (Y1020–)
IOLNK (G251#0) Ę
*22 Custom macro signal UI0–UI15 (G054, G055) Ę 23.1
UO0–UO131 (F054–F059) Ę
Interruption signal for custom macro UINT (G053#3) Ę 23.2
*23 Temporary interrupt detection signal ACT (G213#7) Ę 24
*24 Control axis selection signal EC0α to EC6α (G143#0 to #6) (G155#0 to #6) Ę 25
(G167#0 to #6) (G179#0 to #6)
(G227#0 to #6) (G239#0 to #6)
α : A, B, C, D, E, F
Axis control command completed signal EBUFα (G142#7) (G154#7) (G166#7) Ę
(G178#7) (G226#7) (G238#7)
Axis control command read signal EBSYα (F130#7) (F133#7) (F136#7) Ę
(F139#7) (F228#7) (F231#7)
Reset signal ECLRα (G142#6) (G154#6) (G166#6) Ę
(G178#6) (G226#6) (G238#6)
Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPα (G142#5) (G154#5) (G166#5) Ę
(G178#5) (G226#5) (G238#5)
Servo off signal ESOFα (G142#4) (G154#4) (G166#4) Ę
(G178#4) (G226#4) (G238#4)
Block stop signal ESBKα (F142#3) (F154#3) (F166#3) Ę
(F178#3) (F226#3) (F238#3)
Block stop disable signal EMSBKα (F143#7) (F155#7) (F167#7) Ę
(F179#7) (F227#7) (F239#7)
Auxiliary function BCD code EM11α to EM28α (F132) (F135) (F138) Ę
(F141) (F230) (F233)
Auxiliary function read signal EMFα (F131#0) (F134#0) (F137#0) Ę
(F140#0) (F229#0) (F232#0)
Auxiliary function completion signal EFINα (G142#0) (G154#0) (G166#0) Ę
(G178#0) (G226#0) (G238#0)
236
Signal
direction
Refer-
± °
PMC PMC
*24 Feedrate EIF0α to EIF15α (G144, G145) (G156, G157) Ę 25
(G168, G169) (G180, G181)
(G228, G229) (G240, G241)
Axis move distance EID0α to EID31α Ę
Dwell time (G146 to G149) (G158 to G161)
Auxiliary function code (G170 to G173) (G182 to G185)
(G230 to G233) (G242 to G245)
In–position signal EINPα (F130#0) (F133#0) (F136#0) Ę
(F139#0) (F228#0) (F231#0)
Following zero checking signal ECKZα (F130#1) (F133#1) (F136#1) Ę
(F139#1) (F228#1) (F231#1)
Alarm signal EIALα (F130#2) (F133#2) (F136#2) Ę
(F139#2) (F228#2) (F231#2)
Axis moving signal EGENα (F130#4) (F133#4) (F136#4) Ę
(F139#4) (F228#4) (F231#4)
Auxiliary function executing signal EDENα (F130#3) (F133#3) (F136#3) Ę
(F139#3) (F228#3) (F231#3)
Negative–direction overtravel signal EOTNα (F130#6) (F133#6) (F136#6) Ę
(F139#6) (F228#6) (F231#6)
Positive–direction overtravel signal EOTPα (F130#5) (F133#5) (F136#5) Ę
(F139#5) (F228#5) (F231#5)
Control axis selection signal EAXn (G136#0 to #5) Ę
Control axis selection status signal *EAXSL (F129#7) Ę
Override signal *FV0E to *FV7E (G151) Ę
Override cancellation signal OVCE (G150#5) Ę
Rapid traverse override signal ROV1E, ROV2E (G150#0, #1) Ę
Dry run signal DRNE (G150#7) Ę
Manual rapid traverse signal RTE (G150#6) Ę
Override 0% signal EOV0 (F129#5) Ę
*25 Torque limit enable signal TRQ1E, TRQ2E, TRQ3E, TRQ4E, TRQ5E, Ę 26.4
TRQ6E (G216#0 to #5)
Torque limit signal TRQn0 to TRQn7 (G217 to G222) 26.4
*26 Speed control servo alarm ignore signal IGNVRY (G66#0) Ę 27
*27 Axis detach signal DTCHn (G124#0 to #5) Ę 28.1
Axis detaching signal MDTCHn (F110#0 to #5) Ę 28.2
*28 Speed changing signal EXFn (X000#, #1, #2, X011#4, #5) 29
(X1000#0, #1, #2)
*29 Return signal RTN1n (G206#0 to G211#0) Ę 30
RTN2n (G206#1 to G211#1)
RTN3n (G206#2 to G211#2)
*30 V–READY waiting signal WVRDY (F209#4) Ę 31
*31 Handy Operator’s panel SW1 to SW13, M–OPE, SW15 to SW61 Ę 33
(F168 to F175)
LED01 to LED09 (G204 to G205) Ę
237
2.2
I/O SIGNAL LIST
(ORDER OF
SYMBOL)
Symbol Signal name PMC address Reference
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006#2 7.5
ACT Temporary interrupt detection signal G213#7 24
AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005#6 15.4
AL Alarm signal F001#0 5.1
ALAPC APC alarm F251#0 5.7
ALOH Over heat alarm F250#5 5.7
ALOT Over travel alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#4 5.7
ALPS P/S alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#3 5.7
ALPS1 P/S alarm 100 signal (alarm classification signal) F250#0 5.7
ALPS4 P/S alarm (from 5000 to 5999) F251#2 5.7
ALSV Servo alarm signal (alarm classification signal) F250#6 5.7
APBL1 to APBL6 APC battery LOW alarm 2 signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#7 to F241#7 5.8
APBV1 to APBV6 APC battery LOW alarm 1 signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#6 to F241#6 5.8
APBZ1 to APBZ6 APC battery zero alarm signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#5 to F241#5 5.8
APCM1 to APCM6 APC communication error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#0 to F241#0 5.8
APFE1 to APFE6 APC framing error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#2 to F241#2 5.8
APOV1 to APOV6 APC over time error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#1 to F241#1 5.8
APPE1 to APPE6 APC parity error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#3 to F241#3 5.8
APPS1 to AAPS6 APC pulse miss error signal (APC alarm type signal) F236#4 to F241#4 5.8
BAL Battery alarm signal F001#2 5.2
BDT1, BDT2 to BDT9 Optional block skip signal G044#0, G045 12.12
BGEACT Background editing signal (I/O device external control signal) F053#4 20
CLRCH 1 to 6 Torque limit condition signal F180#0 to #5 10.6
CUT Signal under cutting mode F002#6 13
*DEC1 to *DEC6 Reference position return deceleration signal X002#0 to #5 10.1
X1002#0 to #5
DEN Distribution end signal F001#3 15.2
DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 M decode signals F009#7 to #4 15.3
DPL0 to DPL2 Screen status signal F254#0 to #2 14
DRN Dry run signal G046#7 12.9
DRNE Dry run signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#7 25
DTCH 1 to 6 Control axis detach signal G124#0 to #5 28.1
EAX1 to EAX6 Controlled axis selection signal (Axis control by PMC) G136# to #5 25
*EAXSL Control axis selection status signal (Axis control by PMC) F129#7 25
EBSYA to EBSYF Axis control command read signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#7, F133#7, 25
F136#7, F139#7,
F228#7, F231#7
EBUFA to EBUFF Axis control command completed signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#7, G154#7, 25
G166#7, G178#7,
G226#7, G238#7
238

(EC0A to EC6A) to Axis control command signal (Axis control by PMC) G143#0 to #6, G155#0 to 25
(EC0F to EC6F) #6, G167#0 to #6,
G179#0 to#6, G227#0 to
#6, G239#0 to #6
ECKZA to ECKZF Error zero checking signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#1, F133#1, 25
F136#1, F139#1,
F228#1, F231#1
ECLRA to ECLRF Reset signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#6,G154#6, 25
G166#6, G178#6,
G226#, G238#6
EDENA to EDENF Miscellaneous function executing signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#3, F133#3, 25
F136#3, F139#3,
F228#3, F231#3
EDG00 to EDG15 External punch start number signal (I/O device external control G252, G253 20
function)
EDGN Diagnose selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#7 20
EDN00 to EDM15 Signal of external punch total number (I/O device external control G254, G255 20
function)
EFINA to EFINF Miscellaneous function complete signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#0, G154#0, 25
G166#0, G178#0,
G226#0, G238#0
EGENA to EGENF Axis moving signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#4, F133#4, 25
F136#4, F139#4,
F228#4, F231#4
EIALA to EIALF Alarm signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#2, F133#2, 25
F136#2, F139#2,
F228#2, F231#2
(EID0A to EID31A) to (EID0F Axis move distance G146 to G149, G158 to 25
to EID31F) Dwell time G161, G170 to G173,
Auxiliary function code G182 to G185, G230 to
(Axis control by PMC) G233, G242 to G245
(EIF0A to EIF15A) to Feedrate (Axis control by PMC) G144, G145,G156, 25
(EIF0Fto EIF15F) G157, G168, G169,
G180, G181, G228,
G230, G240, G241
EINPA to EINPF In-positioning signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#0, F133#0, 25
F136#0, F139#0,
F228#0, F231#0
(EM11A to EM28A) to Miscellaneous BCD code (Axis control by PMC) F132, F135, F138, 25
(EM11F to EM28F) F141, F230, F233
EMFA to EMFF Miscellaneous function read signal (Axis control by PMC) F131#0, F134#0, 25
F137#0, F140#0,
F229#0, F232#0
EMSBKA to EMSBKF Block stop inhibit signal (Axis control by PMC) G143#7, G155#7, 25
G167#7, G179#7,
G227#7, G239#7
EOTNA to EOTNF Overtravel in regative direction signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#6, F133#6, 25
F136#6, F139#6,
F228#6, F231#6
EOTPA to EOTPF Overtravel in positive direction signal (Axis control by PMC) F130#5, F133#5, 25
F136#5, F139#5,
F228#5, F231#5
EOV0 Override 0% signal (Axis control by PMC) F129#5 25
EPARM Parameter selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#6 20
EPCON External pulse input/output signal G066#6 21
ERS External reset signal G008#7 4.2
ESBKA to ESBKF Block stop signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#3, G154#3, 25
G166#3, G178#3,
G226#3, G238#3
239

ESOFA to ESOFF Servo off signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#4, G154#4, 25
G166#4, G178#4,
G226#4, G238#4
*ESP Emergency stop signal X008#4, X000#4 or 4.1
X1000#4
ESTPA to ESTPF Axis control stop signal (Axis control by PMC) G142#5, G154#5, 25
G166#5, G178#5,
G226#5, G238#5
EVAR Variable selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#5 20
EXF1 to EXF5 Speed changing function X000#0, #1, #2, X011#4, 29
#5, X1000#0, #1, #2
EXPRG Program selection signal (I/O device external control function) G251#4 20
EXRD External read start signal (I/O device external control function) G058#1 20
EXSTP External read/punch stop signal (I/O device external control G058#2 20
function)
EXWT External punch start signal (I/O device external control function) G058#3 20
FIN M,S,T,B function end signal G004#3 15.1
*FLWU Follow-up signal G007#5 19.2
*FV0 to *FV7 Feedrate override signal G012 12.10
*FV0E to *FV7E Override signal (Axis control by PMC) G151 25
HS1A, HS1B, HS1C Manual handle feed axis select signal G018#0, #1, #2 21
IGNVRY Speed control servo alarm ignore signal G066#0 27
INP1 to INP6 In-position signals F104#0 to #5 5.6
IPL1 to IPL6 Distribution signal (axis status signal) F220#2 to F225#2 5.10
*IT Interlock signal G008#0 8.1
*IT1 to *IT6 Axis interlock signal G130#0 to G130#5 8.2
+J1 to +J6, –J1 to –J6 Feed axis direction select signal G100#0 to G100#5 7.1
G102#0 to G102#5
*JV0 to *JV15 Manual feedrate override signal G010, G011 7.2
K0 to K9, KMNS, KPRD, KNO, Key data reference function by PMC F210 to F218 16
KSLH, KEOB, KCAN, KALT,
KINS, KDLT, KINP, KWRT,
KRED, KPOS, KPRG, KVAR,
KPRM, KALM, KDWN, KUP,
KP, KQ, KH, KO, KN, KG, KR,
KX, KF, KM, KS, KT, KSHRP
KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, KEY4 Memory protection key G046#3 to #6 11
LED00 to 09 Handy operator’s panel G204 to G205 33
+ LM1 to +LM6 Software limit external setting G110#0 to G110#5 17
–LM1 to –LM6 G112#0 to G112#5
M00 to M31 Miscellaneous function code signal F010 to F013 15.1
MA Ready signals F001#7 3.1
MAUT Auto confirmation signal F003#5 6.2
MD1 ,MD2, MD4 Mode select signal G043#0 to #2 6.1
MDTCH1 to MDTCH6 Controlled axis detach status signal F110#0 to F110#5 28.2
MEDT Memory edit select check signal (EDIT) F003#6 6.2
MF M code output end signal F007#0 15.1
MFIN M–function end signal G005#0 15.1
MH Handle feed check signal F003#1 6.2
MI1 to MI6 Mirror image signal G106#0 to #5 12.13
+MIT1 to +MIT6, Interlock signal for each axis and direction G132#0 to G132#5 8.3
–MIT1 to –MIT6 G134#0 to G134#5
240

MJ JOG feed select check signal (JOG) F003#2 6.2
MLK Machine lock signal G044#1 12.7
MMDI Manual data input select check signal (MDI) F003#3 6.2
MP1, MP2 Incremental feed magnification signal G019#4, #5 9
MSTP Step feed confirmation signal F003#0 6.2
MTCHIN Teach in jog STEP select check signal F003#7 6.2
MV1 to MV6 Axis moving signal F102#0 to #5 5.11
MVD1 to MVD6 Moving direction signals F106#0 to #5 5.5
MZRN Manual reference position return confirmation signal F004#5 6.2
M–OPE Handy operator’s panel F169#5 33
OP Automatic operation signal F000#7 12.5
OVC Override cancel signal G006#4 12.11
OVCE Override cancellation signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#5 25
PAL0 to PAL6 Alarm number specification signal G225#0 to #6
(Display of alarms from PMC)
PALM PMC alarm generation selection signal G225#7 5.9
(Display of alarms from PMC)
PN0 to PN7 Workpiece number search signal G009 12.6
*RILK High-speed interlock signal X000#6, X1000#6, 8.1

RLSOT Software limit external signal G007#7 17
ROV1, ROV2 Rapid traverse override signal G014#0, #1 7.4
ROV1E, ROV2E Rapid traverse override signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#0, #1 25
RPALM Read/punch alarm signal (I/O device external control function) F053#3 20
RPBSY Reading/punching signal (I/O device external control function) F053#2 20
RRW Reset & rewind signal G008#6 4.3
RST CNC reset signal F001#1 5.3
RT Manual rapid traverse select signal G019#7 7.3
RTN11 to RTN16 Return signal G206#0 to G211#0 30
RTN21 to RTN26 G206#1 to G211#1
RTN31 to RTN36 G206#2 to G211#2
RWD Rewinding signal F000#0 5.4
RTE Manual rapid traverse signal (Axis control by PMC) G150#6 25
SA Servo ready signal F000#6 3.2
SBK Single block signal G046#1 12.8
SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 Skip signal X000#7, #0, #1, #2 18
X1000#7,#0, #1, #2
SKIPP Skip signal from PMC G212#7 18
*SP Feed hold signal G008#5 12.2
SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000#4 12.4
ST Cycle start signal G007#2 12.1
STL Cycle start lamp signal F000#5 12.3
SUP1 to SUP6 Acceleration/deceleration signal (axis motion status signal) F220#1 to F225#1 5.10
SVER1 to SVER6 Servo position deviation monitor signal F220#3 to F225#3 19.3
SVF1 to SVF6 Servo off signal G126#0 to G126#6 19.1
SW1 to SW61 Handy operator’s panel F168 to F175 33
TRQ1E to TRQ6E Torque limit enable signal G216#0 to G216#5 26.4
TRQ10 to TRQ67 Torque limit signal G217#0 to G222 26.4
UI0 to UI15 Input signal for custom macro G054, G055 23.1
241

UINT Interrupt signal for custom macro G053#3 23.2
UO0 to UO15 Output signal for custom macro F054, F055, F056 to 23.1
UO100 to UO131 F059
WAT1 to WAT4 Waiting signal (waiting function) F209#0 to #3 15.5
WFN1 to WFN4 Waiting complete signal (waiting function) G214#0 to #3 15.5
WVRDY V–READY waiting signal F209#4 31
ZP1 to ZP6 Reference position return end signal F094#0 to F094#5 10.1
ZP21 to ZP26 2nd reference position return end signal F096#0 to F096#5 10.2
ZP31 to ZP36 3rd reference position return end signal F098#0 to F098#5 10.2
ZPEXT1 to ZPEXT6 External setting signal of the reference point G206#6 to G211#6 10.5
ZR1 to ZR6 Dogless reference position setting signal G206#4 to G211#4 10.4
ZRF1 to ZRF6 Reference position establishment signal F120#0 to F120#5 10.3
ZRN Manual reference position return selection signal G043#7 10.1
242
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 3. READY SIGNALS
3 READY SIGNALS
243
3. READY SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
3.1 When power is applied to the Power Mate, this signal MA turns to “1”.
CNC READY SIGNAL
(OUTPUT)
MA<F001#7>
3.2 When the servo system becomes operative, the servo ready signal SA
turns to “1”. For axes that must be braked on the machine side, the brake
SERVO READY should not be released until this signal is sent.
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) Fig. 3.2 shows the time chart of this signal.
SA <F000#6>
Power on Power off
CNC ready MA
signal MA 60 - 100msec
SA
Servo ready
signal
Brake ON
Servo alarm Servo alarm
(Overload)
Reset
Reset Emergency stop
1 - 2 sec Approx. 1 sec
Fig.3.2 Servo Ready Signal Time Chart
244
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP
4 RESET & EMERGENCY STOP
245
4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
4.1 When the emergency stop signal *ESP turns to “0”, the emergency stop
is applied to the machine and the Power Mate is reset. This signal is
EMERGENCY STOP controlled by the B contacts of a pushbutton switch. The emergency stop
SIGNAL (INPUT) *ESP signal turns the servo ready signal (SA[3.2]) to “0”.
<X000#4, X1000#4, Overtravel detection by this Power Mate is handled by the software limit
G008#4> function, and a limit switch for normal overtravel detection is not needed.
To prevent the machine from moving beyond the software limit through
servo feedback error, always install a stroke end limit switch (shown in
Fig. 4.1 below).
Power Mate
Emergency stop limit switch
Emergency stop
+n –X +X
24V
24V
Emergency stop temporary release

*ESP
*ESP
Fig.4.1 Connection of Emergency Stop Circuit
Refer to AC Servo Motor DESCRIPTIONS for the distance

Reference
AC SERVO MOTOR series DESCRIPTIONS B–65002E
AC SERVO MOTOR α series DESCRIPTIONS B–65142E
246
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP
WARNING
Software limit setting point and operating point of limit switch
for emergency stop
The stop point by the software limit goes beyond the setting
point by as much as the following distance.
R
(mm)
7,500
R : Rapid traverse rate (mm/min)
This means that the actual stop point may exceed the set
point by a maximum of R/7,500 (mm) due to the rapid
traverse rate set by parameter No. 1420. Set the limit switch
for emergency stop including the allowance for the above
value.
Software limit setting point
Stroke end direction
ÄÄÄÄÄ
ÄÄÄÄÄ
R
ÄÄÄÄÄ
7,500
The machine stops Set the limit switch for emergency

in this range. stop in this range.
247
4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
4.2 The Power Mate can be reset by turning the external reset signal ERS to
“1”. The reset signal RST[5.3] turns to “1” at the same time. When an
EXTERNAL RESET M[15.1] function is being executed, MF[15.1] signal is reset within 100
SIGNAL (INPUT) ERS msec after the external reset signal is input.
<G008#7>
4.3
RESET & REWIND Function Resets the Power Mate and rewinds the input device being used
for the selected automatic operation.
SIGNAL (INPUT) RRW
Operation
<G008#6>
The Power Mate operates as follows when signal RRW turns to
“1”.
i) The moving control axis decelerates to a stop.
ii) After stopping, the CNC is reset and the reset signal RST
[5.3] turns to “1”.
iii) While the reset operation takes place, the selected main
program is rewound the rewind signl turns to “1” and
rewinding begins. (Only at AUTO mode).
iv) Neither automatic nor manual operaitons are conducted
while the RRW signal is set to “1”.
Usage Normaly, Power Mate is reset by M30 (End of tape). To rewind
the program at the same time, set this signal to l with using M30
decode signal.
248
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 5. STATUS SIGNALS
5 STATUS SIGNALS
249
5. STATUS SIGNALS PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
5.1 When an alarm is triggered in the Power Mate, an alarm message is

displayed on the CRT/PDP/LCD/DPL and the alarm signal AL turns to
ALARM SIGNAL “1”. When the cause of the alarm is corrected and the Power Mate is reset,
(OUTPUT) AL the alarm state of Power Mate is cleared and the AL signal turns to “0”.
<F001#0> The followings are alarm states:
(a) TH alarm
(b) TV alarm
(c) P/S alarm
(d) Overtravel alarm
(e) Overheat alarm
(f) Servo alarm
5.2 If the battery voltage to hold a program in memory during power

interruption is lower than the specified value, this signal turns to “1”. The
BATTERY ALARM Power Mate informs the PMC of the battery alarm (BAL = 1). Generally,
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) a lamp is used to indicate the alarm in order to alert the operator. (When
BAL <F001#2> using a machine without an indicator such as a CRT or DPL unit, ensure
that a lamp indication is provided.)
5.3 The CNC reset signal RST turns to “1” for any of the following reasons:
RESET SIGNAL (1) While RESET button on the CRT/MDI panel or separate type MDI
is being pressed.
(OUTPUT) RST
(2) While the external reset signal ERS[4.2] turns to “1”.
<F001#1>
(3) While the emergency stop signal *ESP[4.1] turns to “0”.
(4) While reset & rewind signal RRW [4.3] turns to “1”.
The machine tool operator can activate this signal to allow it to reset on
the ladder.
The RST signal output time is extended to prevent the PMC from failing
to read a signal. The extention time can be set in units of 16 msec using
parameter No. 3017. The RST signal output time is obtained by:
(Reset processing time)+(parameter value) 16 msec.
Reset ON
Reset
Processing
RST signal
Reset PRSTCT 16m sec

( PRSTCT : Parameter No.3017 )
NOTE
Reset processing time requires at least 16 msec. This time
will be longer on optional configurations.
250
5.4 Function Indicates that the Power Mate is executing the rewinding
operation.
REWINDING SIGNAL
Output conditions
(OUTPUT) RWD
The signal turns to “1” when the reset & rewind signal RRW
<F000#0> [4.3] has turned to “1”.
However, if can be modified by setting parameter No. 3001#2
(RWM) to “0” so that this signal is not output.
The signal turns to “0” when more than 100 msec has passed
after the signal has turned to “1” in reset & rewind signal RRW
[4.3].
NOTE
The rewinding time required for a main program in memory
is nearly zero. Rewinding of the main program has ended
when the rewinding signal has turned to “0”.
5.5 Function These signals indicate the movement direction of control axis.
They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
MOVING DIRECTION signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
SIGNALS MVDn MVD n The moving direction of the nth axis is minus.
<F106> (n : 1 to 6)
Output conditions
“1” indicates the corresponding axes are moving in the minus
direction, and “0” indicates they are moving in the plus
direction.
NOTE
1 These signals are output in both automatic and manual
operations.
2 These signals maintain their existing condition during a
stop, indicating the direction of the axes’ movement before
being stopped.
251
5.6 Function These signals indicate that the control axes are set to the
in-position condition.
IN-POSITION They are provided for each control axis, and the number in the
SIGNALS INPn signal name corresponds to the control axis number.
<F104> INP n The actual machine position of the n–th axis is set to
the in–position condition.
(n : 1 to 6)
Output conditions
These signals turn to “1” in the following case :
D The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding
control axis is zero and the servo error is within the specified
allowance.
These signals turn to “0” in the following cases :
D The acceleration/deceleration delay of the corresponding
control axis is not zero.
D The servo error of the corresponding control axis exceeds the
specified allowance.
NOTE
The in-position signals may turn to “1” even during the
movement if the axis is fed at very low speed.
Relative parameter
No.1801, 1826, 1827
252
5.7 This outputs to PMC the classification of alarms occurring in Power

Mate.
ALARM
CLASSIFICATION [Signal] ALPS1 <F250#0>
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) [Function] P/S alarm 100 signal.....Parameter PWE was on.
ALPS1 TO ALPS3, 1: P/S alarm 100 has occurred.
0: P/S alarm 100 has not occurred.
ALPS, ALOT, ALOH,
ALSV <F250#0 TO [Signal] ALPS2 <F250#1>
[Function] P/S alarm 000 signal.....A parameter was set for which the
#6> power must be turned off then on
again.
1: P/S alarm 000 has occurred.
[Signal] ALPS3 <F250#2>
[Function] P/S alarm 101 signal.....Power went off while memory was
being written.
1: P/S alarm 101 has occurred.
[Signal] ALPS <F250#3>
[Function] P/S alarm signal
1: A P/S alarm, a custom macro alarm, or an alarm from
PMC has occurred.
0: A P/S alarm, a custom macro alarm, or an alarm from
PMC has not occurred.
[Signal] ALOT <F250#4>
[Function] Overtravel alarm signal
1: An overtravel alarm or an alarm from PMC has oc-
curred.
0: An overtravel alarm or an alarm from PMC has not oc-
curred.
[Signal] ALSV <F250#6>
[Function] Servo alarm signal
1: A servo alarm has occurred.
0: A servo alarm has not occurred.
[Signal] ALOH <F250#5>
[Function] Overheat alarm signal
1: An overheat alarm has occurred.
0: An overheat alarm has not occurred.
[Signal] ALAPC <F251#0>
[Function] APC alarm signal
1: An alarm in APC has occurred.
0: An alarm in APC has not occurred.
[Signal] ALPS4 <F251#2>
[Function] P/S alarm (No.5000 or later) siganl
1: P/S alarm (No.5000 or later) has occurred.
0: P/S alarm (No.5000 or later) has not occurred.
253
5.8 The Absolute Pulse Coder (APC) alarm type is output to the PMC.
APC ALARM TYPE [Signal] APCMn
SIGNALS (OUTPUT) [Function] APC communication error. Data transfer error (alarm 301)
APCMn, APOVn, [Signal] APOVn
APFEn, APPEn, [Function] APC overtime error. Data transfer error (alarm 302)
APPSn, APBZn, [Signal] APFEn
[Function] APC framing error. Data transfer error (alarm 303)
APBVn, APBLn
<F236 TO F241> [Signal] APPEn
[Function] APC parity error. Data transfer error (alarm 304)
[Signal] APPSn
[Function] APC pulse error. APC alarm (alarm 305)
[Signal] APBZn
[Function] The APC battery voltage has ever dropped to a level too
low to hold data. APC alarm (alarm 306)
[Signal] APBVn
[Function] The APC battery voltage has dropped to a level necessitat-
ing the battery to be changed. APC alarm (alarm 307)
[Signal] APBLn
[Function] The APC battery voltage has ever dropped (including pow-
er OFF) to a level necessitating the battery to be changed.
APC alarm (alarm 308)
(n : 1 to 6)
5.9 Alarms in the 3000 bracket can be generated from PMC to Power Mate.
DISPLAY OF [Signal] PALM
ALARMS FROM PMC [Function] PMC alarm generation selection signal
1: Alarms in the 3000 bracket are generated from PMC.
(INPUT) PAL0 TO 0: Alarms in the 3000 bracket are not generated from
PAL6, PALM <G225> PMC.
[Signal] PAL0-PAL6
[Function] Alarm number specification signal
Values in excess of 3000 among binary numbers displayed
by PAL0 to PAL6 become alarm numbers.
NOTE
When an alarm has been generated from PMC the 2 bits of
the alarm classification signals ALPS and ALOT [5.8]
become 1.
254
5.10 Status of the axis under Power Mate control is output by INPn, SUPn and
IPLn signals.
AXIS STATUS Timing is shown in Fig. 5.10.
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
INPn : (n : 1 to 6) Turns “1” at the in-position state.
INPn<F104#0>, SUPn SUPn : (n : 1 to 6) Is “1” while command pulses are in the acceleration/
<F220#1 TO F225#1>, deceleration control section.
IPLn <F220#2 TO IPLn : (n : 1 to 6) Is “1” while command pulses are in the interpolater.
F225#2>
Axis move command ĘĘĘ
(1) Division pulse
(2) Staying pulse of

acceleration/
deceleration
control section
INPn
IPLn
SUPn
Fig.5.10 Output timing of axis status signal
255
5.11
AXIS IN–MOTION [Classification] Output signal
SIGNAL MVn<F102> [Function] These signals indicate that the control axes are in
motion. An axis in–motion signal is available for
each control axis; a number added at the end of the
signal name indicates the corresponding control
axis.
Mvn
1…The first axis is in motion.
2…The second axis is in motion.
3…The third axis is in motion.
..
..
6…The sixth axis is in motion.
[Output condition] MVn is set to 1 in any of the following cases:
D When the corresponding axis has started motion
D When the corresponding handle feed axis has
been selected in the manual handle feed mode
MVn is set to 0 in any of the following cases:
D When the distribution for the move command
for the corresponding axis has stopped (in the
case where bit 6 (MVX) of parameter No. 3003
is set to 0)
D When deceleration on the corresponding axis
has stopped, and the in–position condition is set,
or when deceleration has stopped if no
in–position check is made (in the case where bit
6 (MVX) of parameter No. 3003 is set to 1)
256
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 6. MODE SELECT
6 MODE SELECT
257
6. MODE SELECT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
6.1 The mode select signal is a code signal consisting three bits MD1, MD2,
and MD4. The seven modes memory edit (EDIT), automatic operation
MODE SELECT (AUTO), step feed (STEP), manual continuous feed (JOG), TEACH IN
SIGNAL (INPUT) MD1, JOG, TEACH IN STEP, manual data input (MDI) mode can be selected
MD2, MD4 <G043#0 by combining these bits.
TO #2> Contact at the machine
Mode side
MD1 MD2 MD4
1 Memory edit (EDIT) Ę Ę
2 Automatic operation (AUTO) Ę
3 Step feed (STEP) Ę
4 Manual continuous feed (JOG) Ę Ę
5 TEACH IN STEP Ę Ę Ę
6 TEACH IN JOG Ę Ę
7 Manual data input (MDI)
Ę: Turns to “1”
: Turns to “0”
Cautions about Modes and Mode switching
(1) Switch the mode while the operation is stopped or halt (See Chapter
12).
(2) The mode cannot be switched during an emergency stop.
(3) Manual Operation at TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN STEP
D TEACH IN JOG
Manual continuous feed can be performed.
D TEACH IN STEP
Step feed can be performed.
In the TEACH IN JOG and TEACH IN STEP modes, program edit is
possible in addition to the operations above.
(4) If the step feed mode or the TEACH IN STEP mode is selected during
operation in the automatic operation mode, the operation stops and
the signal STL [12.3] turns OFF as well as the signal SPL [12.4] turns
ON to assume the step feed mode or the TEACH IN STEP mode. The
step feed by the feed axis direction select signal +Jn, –Jn, (n : 1 to 6)
[7.1] is possible in this condition. It is also possible to select the
automatic operation mode again and to restart the operation by the
automatic operation start signal in this condition since the command
in the automatic operation mode is held. It is impossible to restart
unless the same mode as before the interruption is selected, however,
if the operation was interrupted by switching to the step feed mode
during operation in the automatic operation mode. (Fig. 6.1(a))
258
Mode select signal state

Automatic operation
Step feed or
TEACH IN STEP
Operation in automatic
operation mode
Step feed enable
STL
SPL
ST
Start signal
Fig.6.1 (a)
(5) If the manual continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG mode is
selected during operation in the automatic operation mode, the
operation is interrupted and the signal STL [12.3] turns OFF as well
as the signal SPL [12.4] turns ON to assume the manual continuous
feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG mode. Manual continuous feed by
the feed axis direction select signal is possible in this condition.
It is also possible to restart in this condition by returning to the
original condition just as in the aforementioned step feed and TEACH
IN STEP. Also the step feed command is ignored and the manual
continuous feed mode is selected if the mode is switched to the
manual continuous feed mode or the TEACH IN JOG mode during
operation by step feed. Any feed axis direction select signal which
happens to be close before the manual continuous feed mode or the
TEACH IN JOG mode is selected is ignored, however. Turn all the
feed axis direction select signals +Jn, –Jn, (n : 1 to 6) [7.1] open once
and then turn the required feed axis direction select signal close, and
that feed axis direction select signal will be selected. (Figs. 6.1 (b),
(c))

Automatic
operation
Manual continuous
feed or TEACH IN
JOG/HANDLE
Operation in automatic
operation mode
Manual
STL continuous
feed enable
SPL
ST
Start signal
Fig.6.1 (b)
259
6. MODE SELECT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03

100msec min
Automatic
operation
step feed
Manual
continuous feed
or TEACH IN
JOG/HANDLE
Feed axis
direction
select signal
Manual Manual
continuous continuous
feed disable feed enable
Fig.6.1 (c)
260
6.2 These signals indicate the current operational mode. The relationship
between input and output signals is:
OPERATION MODE
CONFIRMATION Table 6.2 Relationship between Input and Output Signals
SIGNALS Input signal
Mode O tp t signal
Output
MD1 MD2 MD4 ZRN
Manaul data input (MDI) 0 0 0 0 MMDI<F003#3>
Auto operation (AUTO) 1 0 0 0 MAUT<F003#5>
Memory edit (EDIT) 1 1 0 0 MEDT<F003#6>
Handle mode (MH) 0 0 1 0 MH<F003#1>
Jogging (JOG) 1 0 1 0 MJ<F003#2>
Manual reference 1 0 1 1 MZRH<F004#5>
position return
TEACH IN JOG 0 1 1 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>,
MJ<F003#2>
TEACH IN STEP 1 1 1 0 MTCHIN<F003#7>,
MH<F003#1>
261
7. JOG FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
7 JOG FEED
262
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 7. JOG FEED
7.1 These signals are enabled when INC, JOG, TEACH IN STEP or TEACH
IN JOG mode is selected. They indicate the feed axis and its feed
FEED AXIS direction.
DIRECTION SELECT +/– of signal name indicates the feed direction, the number following “J”
SIGNAL (INPUT) corresponds to the number of the controlled axis (see Fig.7.1 (a)):
+Jn, –Jn, <G100,
G102 > + J n
n.....Feed nst axis. (n : 1 to 6)
+.....Feed in the + direction.

–.....Feed in the – direction.
Fig.7.1
(1) Incremental feed

When the feed axis direction select signal of the axis (+Jn, –Jn) to be
moved turns from “0” to “1”, that axis moves one step in the pertinent
direction.
Table 7.1 Feed Amount per Step

Increment system Feed amount per step
Metric sytem 0.001 mm
Inch system 0.0001 inch
The above feed amount per step can be multiplied by 10, 100 or 1000 by
the incremental feed signal MP1, MP2 [9]. For details, refer to Section
9.
(2) Jog Feed
When the feed axis direction select signal (+Jn, –Jn) of the axis to be
moved turns from “0” to “1” after the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode
has been selected, that axis moves in the pertinent direction at the feed
rate determined by the override signal or manual rapid traverse select
signal. When the feed axis direction select signal turns to “1” and the
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is subsequently selected, or the feed
axis direction select signal remains “1” and the RESET button or
EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the axis does not move until
the signal first turns to “0”, then back to “1”.
Simultaneous 3 axes are controled in jog feed.
263
7.2 (Function)
MANUAL FEEDRATE A feedrate in jog feed or incremental feed can be overridden.
These sixteen binary code signals correspond to the override
OVERRIDE (INPUT) values as follows:
*JV0 TO
ȍ |2
15
*JV15<G010,G011> Override value (%) = 0.01 i

Vi|
i+0
where Vi=0 when *JVi is “1”

Vi=1 when *JVi is “0”
If *JV0 to *JV15 all are “1” or “0”, the override values are regarded as
0. The feed stops. It is possible to select a manual feedrate in 0.01% steps
over a range of 0 to 655.34%.
Table 7.2 shows an example.
Table 7.2 Relationship between *JV0 to *JV15 and

Override Value
*JV0 to *JV15 Override
*JV15 *JV12 *JV11 *JV8 *JV7 *JV4 *JV3 *JV0 value (%)
( )
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0.01
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0.10
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1.00
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 10.00
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 100.00
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 400.00
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 655.34
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Operation)
If rapid traverse selection signal RT[7.3] is “0” during jog feed
or incremental feed, the actual feedrate is obtained by
multiplying a jog feedrate set by a parameter (No.1423) by an
override value selected by these signals.
264
7.3 If the jog feed or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected, setting the RT signal
to “1” switches tool movement from a jog feedrate to a rapid traverse rate.
MANUAL RAPID
Under the condition mentioned above, setting the feed axis direction
TRAVERSE SELECT selection signal (7.1) to ”1” moves the tool in the specified direction at
SIGNAL (INPUT) the rapid traverse rate. If the jog feed or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected,
RT<G019#7> the feed axis direction selection signal is ”1,” and the override signal is
in effect, setting the RT signal to ”1” causes the tool to move at the rapid
traverse rate. Resetting the RT signal to ”0” resumes the original feedrate.
(See Fig. 7.3.)
Jog feed mode or

TEACH IN JOG
Feed axis direction 100ms or

select signal +Jn, –Jn greater
Manual rapid traverse RT

select signal RT
Axis movement
Rapid traverse
Feedrate by override signal Feedrate by override signal
Fig.7.3 RT Signal and Feedrate
7.4 These signals override the rapid traverse rate, and correspond to:
RAPID TRAVERSE Table 7.4 Signals ROV1, 2 and Override
OVERRIDE SIGNAL
Rapid traverse override
(INPUT) ROV1, ROV2 Override value
val e
ROV2 ROV1
<G014#0, #1> 0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 Fo % (NOTE)
NOTE
For Fo value, an absolute value is set by parameter
No.1421 within a range of 0 to rapid traverse rate (for each
axis).
Actual feed rate is obtained by multiplying the rapid traverse
rate preset by parameter No.1420 by the override value
determined by this signal, whether in automatic or manual
operation (including manual reference position return).
265
7.5 This signal determines whether or not the move amount is counted to the
present position on the workpiece coordinate system when the machine
MANUAL ABSOLUTE tool is moved by the manual operation, whether jog or incremental feed.
SIGNAL (INPUT) (a) *ABSM = 0 ... (manual absolute on)
*ABSM <G006#2> When manual operation is interrupted under this condition during
automatic operation:
(i) At the end of the block where manual operation was
interrupted, the tool position moves in parallel by the manual
move amount, whether the command is incremental or
absolute.
(ii) In subsequent blocks, the parallel-moved tool position
remains unchanged until an absolute command block
appears. Therefore, if all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands, the tool keeps the parallel-moved
position until machining ends (Fig. 7.5 (a)).
In case of incremental commands
Manual
intervention
End point
Programmed tool path

The tool returns to the programmed tool path when an
absolute command block is encountered.
Fig.7.5 (a) Manual Absolute ON
NOTE
If the machining end position has shifted by the manual
move amount because all blocks are programmed by
incremental commands only, the present value is displayed
shifted by the manual move amount.
(b) *ABSM = 1 (Manual absolute off)

The manual move amount is not counted to the present position on
the workpiece coordinate system. The present value display on the
CRT does not include the manual move amount. The display is reset
to the initial value (before manual operation) when the control is reset,
or when operation in the MEM mode is started after the manual
operation.
266
During automatic operation, if manual intervention of a block is

interrupted, the tool position moves in parallel by the manual move
amount, regardless of the absolute or incremental command at the end
point of that block, as well as at the end point of subsequent blocks
(Fig. 7.5 (b)).
Actual tool path The actual end

(The tool moves along this path, regardless of point always
absolute command or incremental command) moves in parallel
Manual
intervention
End point
Programmed tool path
Fig.7.5 (b) Manual Absolute OFF
The present value display at the finish of the operation shows an end point
value on the program as if manual intervention had not been executed.
However, the tool position moves in parallel.
267
8. INTERLOCK PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
8 INTERLOCK
268
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 8. INTERLOCK
8.1 There are two types of interlock functions. Set the parameter to use
high-speed interlock *RILK. (Parameter No.3003#1 (HITL))
INTERLOCK SIGNAL This signal is used to inhibit the machine from moving, and is effective
(INPUT) *IT<G008#0>, regardless of the selected mode. When the *IT or *RILK signal is “0”, the
*RILK<X000#6, axis movement is decelerated and stopped.
X1000#6> In automatic operation (cycle start lamp signal STL is “1”, feed hold lamp
signal SPL is “0”), blocks containing M, command is executed
consecutively until a block containing an axis move command is
encountered; the system then stops and is placed into the automatic
operation mode. When the *IT or *RILK signal turns to “1”, operation
resumes (Figs. 8.1 (a), (b)).
Command read
Axis move
*IT
Fig.8.1 (a) Block Containing Only Axis Move Command
Command read
MF
FIN
*IT
Fig.8.1 (b) Block Containing Auxiliary Functions Only

(Automatic)
NOTE
The overtravel amount of the motor after turning *IT or
*RILK to “1” is represented by the following formula.
TC T
Qmax + F m. 1 ( ) S ) A )
60 1000 1000 1000
Where
Qmax : Overtravel quantity (mm or inch)
Fm : Feedrate (mm/min or inch/min)
Tc : Cutting time constant (msec)
Ts : Servo time constant (Ts = 33msec normally)
A : Processing time of Power Mate
A =30ms with standard interlock signal *IT
A =12ms with high speed interlock signal *RILK
269
8. INTERLOCK PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
8.2 The specified axis movement can be prevented independently by signal

(*ITn).
AXIS INTERLOCK
Parameter ITX (No.3003#2) selects whether interlock is effective for all
SIGNAL (INPUT) *ITn axes or each axis. Set the parameter to be effective for each axis.
<G130> (a) In manual operation
The movement of an interlocked axis is inhibited, but the other axes
are movable. If an axis is interlocked during movement, it stops after
being decelerated, and it starts moving again when it is released from
interlock.
(b) In automatic operation (AUTO mode)
If an axis is interlocked while its movement is being commanded (the
move amount is not 0, inclusive of the tool length compensation), all
axes movements are prevented.
If a moving axis is interlocked, all axes stop moving after being
decelerated, and they start moving again when it is released from
being interlocked.
*ITn Interlock signal for the nth axis. (n : 1 to 6)
0 : Make it be interlock
1 : Not malce it be interlock
This function is effective during dry run.
8.3 Function
INTERLOCK SIGNAL This function allows a directional interlock for each axis.
Together with the high-speed interlock, it is possible to release
FOR EACH AXIS AND the interlock of an axis only in the direction in which no
DIRECTION (INPUT) axis/directional interlock is applied.
+MITn, –MITn <G132, Operation
G134> When the axis/directional interlock signal becomes “1”, Power
Mate applies interlock only in the corresponding axial
direction. However, during automatic operation, all axes will
stop.
270
9. INCREMENTAL FEED SIGNAL (INPUT)
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE MP1, MP2 <G019#4,#5>
INCREMENTAL FEED SIGNAL (INPUT) MP1, MP2
9 <G019#4,#5>
Movement amount and magnification of external pulse input per step of

step feed is signalled as shown in Table 9.
Table.9
Status of signals Movement amount per step
Magnification
Metric input Inch input
of external
MP2 MP1 Incremental Incremental pulse input
feed feed
0 0 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch X1
0 1 0.01 mm 0.001 inch X10
1 0 0.1 mm 0.01 inch XM
1 1 1 mm 0.1 inch XN
NOTE
Magnification M and N are set by parameters
(No.7113,No.7114).
271
10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
10 REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
272
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 10. REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
10.1 (1) Manual reference position return selection signal (input)

ZRN<G043#7>
1ST REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN (2) Reference position return deceleration signal (input)
*DECn <X002, X1002> (n : 1 to 6)
(3) Reference position return end signal (output)
ZPn <F094> (n : 1 to 6)
This function manually or automatically returns the moving parts of the
machine to the reference position in the direction specified for each axis.
The reference position return for this CNC is a grid system. The reference
position is determined by the electrical grid position shown by the one
revolution signal of the position detector.
(a) Reference position return operation (grid system)
When the JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode is selected, the ZRN
signal is turned to “1” and feed is applied in the reference position
direction by pressing the manual feed button; the moving parts
of the machine move at the rapid traverse. When the reference
position return deceleration signals (*DECn) turn to “0”, the
deceleration limit switch operates, the feedrate decelerates, and
the machine continues to move at a constant low speed. When
the deceleration limit switch is subsequently released and the
electrical grid position is reached after the reference position
return deceleration signal turns to “1“ again, feed stops and the
reference position return end signals (ZPn) become “1”. The
reference position return direction can be set for each axis .
Once reference position return is complete, JOG feed of the axis
at which the signal (ZPn) is turned to “1” is ignored until signal
ZRN turns to “0”.
The time chart in Fig.10.1(a) shows the above operation.
273
Jog feed
JOG or TEACH IN JOG mode lock state
ZRN
+J1 +J1
Rapid
traverse
*DEC1 *DEC1
Grid
(1 revolution ZP1
signal)
Detector 1 revolution signal (X-axis return
direction +)
Fig.10.1 (a) Reference Position Return (Grid System)
When the reference position return operation is done in the reverse

direction from the preset return direction, the operation changes direction
after passing through the reference position and the axis reaches the
reference position. Fig. 10.1 (b) shows the time chart.
JOG /TEACH IN JOG mode

ZRN
+J1
+V Rapid
traverse
Rapid
traverse
–V
*DEC1 *DEC1 *DEC1
Grid
ZP1
(X-axis return direction –)
Fig.10.1 (b) Reference Position Return (from Reverse Direction)
274
In the above case, the relationship among the reference position,

deceleration signals and feedrate is as follows (Fig. 10.1 (c)):
Reference position
+V
–V
Minus direction Plus direction

*DEC1
Fig.10.1 (c) Position and Feedrate

(in the Case of Reverse Direction Return)
When a mode other than JOG and TEACH IN JOG mode is selected or
the feed axis direction select signals (+J1, –J1, +J2, –J2) are all turned off
during reference position return, the machine decelerates and stops.
Reference position return must always feed toward the reference position
from a point outside the deceleration region. “Deceleration region”
means:
Point at which
*DEC1 turns to
“0” Reference position
Deceleration
region
Fig.10.1 (d)
A low, constant speed after deceleration can be specified for each axis by
using parameter No. 1425, within the range of 6 to 24,000 mm/min or 0.6
to 960 in/min.
Automatic reference position return to zero point return direction by G28
is performed by the same sequence as manual reference position return
only if manual/ automatic reference position return has never been
performed after turning power on, after emergency stop or after releasing
servo alarm. Once the reference position return is performed by the above
sequence, automatic reference position return is performed the same as
positioning to the reference position at rapid traverse and does not follow
the sequence described here, and the starting position of G28 command
is not limited.
275
(b) Deceleration limit switch installation conditions

Installation of the deceleration limit switch for reference position
return must meet the following conditions (refer to Fig. 10.1 (e))
Feedrate
Return direction
VR
VL
Reference position
Deceleration limit Deceleration limit
switch operation point switch released point
L DW L DA
Fig.10.1 (e)
(1) LDW : Deceleration dog width (mm or inch)

TR
V R( ) 30 ) T S) ) 4V L.T S
L DW u 2
6000
VR :Rapid traverse (mm/min or inch/min)
TR :Rapid traverse time constant (msec)
TS :Servo time constant (msec)
VL :Speed after deceleration (mm/min or inch/min)
(2) LDA :Distance between deceleration limit switch
released point and reference position
LDA : Move amount of 1/2 revolution of motor
Since the above conditions do not include the limit switch
operation variations, this point must also be considered at
installation.
(c) Reference
For the reference position return described above, it is necessary
to move the machine at a feedrate with the servo position
deviation value more than 128 before the first return is done after
turning power on or releasing the emergency stop or servo alarm
state. Here, the servo position deviation value is calculated by the
feedrate and the servo loop gain as follows :
E+F 1
G U
E : Servo position deviation value(µm)
F : Feedrate(µm/sec)
U : Detection unit
G : Servo loop gain
Generally, the detection unit is 1µm.
For example, if the machine is moved at a feedrate of 6
m/min and servo loop gain is 30 at the time, servo position
deviation is
276
6,000 1,000 1
60 1
E+ + 3, 333
30
Conversely, when detection unit is 1µm and servo loop gain is 30, the
feedrate with the servo position deviation of 128 is
F = 128 30 60 (mm) = 230,400 (µm/min) = 230 (mm/min)
By the above result, the machine should be moved toward the reference
position at a feedrate of more than 230 mm/min before the first reference
position return is performed.
The servo position error that occurs during actual feeding can be detected
using diagnose 300.
NOTE
Parameter No. 3001#3 (BIO) specifies whether the *DEC
signal is to be entered from the built–in I/O card or through
the FANUC I/O link from the I/O card or I/O unit. When the
signal is supplied from the built–in I/O card, parameter No.
3005#1 (BDEC) must also be specified.
277
10.2
2ND, 3RD (1) 2nd reference point return end signals (output)
REFERENCE ZP2n <F096>
POSITION RETURN (2) 3rd reference point return end signals (output)
SIGNALS (OUTPUT) ZP3n <F098>
(a) Function
ZP2n, ZP3n <F096,
These signals indicate that the control axes are positioned at the
F098> 2nd or 3rd reference position. The signals are provided
independently for each axis; the number after ZP shows the
reference position number, while the second digit indicates the
control axis.
ZP 2 n
n ..... nth axis reference position return end signal

(n :1 to 6)
2 ..... End of return to the 2nd reference position

3 ..... End of return to the 3rd reference position
(b) Output conditions
These signals turn to “1” when:
(i) The 2nd or 3rd reference position return (G30) has been
completed and axes are in position.
These signals turn to “0” when:
(i) An axis has moved from the reference position;
(ii) Emergency stop is activated; or
(iii) A servo alarm occurs.
10.3 (a) Function

REFERENCE This signal indicates that the Power Mate has established the
reference position by the reference position return. For the machine
POSITION whose reference position is established by the absolute pulse coder,
ESTABLISHMENT this signal turns to “1” at the time of power on.
(b) Output condition
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
This signal turns to “1” when the Power Mate has established the
ZRFn <F120> reference position by the reference position return operation. It
remains “1” until the Power Mate releases the reference position.
278
10.4 This function moves the moving part of the machine by manual
continuous feed in the direction specified for each axis, then returns it to
DOGLESS the reference position without using the deceleration signal for reference
REFERENCE position return.
POSITION SETTING (a) Setting the reference position
SIGNAL (INPUT) ZRn (i) Position the axis near the reference position using manual
<G206#4, G211#4> continuous feed.
(ii) In the reference position return mode, enter the signal
specifying the feed axis direction [7.1], (+Jn) or (–Jn), for the
axis.
(iii) The axis is positioned at the grid closest to the current position,
and the position becomes the reference position.
(Example) When the reference position for the 1st axis is set
ZRN mode
+J1 or –J1
(PMC³NC)
1st axis
V
1st axis grid

°
Stop point Reference position
(b) Reference point resetting operation

It is possible to keep resetting a new grid point as a reference point,
with the above mentioned method, when the set reference point is
different from the true reference point. After setting the reference
point using the method given in (a), when the ZRn signal is turned
ON, it moves at a constant low speed to the next grid point and that
point is set as the new reference point. This operation can be repeated
over again allowing the true reference point to be set while changing
it 1 grid at a time.
279
JOG mode
MD4, MD2, MD1
ZRN
(Note2)
+Jn/–Jn or ZRn +X
+Jn/–Jn or ZRn ZRn (Note3) ZRn (Note3)
FL FL FL
Feed rate
Psotion
detector grid
1st reference point
setting by method 1.
1st reference point Next reference point True reference point
Fig.10.4 Dog–less reference point setting sequence
NOTE
1 The 1st reference point setting can use any signal from +Jn,
–Jn, ZRn.
2 The axis is momery moved by one grid even if ZRn signal
is ON for a ling time.
(c) Return to the reference position

When the signal specifying the feed axis direction [7.1] (+Jn or –Jn)
is entered for the axis after the reference position is established, the
axis moves by the high-speed reference position return regardless of
the feed axis direction selection signal.
(d) Maintenance of reference position
Using an absolute pulse coder, any reference position that has been
set up can be maintained after the power is turned off.
280
NOTE
1 If command G28 is issued before returning to the reference
position is performed, P/S alarm 90 is issued.
2 Issuing command G28 after the inch/millimeter conversion
command G20/G21 causes the machine to return to the
reference position at high speed.
3 When positioning the axis near the reference position, it is
necessary to move the axis in the reference position return
direction at a speed such that the positional deviation of the
servo exceeds 128.
4 The positioning direction from the point closest to the
reference position to the grid conforms to that set by
parameter ZMIx(No.1006 #5) regardless of the sign (+ or
–) of the signal specifying the feed axis direction.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1002 DLZ
DLZ= 0 : Dogless reference position return function is invalid.

1 : Dogless reference position return function is valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx
Data type : Bit axis

DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs
0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
NOTE
When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 0, parameter 1005 is
enabled. When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 1, parameter
1005 is disabled, and the function for setting the reference
position without dogs is enabled for all axes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx
ZMIx Reference position return direction and backlash initial

direction at power on are :
0 : plus
1 : minus
281
10.5 (a) Function

REFERENCE This function sets the absolute pulse coder to the origin by moving
the machine to the reference position by manual continuous feed,
POSITION MDI operation, or automatic operation, then setting the reference
EXTERNAL SETTING position external setting signal to “1.”
SIGNAL ZPEXTn (b) Operation
(INPUT) <G206#6, 1) Set parameter ZEXx (No. 1009#0) to “1” (to enable this
function).
G207#6, G208#6, 2) Move the machine to the reference position by manual
G209#, G210#6, continuous feed, MDI operation, or automatic operation.
G211#6> 3) Select the manual continuous feed mode (JOG) and set the ZRN
(G043#7) signal to “1.”
4) Set to “1” the reference position external setting signal
(ZPEXTn) for the axis for which the reference position is to be
set up.
5) The current position is memorized as the reference position for
the target axis.
(c) Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1009 ZEXx
Data type : Bit axis type

ZEXx : 0 : Disables the reference position external setting
function.
1 : Enables the reference position external setting
function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1815 APCX APZx

APCx : 0 : The position detector is not an absolute type.
1 : The position detector is an absolute type (absolute
pulse coder).
CAUTION
When the absolute pulse coder is to be set to the origin
using this function, the APCx bit must be set to “1.”
APZx : 0 : When the position detector used is an absolute type,

the machine position has not been associated with
the position of the absolute position detector.
1 : When the position detector used is an absolute type,
the machine position has been associated with the
position of the absolute position detector.
NOTE
Setting the reference position external setting signal to “1”
causes this parameter to be set to “1.”
282
(d) Alarm
No. Description
093 Reference position Because the reference position external setting
external setting signal was set to “1” under one of the following
failed. conditions, reference position external setting
failed.
1) The manual continuous feed mode (JOG)
has not been selected.
2) The manual continuous feed mode (JOG)
has been selected, but the ZRN signal is
“0.”
3) The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is “0.”
4) APCx (bit 5 of parameter No. 1815) is “0.”
NOTE
1 The reference position external setting signal is effective,
when the manual continuous feed mode (JOG) has been
selected, and the ZRN signal is “1.”
2 When this function is used to set the absolute pulse coder
to the origin, be sure to set the emergency stop signal
(*ESP) to “1.”
3 After the reference position has been set up for the absolute
pulse coder using this function, turn the power off and on
again.
4 This function is intended to set up the origin for the absolute
pulse coder. It cannot be used for the incremental pulse
coder.
283
10.6 (a) Overview

SIGNAL FOR This function is intended to minimize trouble in fine adjustment
required after reference position setting and to eliminate differences
BUMP–TYPE in adjustments among operators. This is achieved by automating a
REFERENCE method in which reference position setting involves pressing the axis
against the machine stopper.
POSITION SETTING
The operator simply selects the axis for which the reference position
(OUTPUT) CLRCHn is to be set up and starts the required cycle. When the cycle is started,
<F180> the following operations are performed automatically.
1) During reference position setting, the speed at which the axis is
bumped against the machine stopper varies depending on the start
position. To make this speed constant, the following cycle is first
executed:
The selected axis is pushed against the machine stopper with the
torque (force) applied to the axis decreased, and then, the axis is
moved back to a constant position specified in a parameter.
2) The operation at step 1) is repeated.
3) The reference position is finally set to the position to which the
axis moves back for the second time.
NOTE
This function is effective for the absolute pulse coder.
(b) Operating procedure

The bump–type reference position setting is performed by the
following procedure.
1) Previously set the parameters necessary for this function.
[Parameter No.] [Data type] [Description]
No.1006#5 Bit axis type Direction in which the refer-
ence position is to be set up
No.1815#5 Bit axis type Setting the absolute pulse
coder
No1815#4 Bit axis type Limit to the torque for setting
up the absolute pulse coder
reference position
No.7186 Byte axis type Torque limit
No.7183 Word axis type Bump speed 1
No.7184 Word axis type Bump speed 2
No.7185 Word axis type Speed for reference position
setting
No.7181 Doubleword First–time return distance
axis type from the stopper
No.7182 Doubleword Reference position setting
axis type distance
2) Select the reference position return mode.
[MD1 (G043#0) = 1, MD2 (G043#1) = 0, MD4 (G043#2) = 1,
ZRN (G043#7) = 1]
3) Select the axis for which reference position setting is to be
performed by specifying the return axis selection signal as listed
below.
284
Return axis HS1C HS1B HS1A

No axis selected 0 0 0
First axis 0 0 1
Second axis 0 1 0
Third axis 0 1 1
Fifth axis 1 0 0
Fourth axis 1 0 1
Sixth axis 1 1 0
NOTE
HS1A (G018#0), HS1B (G018#1), and HS1C (G018#2)
function as the external pulse input axis selection signal.
4) Start the cycle. ST (G007#2)

The above procedure enables the cycle operation in item (c) below,
thus achieving reference position setting.
5) The automatic operation start signal OP (F000#7) is kept to be 1
during the cycle operation.
(c) Cycle operation
1) Before the reference position is set up
When the reference position has not been set up (parameter No.
1815#4 APZx = 0), steps (i) to (v) are performed automatically to
set up the reference position.
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Current position
(i) The specified axis is bumped against the machine stopper

by a torque limit operation.
Until the axis bumps into the machine stopper, it moves:
In the direction specified in parameter No. 1006
At the speed specified in parameter No. 7183
With the torque specified in parameter No. 7186
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ The direction, speed, and torque for axis
movement are specified in parameters.
(ii) When the axis bumps into the machine stopper end, it
moves through the distance specified in a parameter in the
direction away from the machine stopper.
285
The axis moves back:

In the direction opposite to the one specified in parameter
No. 1006
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
The direction, speed, and torque for axis
(iii) Steps (iv) and (v) are repeated from the position the axis
was moved back to, in order to maintain a constant speed
for axis movement in which the axis is pushed toward the
stopper.
(iv) The specified axis is pushed toward the machine stopper
with a limited–torque operation.
Until the axis bumps into the machine stopper, it moves:
In the direction specified in parameter No. 1006
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ The direction, speed, and torque for axis
(v) When the axis bumps into the machine stopper end, it
moves through the distance specified in a parameter in the
direction away from the machine stopper.
The axis moves back:
In the direction opposite to the one specified in parameter
No. 1006
Through the distance specified in parameter 7182
286
ÃÃÃÃ
Reference position
Machine stopper
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃ
The direction, speed, distance, and torque for
axis movement are specified in parameters.
Parameter No. 7184 (speed at which the axis bumps into the
machine stopper during a limited–torque operation) should
be set with a value that matches the accuracy of the machine.
When the axis bumps into the machine stopper and is moved
back to a certain point through the distance specified in
parameter No. 7182, this point is set as the reference position
of that axis, and the reference position return completion
signals ZPn (F094#0 to #5) are output.
When the reference position return is completed, a PS alarm
(000) will occur. Turn the power off and on again.
2) After the reference position is set up
When the reference position has been set up (APZx (bit 4 of
parameter No. 1815) = 1, starting the cycle causes the axis
immediately to return to the reference position at a rapid traverse
rate without performing item 1).
(d) Parameter
Torque limit used during execution of the bump–type reference position
7186 setting cycle
Data type : Byte axis type

Unit of data : %
Range of valid data : 0 to 100
A current limit override value is specified for individual axes during
execution of the bump–type reference position setting cycle.
NOTE
If the parameter is 0, the override value is assumed to be
100%.
287
First–time bump speed used during execution of the bump–type reference

7183 position setting cycle
Data type : Word axis type

Unit of data :
Range of valid data :
Range of valid data
Increment system Unit of data
IS–B
Metric machine 1 [mm/min] 30 to 65535
Inch machine 0.1 [inch/min] 30 to 65535
Rotary axis 1 [deg/min] 30 to 65535
Second–time bump speed used during execution of the bump–type

7184 reference position setting cycle

Unit of data :
Range of valid data
IS–B
First–time return distance used during execution of the bump–type

Data type : 2–word axis type

Unit of data :
Increment system IS–B
Metric machine 0.001
Inch machine 0.0001
Rotary axis 0.001
Range of valid data: –99999999 to +99999999
Reference position distance used during execution of the bump–type


Unit of data :
Increment system IS–B
Metric machine 0.001
Inch machine 0.0001
Rotary axis 0.001
Range of valid data: –99999999 to +99999999
288
Axis movement speed for reference position setting used during execution
7185 of the bump–type reference position setting cycle
Data type: Word axis type

Unit of data :
Range of valid data
IS–B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx

ZMIx : Specifies the reference position setting direction (from the
current axis position to the machine stopper) for the reference
position setting cycle operation as follows:
0 : Positive
1 : Negative
NOTE
When the reference position setting cycle operation is
started in the direction specified in ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter
No. 1006), the algebraic sign (direction of operation) of the
values specified in parameter Nos. 7181 and 7182 should
match the direction set in ZMIx (bit 5 of parameter No.
1006). If the directions do not match, the reference position
setting cycle operation cannot be activated even when a
start signal is entered.
(e) Signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F180 CLRCH6 CLRCH5 CLRCH4 CLRCH3 CLRCH2 CLRCH1
CLRCH1 :First–axis current limit reached signal

CLRCH2 :Second–axis current limit reached signal
CLRCH3 :Third–axis current limit reached signal
CLRCH4 :Fourth–axis current limit reached signal
CLRCH5 :Fifth–axis current limit reached signal
CLRCH6 :Sixth–axis current limit reached signal
If a current limit is in effect, this signal becomes “1” when the limit
is reached.
289
(f) Timing chart
ZRN mode
Mode signal (input)

MD1, 2, 4, ZRN
Axis selection signal

(input) HS1A, HS1B, HS1C
Automatic operation
start signal (input) ST
Cycle operation
Automatic operation
started signal (output) OP
Reference position
return completed signal
(output) ZPn N% (NOTE)
100% 100%
Torque limit
Bump direction
Axis speed
Return direction
Torque limit reached

signal (output) CLRCHn
NOTE
N%: Torque limit (%) specified in a parameter
290
11. MEMORY PROTECTION KEY
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE KEY1 TO KEY4 <G046#3-#6>
MEMORY PROTECTION KEY (INPUT) KEY1 TO KEY4
11 <G046#3Ć#6>
(a) Function
Enables the changing of the memory contents from the MDI panel.
Four signals are provided. The operations that can be performed on
the contents of memory by each signal vary depending on the setting
of bit 7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290.
When KEY = 0
@ KEY1: Enables the input of tool compensation values.
@ KEY2: Enables the input of setting data and macro variables.
@ KEY3: Enables program loading and editing.
@ KEY4: (Reserved)
When KEY = 1
@ KEY1: Enables program loading and editing, as well as the
input of PMC parameters.
@ KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
(b) Operation
When a signal is set to 0, the associated operations are disabled.
When a signal is set to 1, the associated operations are enabled.
(c) Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
(d) Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY
KEY For memory protection keys:

0 : The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.
1 : Only the KEY1 signal is used.
NOTE
The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY = 0 or
KEY = 1.
291
12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
12 AUTOMATIC OPERATION
292
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 12. AUTOMATIC OPERATION
12.1 When the cycle start signal (ST) is turned to “1”, then turned to “0” when
automatic operation (MEM) is selected, the Power Mate enters automatic
CYCLE START operation state and operation starts. At the same time, the cycle start lamp
SIGNAL (INPUT) ST signal STL [12.3] turns to “1”. The cycle start signal (ST) is ignored
<G007#2> when:
(1) AUTO mode is not selected;
(2) Feed hold signal (*SP) is “0”;
(3) Emergency stop signal (*ESP) is “0”;
(4) External reset signal (ERS) is “1”;
(5) During sequence number search;
(6) Alarm state is displayed on CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI;
(7) NOT READY is displayed on CRT/MDI or DPL/MDI;
(8) STL signal is output during automatic operation starting; or
(9) Axis movement commanded by the previous command is not ended.
When the following occurs during automatic operation, the machine
stops and the STL signal turns to “0”:
(1) *SP signal is “0”;
(2) *ESP signal is “0”;
(3) ERS signal is “1”;
(4) RESET button is pushed;
(5) Commands of one block are ended in single block state;
(6) Manual data input command execution is ended;
(7) End of record code is read during automatic operation;
(8) Axis movement stops by an alarm; or
(9) Mode is switched to manual handle/step feed or jog feed.
Generally, the cycle start signal is input by pushbutton.
Table 12.1 Status of Operation

Signal name Cycle start Feed hold Automatic
lamp lamp operation lamp
State of the CNC STL SPL OP
Cycle start state Ę Ę
Feed hold state Ę Ę
Automatic operation stop Ę

state
Reset state
Ę indicates the signal “1”

(1) Cycle start state
Indicates that the Power Mate is executing automatic operation
command.
(2) Feed hold state
Indicates that the Power Mate is not executing automatic operation
ommand. The command to be executed remain.
(3) Automatic operation stop state
Indicates that automatic operation has been completed and stopped.
293
(4) Reset state

Indicates that the automatic operation has been forcibly terminated.
NOTE
If the sequence number search is performed through MDI
panel during automatic operation, the OP signal turns to “1”.
294
12.2 When the feed hold signal (*SP) is turned to “0” during automatic
operation or manual data input, the Power Mate enters the feed hold state
FEED HOLD SIGNAL and stops. At the same time, the cycle start lamp signal (STL[12.3]) turns
(INPUT) *SP to “0” and the feed hold lamp signal (SPL[12.4]) turns to “1”.
<G008#5> The CNC does not enter automatic operation again even if the *SP signal
is “1”. Operation can be restarted by turning the *SP signal to “1”
followed by turning the cycle start signal (ST[12.1]) to “1”, then turning
the ST signal to “0”.
This signal is invalid because the feed hold signal

(*SP) is opened.
ST ST ST
STL STL
SPL
*SP *SP
Fig.12.2 Time Chart for Automatic Operation
If the *SP signal is “0” during the execution of a block where only
M[15.1], function code is programmed, the STL signal turns to “0”
immediately, the SPL signal turns to “1” and the automatic operation is
stopped (feed hold state). When the FIN signal is returned, the
corresponding operation is executed. The Power Mate operates until the
execution of the block is completed, then the SPL signal turns to “0” (the
STL signal remains “0”) and the Power Mate switches to the feed hold
state (the same state as the stop state after the execution of one block in
the single block mode).
See Section 12.1 for an explanation of the feed hold state.
295
M03; (block containing only a miscellaneous function)
OP
STL
SPL
MF For high–speed M/S/T interface.
ST
*SP
MFIN
Reset state Automatic opera- Automatic opera- Automatic operation

tion in progress tion paused stopped
G00X100.M03; (block containing a move command and miscellaneous function)

(Feed hold before the completion of movement)
OP
STL
SPL
ST
*SP
Before the
completion of
movement
MFIN
Reset state Automatic opera- Automatic operation

tion in progress paused
296
G00X100.M03; (block containing a move command and miscellaneous function)

(Feed hold after the completion of movement)
OP
STL
SPL
ST
*SP
After the comple-

tion of movement
MFIN
Reset state Automatic opera- Automatic opera- Automatic operation

tion in progress tion paused stopped
12.3 This signal indicates that the system is operating automatically. Refer to
Section 12.1, cycle start signal ST, for a detailed description.
CYCLE START LAMP
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
STL <F000#5>
12.4 This signal indicates that automatic operation is temporarily stopped.

Refer to Section 12.2, feed hold signal *SP, for a detailed description.
FEED HOLD LAMP
SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
SPL <F000#4>
297
12.5 The following output signals indicate the status of the Power Mate:
AUTOMATIC (1) Cycle start lamp STL
OPERATION SIGNAL (2) Feed hold lamp SPL
(OUTPUT) OP (3) Automatic operation OP
<F000#7> The following table shows the relationship between the state of the Power
Mate and the signals.
12.6 When several part programs are stored in program storage memory
beforehand, a workpiece number can be searched with the workpiece
WORKPIECE number search signals PN0 to PN7 from the machine side.
NUMBER SEARCH First, a number from O001 to O255 is given to each part program as the
SIGNAL (INPUT) PN0 work piece number using address 0. Input the PN0 to PN7 signals from
the machine side in accordance with the table 12.6.
TO PN7 <G009>
Table 12.6
Workpiece No. PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
Not searched
0001 Ę
0002 Ę
0003 Ę Ę
: : : : : : : : :
: : : : : : : : :
0254 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
0255 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Ę : Contacts closed
: Contacts opened
When the cycle start signal ST[12.1] is input in the reset state, a program
with program number specified with PN0 to PN7 is searched and the
program is executed from the beginning.
Power Mate
PN0
PN1
PN2
L L
PN7
+24V
298
NOTE
1 This function can be used only at automatic operation.
2 Always select the program number from O001 to O255.
3 Program numbers from O001 to O255 can be used.
However, programs corresponding to all the program
numbers do not have to be stored in memory.
4 When a program corresponding to the set program number
is not stored in memory, an alarm (No. 59) is generated
when the start button is pressed.
5 Program search is performed only when the start button is
pressed in the reset state. When the control unit is in the
feed stop state (single block stop, etc.) or feed hold state,
program search is not performed even if the start button is
pressed and execution is started from the point specified by
the present execution pointer.
6 To restart program from halfway, press start button after
sequence number search in AUTO mode. The external
program number search is not performed and program
execution starts from the block which is searched by
sequence number search, because the OP signal outputs
by sequence number search in AUTO mode and the NC
reset state is released.
7 When the start button is pressed with all PN0 to PN7 open,
program search is not performed but execution is started
from the point specified by the present execution pointer.
To restart operation from a point within a program or from the
start of a program which cannot be searched by this
function, perform the usual sequence number search or
program number search operation (MDI panel operation),
the turn off (open) all the PN0 to PN7 and press the start
button.
299
12.7 When the machine lock signal MLK turns to “1”, operation is controlled
and the moving command does not output to the servo whatever in
MACHINE LOCK manual or automatic operation. The program continues to execute,
SIGNAL (INPUT) MLK performing all operations except the output of servo commands. The
<G044#1> modal G codes and the position display are updated. This function is used
to check the program, and is only performed for move commands. M
function is executed normally, and the FIN signal is sent to the CNC.
When the MLK signal turns to “1”, then “0”, during pulse distribution,
it is enabled immediately. The machine axes’ movement are accelerated
(“1”) and decelerated (“0”) by the signal changes.
When the MLK signal turns to “1” and automatic reference position return
(G28) is commanded, positioning command value is displayed on the
CRT but reference position return distance is not shown. (Fig. 12.7)
Command
speed
MLK MLK
“0” “1”
Machine
movement
Position
display
Fig.12.7
12.8 This signal is enabled in the MEM mode.

SINGLE BLOCK When the single block signal SBK turns to “1” during automatic
operation, operation stops at the end of the executing block and the cycle
SIGNAL (INPUT) SBK start lamp signal STL [12.3] turns to “0”, but the feed hold lamp signal
<G046#1> ST [12.1] SPL [12.4] does not turn to “1”. Each time the cycle start signal
is input thereafter, the program for one block is read from memory and its
commands are executed. Operation can be switched to INC or JOG by
the mode select signal under single block stop state.
When the SBK signal turns to “0”, normal automatic operation is
performed.
300
12.9 (Function)
This signal selects the dry run to set the feedrate of automatic
DRY RUN SIGNAL operation to the dry run speed set by a parameter (No.1410)
(INPUT) DRN instead of a command value .
<G046#7 > (Operation)
When this signal turns to “1”:
(1) In a dry run of automatic operation, rather than using a cutting
feedrate specified by a program, the CNC uses the value obtained by
applying the manual feedrate override to the dry speed set by
parameter No. 1410. The acceleration/deceleration time constant
remains that for the cutting feed. If rapid traverse selection signal
RT[7.3] remains “1”, the tool is fed at the maximum cutting feedrate.
(2) The rapid traverse in automatic operation is also set to the dry run
speed by parameter RDR (No.1401#6). If rapid traverse selection
signal RT is also “1”, the axis is fed at rapid traverse as before.
When RT is low, the time constant for manual continuous feed is
employed as the acceleration/deceleration time constant during the
dry run The time constant for rapid traverse is used when RT is high.
(3) If this signal changed during the travel, the axis decelerates to a stop
before accelerating to the specified feed rate.
12.10 (Function)
These signals override the cutting feedrate. Eight binary code
FEED RATE signals correspond to override values as follows:
OVERRIDE SIGNAL 7
(INPUT) *FV0 TO *FV7 Override value + ȍ | 2i Vi | %
<G012> i +0
Vi=0 when *FVi is “1” and Vi=1 when *FVi is “0”
These signals have the following weight.
*FV0 : 1%, *FV1 : 2%, *FV2 : 4%, *FV3 : 8%
*FV4 : 16%, *FV5 : 32%, *FV6 : 64%, *FV7 : 128 %
When all signals are “0”, they are regarded as overriding 0% in
the same way as when all signals are “1”.
Thus, the override is selectable in steps over a range of 0 to
254%.
(Operation)
Actual feedrate is obtained by multiplying the speed specified
in cutting feed in automatic operation mode by the override
value selected by this signal.
The override is regarded as 100%, regardless of this signal, in
the following cases:
D Override cancel signal OVC [12.1] is ”1”.
12.11 Feedrate override is fixed to 100% while this signal is “1” (See Sec.12.1).
This signal does not effect rapid traverse override. The feedrate override
OVERRIDE CANCEL is effective when this signal is “0”.
SIGNAL (INPUT) OVC
<G006#4>
301
12.12 This signal is effective during automatic operation. Setting the BDT1 -
9 to “1” ignores information read after the appropriate code is sent, until
OPTIONAL BLOCK the end of block code (EOB code). The code for each signal is shown
SKIP SIGNAL (INPUT) below, and Figs 12.12 (a) - (d) show examples
BDT (BDT1), Input signal Heading code ignored
BDT2-BDT9 BDT(BDT1) /a letter or /1 (Note)
<G044#0,G045> BDT2 /2
BDT3 /3
BDT4 /4
BDT5 /5
BDT6 /6
BDT7 /7
BDT8 /8
BDT9 /9
NOTE
BDT1 includes a conventional BDT function. Setting BDT1
to “1” ignores the block to be read when the slash code is
followed by a letter.
EOB code Slash EOB code
F;/ N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FFFF , N 7 8 ; FF
Ignored
Fig.12.12 (a) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored Data
NOTE
Setting the BDT1 - 9 to “1” when a block including a slash
code is already being read does not ignore that block,
because the BDT signal only becomes “1” after the slash
code is read.
FF ; / 3 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FF ; N 7 8 FF ; / 3 N 9 0 1 Z 1 2F ;
BDT3 ON
OFF Not ignored Ignored
Fig.12.12 (b) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored Data
302
NOTE
Setting the BDT1 - 9 to “1” when a block including a slash
code is already being read does not ignore that block,
because the BDT signal only becomes “1” after the slash
code is read.
FF ; / 2 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 FF ; N 7 8 FF ; / 2 N 9 0 1 Z 1 2 FF ;
OFF
BDT2 ON
Ignored Not ignored
Fig.12.12 (c) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored Data
NOTE
When a block includes more than one slash code, matching
even one corresponding BDT ignores the entire block.
FF ; /2 / 3 / 4 / 5 N 1 2 3 X 5 6 F F F ; / 2 N 1 2 4 X 3 6FF ;
ON
BDT3
Ignored Not ignored
Fig.12.12 (d) An Optional Block Skip Signal and Ignored Data
303
12.13 When the MIn (n:1 to 6) signal turns to “1”, the algebraical sign of the axis
command value in MEM mode is inverted. This function is not available
MIRROR IMAGE in JOG mode or for the movement between intermediate position and
SIGNAL (INPUT) MIn reference position given by the G28 automatic reference position return.
<G106> The mirror image signal can be turned to “1” in the following cases:
(1) During offset cancel;
(2) When the CNC is in the automatic operation stop state and not in the
feed hold state (See Sec.12.1).
X
B
A
B’
Z
0
When MI1 signal turned to “1” at point A
Fig.12.13 Mirror image
304
13. SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE (OUTPUT) CUT <F002#6>
SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE (OUTPUT)
13 CUT <F002#6>
This signal is displayed during movement in cutting mode.

[Signal] CUT
[Function] Signal in cutting mode
1 : Signal is output during movement in cutting mode.
0 : Signal is output when stopped, during movement in rapid
traverse mode, and during manual mode.
NOTE
If interlock *IT [8.1] or *RILK [8.1] is applied during
movement in cutting mode, the signal becomes 1.
305
14. SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT)
DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 <F254 #0 TO #2> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
SCREEN STATE SIGNALS (OUTPUT) DPL0, DPL1, DPL2
14 <F254 #0 TO #2>
The screen state signals make up a 3–bit code signal for indicating the
DPL/MDI screen state.
DPL2 DPL1 DPL0 Screen State
0 0 0 Position display
0 0 1 Program
0 1 0 Offset/Macro variables/Setting
0 1 1 Parameter/Diagnose
1 0 0 Alarm/Message
306
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
15 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION
307
15. MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
15.1
M FUNCTION
15.1.1
M Function at 1–path
Control Mode
Miscellaneous function When address M followed by an 8-digit number is commanded in the

code signal M00-M31 MEM mode, the 8-digit number is sent by binary code. When the time
<F010 to F013> set by parameter no.3010 (TMF .... standard setting 80 msec) has elapsed
Miscellaneous function after code signal output, the MF signal turns to “1”. Read the M code
strobe signal signal and perform the corresponding operation. After the operation
MF<F007#0> specified by the M function is finished, turn the finish signal FIN to “1”.
When FIN turns to “1”, and the time set by parameter no.3011 (TFIN .....
Complete signal
standard setting 80 msec) has elapsed, the MF signal turns to “0”. The
FIN<G004#3> FIN signal turns to “0” after MF turns to “0”, all the M code signals turn
to “0” and the CNC advances to the next block. When there is a move
command in the same block, the CNC advances to the next block after the
end of the move command.
When there is a move command and an M function command in the same
block, the M function command is sent concurrently with the move
operation. To perform an M function operation after a move operation,
gate the distribution end signal DEN at the machine side. See section 15.2
for a description of the distribution end signal.
NOTE
1 M codes are buffered, except for M00, M01, M02, and M30.
2 M98 and M99 (subprogram call and end) are not sent to the
machine side.
3 For M00, M01, M02 and M30 only, M code and MF signals
are sent; the control of these signals shall be designed on
the Poower Mate side.
4 When the automatic operation is stopped by M02 or M30,
it is necessary to send the external reset signal from the
machine side to the CNC, instead of the FIN signal, When
the external reset signal is returned against the M02 or M30,
the control returns to the top of the program recently
executed and enters the reset state. When the FIN signal
is returned, the control returns to the beginning of the
program recently executed and executes it from the top..
5 M800 to M899 are reserved by the simultaneous block start
function.
308
The code signal, read signal, and finish signal timing is shown below:
M command read Next command read
M code signal
M00 to M31
MF
FIN
TMF
TFIN
DEN
TMF, TFIN are set by parameter.
TMF (no. 3010) : 16 to 256msec (8msec steps)
TFIN (no. 3011) : 16 to 256msec (8msec steps)
Fig.15.1.1 (a) When There Is No Move Command
M command read Next command read

M code signal
M0 to M31
MF
FIN
Move operation
DEN
TMF TFIN
Fig.15.1.1 (b) When There is a Move Command in the Same

Block
High–speed M/S/T The interface between PLC to Power Mate is controlled using this signal,
interface signal (input) allowing high-speed processing of M function.
MFIN <G005#0> When MF and MFIN ststes are opposed, the Power Mate assumes that an
M code is being issued, and waits until the signal states are identical (the
PLC switches MFIN). When the same state is reached, the M function is
completed and the Power Mate shifts to the next block.
When the status of bits indicating M function end MFINand the code
output end MF are different, the Power Mate is placed in the state in which
the M command is transmitted. The PLC then switches the end signal sfter
machine tool processing, so that the bit status indicates M function end,
and the Power Mate status indicates all M function processes are
complete.
For example, when a 2-block M command continues:
309
M command
M code
MF
MFIN
15.1.2
M Code in Multipath Miscellaneous function binary code signals (output)
Mode EM11 α to EM28 α <F132, F135, F138, F141, F230, F233>
Miscellaneous function strobe signals (output)
EMF α <F131#0, F134#0, F137#0, F140#0, F229#0, F232#0>
Miscellaneous function end signals (input)
EFIN α <G142#0, G154#0, G166#0, G178#0, G226#0, G238#0>
Miscellaneous function executing signals (output)
EDEN α <F130#3, F133#3, F136#3, F139#3, F228#3, F231#3>D
Group M code MF FIN DEN
Axis 1 EM11A–EM28A EMFA EFINA EDENA

(F132) (F131#0) (G142#0) (F130#3)
Axis 2 EM11B–EM28B EMFB EFINB EDENB

(F135) (F134#0) (G154#0) (F133#3)
Axis 3 EM11C–EM28C EMFC EFINC EDENC

(F138) (F137#0) (G166#0) (F136#3)
Axis 4 EM11D–EM28D EMFD EFIND EDEND

(F141) (F140#0) (G178#0) (F139#3)
Axis 5 EM11E–EM28E EMFE EFINE EDENE

(F230) (F229#0) (G226#0) (F228#3)
Axis 6 EM11F–EM28F EMFF EFINF EDENF

(F233) (F232#0) (G238#0) (F231#3)
NOTE
α indicates B, C, D, E or F.
310
Explanations As the M function interface in the multipath mode, the PMC axis control
interface is used. This interface is provided for each axis, and areas for up
to six paths are available.
As the interface address of the M function used for each path, the interface
for the axis that appears first in the list of the axes belonging to a path
defined in the block (G130P ...) of a multipath command is used.
Example: First axis X
Second axis Y
Third axis Z
Fourth axis U
When the axes are set as above:
G130 P1 X1 Y1 ;
M10 ; ← The interface for the axis that appears first in the
list of the axes for path 1, namely, the X–axis (first
. axis), is used.
.
G130 P2 Z1 U1 ;
M20: ← The interface for the axis that appears first in the
list of the axes for path 2, namely, the Z–axis (third
axis), is used.
NOTE
The restrictions below are imposed on the M codes in the
multipath mode:
D The M code values ranging from 0 to 255 can be used.
D Specify only one M code in a block.
D The auxiliary function lock signal (AFL) is disabled.
D Control using system variable #3003 over waiting for the
auxiliary function complete signal is disabled.
D DM00, DM01, DM02, and DM30 are not output. When
M00, M01, M02, or M30 is specified, a code only is output
as with ordinary M codes.
D By setting both of bit 7 of parameter No. 8003 and bit 7
of parameter No. 3001 to 0, strobe and complete signal
transfer based on the M codes can be performed at high
speed.
311
15.2 When an M function is commanded in the MEM or MDI mode, and axial
movement ends but the FIN signal for the M command is not issued, the
DISTRIBUTION END distribution end signal DEN turns to “1”. The DEN turns to “1” until the
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) FIN signal for the M command is issued even in the block in which no
DEN <F001#3> axial movement exists. When the operation ends by arrival of the FIN
signal for the M function, the DEN signal turns to “0”. Use this signal
to discriminate between simultaneous execution of an auxiliary (M)
function with the start of movement, and execution after the end of
movement when an auxiliary function and move command are specified
in the same block.
Fig.15.2 shows the time chart of this signal.
Auxiliary function is not Auxiliary function is Auxiliary function is included

included included
Commad
MF
FIN
Feedrate
Axis
move
DEN
Not output because FIN
DEN is not output Output because FIN is not
already returned
yet returned at this point
Fig.15.2 Distribution End Signal and Other Signals
312
15.3 Power Mate sends M decode signals DM00, DM01, DM02, DM30 to
PMC in parallel with code signals M00, M01, M02, and M30.
M DECODE SIGNALS
The in-position condition applies to these decode signals; they are sent
(OUTPUT) DM00, after the positioning has been completed when the move command is
DM01, DM02, DM30 specified in the same block. They are not sent if the FIN signal returns
<F009#7, #6, #5, #4> before the positioning ends.
The signal output timing is the same as in the binary code signal of normal
M function.
For details, refer to section 15.1. Use DM02 or DM30 as a reset or reset
& rewind function. DM00 and DM01 are employable as the program stop
and optional stop, respectively.
The finish signal FIN of M00 and M01 shall turn to “1” when the operator
presses the cycle start button in this method.
Positioning in next block
X, Y X, Y
Output transistor
ON
ZPZ/EF
FIN
Machine side contact close
TFIN Machine side operation
Fig.15.3 Time Chart for External Operation Function Signal
15.4 If this signal is turned ”1”, binary code signals and M read command
signal is not output, even when executing M function block.
AUXILIARY
FUNCTION LOCK NOTE
SIGNAL (INPUT) AFL 1 Internal processing of M98 and M99 is done, regardless of
<G005#6> the AFL signal.
2 M00, M01, M02, and M03 are output even if the AFL signal
is “1”.
313
15.5 (1) OUTLINE

This function allows for easier waiting for other machines and
WAITING FUNCTION peripheral equipment through the specially prepared M code.
(OUTPUT) WAT1 TO (2) SPECIFICATIONS
WAT4 <F209#0 TO Waiting M code: M801 - M815
#3>, (INPUT) WFN1 When the waiting M code is specified, a corresponding signal (WAT1
- WAT4) is output. Furthermore, that block waits for the
TO WFN4 <G214#0 corresponding complete signal (WFN1 - WFN4) to be input before
TO #3> starting operation.
Command mode
N__ M8ĘĘ G__X___F___ ;

M8ĘĘ: Waiting M code
(M801 - M815)
Table 15.5 Waiting M Code and Input and Output Signal

Complete input signal
Output signal
M code condition
WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1 WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1
M801 0 0 0 1 1
M802 0 0 1 0 1
M803 0 0 1 1 1 1
M804 0 1 0 0 1
M805 0 1 0 1 1 1
M806 0 1 1 0 1 1
M807 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
M808 1 0 0 0 1
M809 1 0 0 1 1 1
M810 1 0 1 0 1 1
M811 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
M812 1 1 0 0 1 1
M813 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
M814 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
M815 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
: either 0 or 1 is acceptable.
314
Waiting M code Waiting M code Block Nn3

Nn1M8ĘĘ command Nn2M8ĘĘ command execution that
does not include
Nn1 axis movement Nn1 axis movement Nn2 axis movement waiting M code.
command execution wait command execution command execution
Block
execution
TWB (NOTE 2)
Output signal
(WAT1 - WAT4)
Complete input
signal (WFN1 - WFN4) (NOTE 1)
Fig.15.5 (a) Block Operation Including Waiting Signal M Code
NOTE
1 As shown in Table 2 when the waiting M code is specified,
the output signal (WAT1 - WAT4) is turned ”1” and when the
complete input signal condition is satisfied everything is
turned ”0”.
Note however that when the waiting M code is specified and
the corresponding complete input signal condition is
already satisfied, the access movement command is
executed without delay, just the same as if the waiting signal
M code command had not been issued. In this kind of case,
the output signal (WAT1 - WAT4) is never turned ”1”.
2 As shown in Fig.15.5 (a), when the waiting M code
specification is carried out by continuous block, if the
complete input signal of the previous block cannot be turned
”0” between TWB it is possible that the it will be taken as the
complete input signal of the waiting M code specified by the
next block and therefore a combination of appropriate M
codes should be selected.
3 Example of waiting M code continuous command
Fig.15.5 (b), (c) show examples of subsequent block axis
movement commands that are executed continuously and
the waiting condition when the waiting M code is specified
by continuous block.
315
M803 command block M801 command block
Waiting condition Execution Execution

Block execution
Output signal WAT1 Not output

WAT2
Complete input signal WFN1

WFN2
Fig.15.5 (b) An Example of a Subsequent Block Axis

Movement Command Being Continuously Executed
M801 command block M803 command block
Waiting condition Execution Waiting condition Execution

Block execution
Output signal WAT1

WAT2
Complete input signal WFN1

WFN2
Fig.15.5 (c) An Example of a Subsequent Block Axis Movement Command Not Being Continuously
Executed
(3) SIGNAL
(a) Address Map
PMC ³ CNC 1 DI signal
PMC
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G214 WFN4 WFN3 WFN2 WFN1
2 DO signal
PMC
ADDRESS #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F209 WAT4 WAT3 WAT2 WAT1
: This signal is unrelated to this function.
316
15.6 This function can be used to simultaneously start blocks on up to four

Power Mates.
SIMULTANEOUS
Synchronous M codes : M821 to M827
BLOCK START (M821 When a synchronous M code is issued for the master unit, operation waits
TO M827) until the corresponding M codes are issued for the slave units. The Power
Mate unit handles synchronous M codes. They do not need to be
processed in the PMC.
Instruction format
N__ M82X G__X__Y__F__ ;

M82X: Synchronous M code (M821 to M827)
Table.15.6 Synchronous M Codes
Slave One unit

Two units
nits Three units
nits
Master #0 #1 #2 #3
#1, #2 #1, #3 #2, #3 #1, #2, #3
#0 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827
#0, #2 #0, #3 #2, #3 #0, #2, #3
#1 M821 M824 M822
M825 M823 M826 M827
#0, #1 #0, #3 #1, #3 #0, #1, #3
#2 M822 M821 M824
M823 M826 M825 M827
#0, #1 #0, #2 #1, #2 #0, #1, #2
#3 M824 M822 M821
M826 M825 M823 M827
Example 1 When simultaneous block start is performed for units #0 and #1

Specify M824 for #0.
Example 2 When simultaneous block start is performed for units #0, #1, and #2
Program example (simultaneous block start of units #0 and #1)
Program for unit #0 Program for unit #1
· · ·
· ·
· ·
M824 ·
G01 X __ Y__ F__ ; M821
· G01 A__ B__ F__ ;
· ·
· ·
·
M82X codes cause units to wait for each other before starting operation.
Blocks and will start simultaneously with the interpolation level.
In other words, if a feedrate F is set accurately, operation will be the same
as with simultaneous 4-axis interpolation. However, in this case, the
servo gain and time constants need to be the same.
317
NOTE
The axes used for simultaneous block start are fixed. They
are determined by the way cables are connected and by
specifications within the program. The axes used cannot be
changed partway through the program.
Examples When simultaneous block start is performed for the first and second units,
it cannot later be performed for the first and third units.
If this is attempted, operation such as the following may occur.
#0 #1 #2
· · ·
· · ·
· · ·
· · ·
M824 X30. Y20. · ·
· M821 A40. B15. ·
· · M822 Z50.
· · ·
M822 X50 · ·
· · ·
·
Blocks and are started simultaneously and an attempt is made to

start blocks and simultaneously. However, in the case that block
is already being executed before block and , block will be
started simultaneously with block .
(1) Basic connection
Power Mates are connected with a CRT/MDI serial link. A CRT/MDI
does not necessarily need to be connected.
CRT/MDI unit
CRT/MDI serial link
Power Mate–H Power Mate–H Power Mate–H Power Mate–H
#0 #1 #2 #3
(2) Groups
With one CRT link, simultaneous block start can be performed for up
to four Power Mates. For five or more Power Mates, contact FANUC.
318
CRT #0 #1 #2 #3
(3) Terminal unit

A terminal unit must be connected to the last Power Mate in CRT link.
When no CRT/MDI unit is connected, install a terminal unit in the
first Power Mate also.
Last of
CRT/MDI
Power Mate
(Built–in terminal Terminal unit

unit)
(4) Unit numbers

Unit numbers in groups are set from the first connected unit in order
as 0, 1, 2....
The unit numbers are set with the rotary switch (RSW) on the front
of the control section.
(5) Parameter
6650 MATR SYNC
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SYNC 1 : Synchronize interpolation reference signals.
(Set to 1 when performing simultaneous block start.)
0 : Do not synchronize interpolation reference signals.
MATR 1 : Make this the master unit during synchronization of
interpolation reference signals.
0 : Make this the slave unit during synchronization of
interpolation reference signals.
When simultaneous block start is performed, one unit in a link
is the master unit and the rest are slave units. Power Mate
whose unit number is #0 is made the master unit.
NOTE
The system will not startup if there is no master or there is
more than one.
In this case, the following operation can be performed to set

which unit is the master and which units are slaves.
Turn on the power while holding down the [.] and [M] key to
make a unit a master (SYNC = 1, MATR = 1).
Turn on the power while holding down the [.] and [S] key to
make a unit a slave (SYNC = 1, MATR = 0).
319
16. PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE
FUNCTION (OUTPUT) PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
16 PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE FUNCTION (OUTPUT)
320
16. PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE FUNCTION (OUTPUT)
The DPL/MDI key input status is output to the PMC.
NOTE
When three keys or more are pushed at the same time, the
key data cannot be connectly read.
Signal name Key Signal name Key Signal name Key Signal name Key
K0 . . . . . . KPRD . . KPOS . . KN . . . . .
<F210#0> <F211#3> <F213#0> <F217#1>
0 . POS N
K1 . . . . . . KNO . . . . & @ KPRG . . KG . . . . .

<F210#1> <F211#4> No. <F213#1> <F217#2>
1 PRGRM G
K2 . . . . . . KSLH . . . KVAR . . . MENU KR . . . . . R

<F210#2> <F211#5> <F213#2> VAR <F217#3> K
2 /
K3 . . . . . . KEOB . . KPRM . . DGNOS KX . . . . . X

<F210#3> <F211#6> <F213#3> PARAM <F217#4> AXIS
3 EOB
K4 . . . . . . KCAN . . KALM . . . OPR KF . . . . .

<F210#4> <F211#7> <F213#5> ALARM <F218#3>
4 CAN F
K5 . . . . . . KALT . . . KDWN . . KM . . . . .
<F210#5> <F212#0> <F214#0> <F218#4>
5 ALTER ± M
K6 . . . . . . KINS . . . KUP . . . . KS . . . . .
<F210#6> <F212#1> <F214#1> <F218#5>
6 INSRT ° S
K7 . . . . . . KDLT . . . KP . . . . . P KT . . . . .
<F210#7> <F212#2> <F214#4> I <F218#6>
7 DELET T
K8 . . . . . . KINP . . . KQ . . . . . Q KSHRP .
<F211#0> <F212#3> <F214#5> J <F218#7>
8 INPUT #
K9 . . . . . . KWRT . . KH . . . . .
<F211#1> <F212#4> <F214#6>
9 WRITE H
KMNS . . KRED . . KO . . . . .
<F211#2> <F212#6> <F217#0>
–/+ READ O
[Function] 1 : The key is pressed.

0 : The key is not pressed.
321
17. SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL
SETTING (INPUT) +LMn <G110>,
–LMn <G112> RLSOT<G007#7> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING (INPUT)
17 +LMn <G110>, –LMn <G112>, RLSOT <G007#7>
If the tool end is aligned with the end of limit area while replacing the tool,
pressing the setting button will rewrite parameter Nos. 1320 and 1321 and
supply the machine’s current position (coordinates) as the software limit.
These signals are prepared for each axis and direction. The limit release
signal, which is common to all axes, cancels the original software limit
and institutes a new limit.
+LMn . . . . . : Soft limit setting signal to + direction of all axes
(n : 1 to 6)
–LMn . . . . . . : Soft limit setting signal to – direction of all axes
(n : 1 to 6)
RLSOT : Soft limit release signal
322
18. SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP,
SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4<X000#7, #0, #1, #2>
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <x1000#7, #0, #1, #2>SKIPP <G212#7>
SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4
18 <X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <X1000#7, #0, #1, #2> SKIPP <G212#7>
If the skip signal SKIP is input from the machine side during move
command execution in G31 or if a skip signal (SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3,
SKIP4) which is effective for the number commanded by P is input from
the machine side during the execution of a block for which address P has
been commanded subsequently to G31, the coordinate values at the
moment of startup of that signal are stored in custom macro variables, the
block being executed ends at that moment and the next block is proceeded
to.
The coordinate values stored in the Power Mate are used as called by the
custom macro instruction. This function is used in the following cases.
(1) The moment of machining end is given by a signal from the machine
side instead of being programmed like in grinding.
(2) The work dimension is calculated by the custom macro instruction by
moving the machine in the G31 mode, measuring the coordinate
values at that moment by the signal from the detection sensor and
storing them in the Power Mate in order to measure the dimension of
a work, etc. configuration.
Skip signals SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4 assume the skip state at
contact close. Skip signal SKIPP is the signal to skip in ladder program.
+24V
SKIP
SKIP
Skip signal
SKIP2
Power Mate Skip signal 2
SKIP3
Skip signal 3
SKIP4
Skip signal 4
Fig.18 Connection of Signal SKIP
323
18. SKIP SIGNALS (INPUT) SKIP,
SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4<X000#7, #0, #1, #2>
<x1000#7, #0, #1, #2>SKIPP <G212#7> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
NOTE
1 The G31 block unconditionally assumes the G01 mode.
The feed rate becomes the value specified by the F code.
2 If measuring using signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4,
the feed rate must be programmed to be constant.
Measuring errors become lange if the feed rate is different.
The measuring error when the feed rate is constant is
shown below.
ERRmax + Fm 1 4
60 1000
ERRmax : Measuring error [mm or inch]

Fm : Measuring feedrate [mm/min or inch/min]
3 The surpassing amount after signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3

and SKIP4 rises is shown below.
1 T T
Qmax + Fm ( 12 ) C ) S )
60 1000 1000 1000
Qmax : Surpassing amount [mm or inch]

Fm : Measuring rate [mm/min or inch/min]
Tc : Cutting time constant [msec]
Ts : Servo time constant, normally Ts=33 msec
4 The signal width of signal SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4

must be a minimum of 10 msec.
5 SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3 and SKIP4 are read directly by the
Power Mate from the machine side.
6 If not using the skip function (G31), the signal terminal
corresponding to SKIP, SKP2, SKP3 is available in the PMC
as the general-purpose input signal.
7 SKIPP is the skip signal used in a ladder program. For
example, when a workpiece whose length is unknown is to
be drilled, this signal can be used in combination with the
torque limit signals [26].
8 Bit 3 (BIO) of parameter No. 3001 specifies whether the
SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, and SKIP4 signals are to be entered
from the built–in I/O card or through the FANUC I/O link from
the I/O card or I/O unit. When the signals are supplied from
the built–in I/O card, bits 0 (BSKP), 4 (BSKP2), and 5
(BSKP3) of parameter No. 3005 must also be specified.
Moreover, using SKIP4 requires bit 7 of parameter No. 3005
(SKIP4) to be set regardless of whether the built–in I/O card,
I/O card, or I/O unit is used.
324
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 19. MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED
19 MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED
325
19. MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
19.1 These signals prevent the servo motors from overload when the axes are
clamped under certain conditions.
SERVO OFF SIGNAL
When one of these signals turns to “1”, the servo motor is turned off. The
(INPUT) SVFn <G126> mechanical clamp is done by using the auxiliary function. Set the timing
for the auxiliary function, mechanical clamp and servo off signals as
shown in the diagram below. The clamp command auxiliary function
should be executed only after the distribution end signal (DEN[15.2]) has
been sent.
Clamp command Unclamp command

MF
Machine
clamp
Servo off state
SVF1,…
MFIN
19.2 When the signals SVFn [19.1] is turned to “1”, the servo is turned off.
Since the positioning control does not function under this condition, an
FOLLOW-UP SIGNAL error is produced if the machine tool moves. To compensate for the
(INPUT) *FLWU erroneous movement, there are two remedies, depending upon the status
<G007#5> of the *FLWU signal.
(1) When *FLWU is “1”, the servo error amount is recorded on the error
counter. When the servo off signal is reset, the machine tool will
move to cancel the error.
(2) When *FLWU is “0”, the follow-up function is engaged. The present
position of the Power Mate is changed to reset the error counter to
zero. The machine tool remains in a deviated position.
Follow-up functions must be used during emergency stop or a servo
alarm.
19.3 This outputs to PMC whether or not the checked amount of servo position
deviation exceeds the value set to parameter.
SERVO POSITION
[Signal] SVERn (n : 1 to 6)
DEVIATION MONITOR
[Function] Servo position deviation monitor signal
SIGNAL (OUTPUT) 1 : The amount of servo position deviation exceeds the
SVERn, <F220#3 TO checked value.
F225#3> 0 : The amount of servo position deviation does not exceed
the checked value.
Combine with the torque limit [26] and come by the
specification.
326
20. I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE CONTROL FUNCTION
20 I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL CONTROL FUNCTION
(1) General
The part program, parameter, variable, diagnose data
registering/outputting operation by the I/O device is possible using
external signals. This operation is processed in the background.
Machine
Power Servo motor
Mate
Foreground execution
EXRD RPBSY
EXWT RPALM
EXSTP BGEACT External input/output
machine
Background execution
Fig.20 (a) I/O Device External Control Function
(2) SPECIFICATIONS
(a) External Read Start Signal (input) EXRD <G058#1>
D This signal begins an operation whereby part programs are read
from input machines and stored on tape memories.
D If this signal is turned ON the Power Mate operates in the
following way.
1 It reads and loads part programs from input machines as a
background editing operation.
2 A choice can be made by parameter whether all input
program are loaded at once or just a single program.
(Parameter No.3201#1)
It is possible to specify by parameter whether unprotected
programs should be deleted before loading begins.
(Parameter No.3201#0)
3 The RPBSY signal switches ON while loading and
read/punch is in operation.
4 Operation is brought to a halt if there is a reset (ERS
<G008#7>) while the program is being read, or if the external
read/punch stop signal EXSTP is switched ON.
5 When the read/punch interface is already being used in the
foreground, the external read start signal EXRD is ignored.
(While being input into tape etc.)
327
CONTROL FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
(b) External Punch Start Signal (input) EXWT <G058#3>

D This signal starts the outputting to the part program output
machine.
following way.
1 It always outputs all programs into the output machine as a
background editing operation.
2 The RPBSY signal switches ON while program output and
read/punch is in operation.
3 Operation is brought to a halt if there is a reset while the
program is being output, or if the external read/punch stop
signal EXSTP is switched ON.
(c) External Read/Punch Stop Signal (input) EXSTP <G058#2>
D This signal forcefully stops loading and outputting of part
programs.
following way.
1 It ends loading and outputting operations of part programs in
the background immediately.
(d) Signal During External Read/Punch (output) RPBSY <F053#2>
D It communicates the fact that part program is being loaded and
output in the background.
D This signal is switched ON when Power Mate is as follows.
1 Having received the external read signal or the external
punch signal and while part program is being loaded or
output.
D This signal is switched OFF when Power Mate is as follows.
1 When part program is being loaded by external read signal or
external punch signal or when outputting has finished. This
signal is turned OFF after normal ending, forced ending by
resetting or forced ending by external read/punch stop signal
EXSTP.
(e) External Read/Punch Alarm (output) RPALM <F053#3>
D It communicates the fact that an alarm has gone off while a part
program is being loaded or being output.
punch signal and an alarm rings when a part program is being
loaded or during outputting.
1 When the reset or the external read/punch stop signal is input.
(f) Background Execution (output) BGEACT <F053#4>
D It communicates the fact that a part program is being loaded or
being output in the background.
punch signal and while part program is being loaded or
output.
1 When part program is being loaded by external read signal or
external punch signal or when outputting has finished. This
signal is turned OFF after normal ending, forced ending by
resetting or forced ending by external read/punch stop signal
EXSTP.
328
(g) Program selection signal (input), EXPRG <G251#4>

D Function: Selects programs as I/O data.
D Inputting operation
1 Whether to enter a single program or all programs at a time from
the I/O device can be specified with bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No.
3201.
With bit 0 (RDL) of parameter No. 3201, the user can specify
whether to delete all programs that are not protected with bit 0
(NE8) or bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202, before starting
registration. Note, however, that the program currently being
executed and the program selected and displayed in the edit mode
on the program screen are not deleted.
Input condition:Set protection signal KEY3 to 1 (or set KEY1 to
1 when the bit 7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 1).
D Outputting operation
1 All programs not protected by parameter setting are output.
NOTE
Program input or output operation can be automatically
selected by executing EXRD or EXWT without selecting
EPRG, EVAR, EPARM, and EDGN.
(h) Macro variable selection signal (input), EVAR <G251#5>

D Function: Selects macro variables as I/O data.
1 Macro variable data is input from the I/O device.
Input condition:Set protection signal KEY2 to 1 (only when bit
7 (KEY) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0).
NOTE
Macro variable data can be entered by background
processing using an external I/O device only in the data
output format specified with bit 2 (VFP) of parameter No.
6001 set to 1.
However, it is impossible to input or output an absolute value

exceeding 99999999. When VFP (bit 2 of parameter No.
6001) = 1, the required tape format is as follows:
P# macro variable number Q data ;
where
P# : A three–digit number that follows P# is a macro
variable number.
Q : A value that follows Q is data (a decimal point
can be included).
Space : Blank data
0 : Data 0 or overflow/ underflow data
Example)
%;
P#500 Q0;
P#501 Q1.000;
P#502 Q10000000.;
P#503 Q–0.0000001;
P#504 Q0;
P#505 Q;
...
%
329
1 A specified number of data items are output to the I/O device,
starting with a specified number, in the order #100 to #199 and
#500 to #699.
Specify a macro variable output start number in EDG0 to EDG15,
and specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to END15.
Data output is not started if the start number specified in EDG0 to
EDG15 is out of the ranges 100 to 199 and 500 to 699, or the
number of data items specified in EDN0 to EDN15 is 0. If a set
value is out of a specifiable range, data output is stopped.
(i) Parameter selection signal (input), EPARM <G251#6>
D Function: Selects parameters as I/O data.
1 Parameters are input from the I/O device.
Input condition: Set the setting parameter (PWE) to 1.
1 All parameters are output.
Parameter data
N parameter number A1 P data A2 P data ;
where
N : A value that follows N is a parameter No.
A : A value that follows A is an axis number (for axis
type parameter only).
A1 = first axis; A2 = second axis;
P : A number that follows P is data.
Example)
%;
N1020 A1 P88 A2 P89;
...
%
(j) Diagnose selection signal (input), EDGN <G251#7>
D Function: Selects diagnostic data as I/O data.
1 Diagnostic data is input from the I/O device.
NOTE
Diagnostic data can be loaded into the PMC nonvolatile
memory and internal memory areas, D0000 to D1859 and
R0000 to R0999 only.
1 A specified number of data items are output in ascending order of
data numbers to the I/O device, starting with a specified number.
Specify a diagnostic data output start number in EDG0 to EDG15,
and specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to END15.
Data output is not started if the start number specified in EDG0 to
EDG15 is out of the range of data numbers, or the number of data
items specified in EDN0 to EDN15 is 0. If a set value is out of the
specifiable range, data output is stopped.
N data number P data ;
where
N : A value that follows N is a sum of an address
number and a value determined for each address.
The data number can range from N20000 to
N49999.
330
data number = value determined for each address +

address number
P : A value that follows P is data. The data depends
on each data type when it is diagnose data.
If the data is PMC data, a value that follows P is
an eight–digit decimal number. If a specified
data number has not been defined, the data that
follows P will not be output.
For axis–type diagnose data:
N data number A1 P data A2 Pdata;
where
A : A value that follows A is output as an axis
number. This applies only to axis–type diagnose
data.
A1 = first–axis data; A2 = second–axis data
For diagnostic data
0000 to 0999 20000+(diagnose number)
For PMC address
G0000 to 0255 21000+(G address number)
F0000 to 0255 23000+(F address number)
Y0000 to 0127 25000+(Y address number)
Y1000 to 1063
X0000 to 0127 27000+(X address number)
X1000 to 1063
A0000 to 0024 29000+(A address number)
R0000 to 0999, 30000+(R address number)
R9000 to 9099
T0000 to 0079 40000+(T address number)
K0000 to 0019 41000+(K address number)
C0000 to 0079 42000+(C address number)
D0000 to 1859 43000+(D address number)
NOTE
When diagnostic data is output, character data is not output
directly as ISO/EIA tape codes.
(k) Signals indicating the start number of data items to be output

(punched) (input), EDG00 to EDG15 <G252 to G253>
1 When diagnostic data or macro variable data is to be output,
specify a start data number in EDG00 to EDG15 by using a
16-bit binary code.
(l) Signals indicating the number of data items to be output
(punched) (input), EDN0 to EDN15 <G254 to G255>
1 When diagnostic data or macro variable data is to be output,
specify the number of output data items in EDN0 to EDN15
by using a 16-bit binary code.
Setting EDG0 to EDG15 0 to 65535
EDN0 to EDN15 1 to 65535
331
EXRD
EXSTP
PRBSY
BGEACT
Read start Read end Read start Read interruption Read start
Fig.20 (b) Part Program Loading Operation
EXWT
EXSTP
PRBSY
BGEACT
Punch start Punch end Punch start Punch interruption Punch start
Fig.20 (c) Part Program Outputting Operation
EXRD or EXWT
RPALM
PRBSY
BGEACT
Read/punch start Read/punch interruption Read/punch start
Fig.20 (d) When an External Read/Punch Alarm Occurs
332
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT
21 EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT
External pulse input interface selection signal (input) EPCON <G066#6>

External pulse input axis selection signal (input) HS1A, HS1B, HS1C
<G018#0, #1, #2>
Incremental feed signal (input) MP1, MP2 <G019#4, #5>
(a) Overview
The external pulse input function enables the servo motors of the
Power Mate to be driven by an external pulse.
It is possible to select either a single–phase or differential input as the
external pulse.
When the differential input type is used, a memory module with the
external pulse input function (differential type) is required.
(b) Operation
Power Mate
Weight factor Magnification

Differential 1, 10, M, N
4 Servo control
Single–phase Smoothing
1
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
ÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃÃ
JA12 (3, 4) JA12 (5 to 8)
External pulse External pulse EPCON HS1A, MP1,

generator generator HS1B, MP2,
(single–phase (differential HS1C, or or
input) input) parameter parameter
7710 7681,
7682
333
21. EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
1) Either a single–phase or differential input type can be selected as

the external pulse generator, according to the external pulse input
interface selection signal (EPCON).
2) An axis for which an external pulse is to be entered is selected
either by a DI or a parameter method. Which selection type to use
can be specified in bit 7 (EXH) of parameter No. 7670.
D DI method
³External pulse input axis selection signals HS1A, HS1B,
and HS1C
D Parameter method
³Parameter No. 7710
3) When a differential input type is used, the weight of the input
pulse is multiplied by 4 in the Power Mate.
4) It is possible to apply a magnification to the input pulse using a
DI or a parameter method. Which method to use can be specified
in bit 7 (EXH) of parameter No. 7670.
D DI method
³Incremental feed signals MP1 and MP2
D Parameter method
³The magnification can be selected from M and N.
N : Parameter No. 7681
M : Parameter No. 7682
5) It is possible to smooth the input pulse, if the parameter method
is used to select an axis and to set a magnification.
³Parameter No. 7701
(c) Conditions
1) This function works in the single–step feed mode (STEP) or
manual continuous feed mode (JOG).
2) The machine lock, interlock, and overtravel functions are valid
for axis movement by external pulses.
3) For axis movement by external pulses, exponential
acceleration/deceleration should be used, and the corresponding
time constant should be set in parameter No. 1624.
4) When a differential input type is used for the external pulse input
function, feed per rotation cannot be specified.
(d) Single–phase pulse input
The maximum allowable frequency is 3KHz.
Single–phase pulse input is selected.
334
HA
ÃÃ
T 14
ÃÃ T
HB
T 14 T 14
+direction pulse
–direction pulse
T>330 µsec
Inversion of direction
Fig.21 (a) Input pulse waveform
STEP or JOG mode

MD4, MD2, MD1
Single–phase pulse input is selected

EPCON=0
Specify X1, X10, XM, XN

MP2, MP1
+direction –direction
movement command pulse movement command pulse
External input pulse
HA
HB
+pulse
Count of
pulse in
Power Mate
–pulse
Fig.21 (b) Sequence
335
(e) Differential pulse input

The maximum allowable frequency of input signal is 100KHz.
(However this is multiplied 4times inside the power Mate)
+direction movement command pulse –direction movement command pulse
PA PA
*PA *PA
PB PB
*PB *PB
TP TP TP TP TP TP TP TP
TCYC TCYC
TP : Above 1.2µs or more

TCYC : Above 10µs or more
Fig.21 (c) Input pulse waveform
STEP or JOG mode

MD4, MD2, MD1
Single–phase pulse input is selected

EPCON
Specify X1, X10, XM, XN

MP2, MP1
+direction –direction
External input pulse movement command pulse movement command pulse
PA
PB
+ pulse
Count of
pulse in
Power Mate –pulse
Fig.21 (d) Sequence
(f) External pulse interface selection signal (input) EPCON <G066#6>

EPCON 1 : Differential–type external pulse is entered.
0 : Single–phase type external pulse is entered.
When not using the external pulse input function, set all of HS1A,
HS1B, and HS1C to ”0.”
336
(g) External pulse input axis selection signal (input) HS1A, HS1B,
HS1C <G018#0, #1, #2>
Axes are selected according to the setting of the HS1A, HS1B, and
HS1C, as listed below.
HS1C HS1B HS1A Moved axis
0 0 0 None
0 0 1 First axis
0 1 0 Second axis
0 1 1 Third axis
1 0 0 Fourth axis
1 0 1 Fifth axis
1 1 0 Sixth axis
Setting all of HS1A, HS1B, and HS1C to ”0” means that the external
pulse input function is not to be used.
(h) Incremental feed signal (input) MP1, MP2 <G019#4, #5>
The MP1 and MP2 signals enable the input pulse to be increased by
the magnifications listed below.
MP2 MP1 Magnification
0 0 1
0 1 10
1 0 M
1 1 N
Magnification M is specified in parameter No. 7113, and N in

parameter No. 7114.
NOTE
The MP1 and MP2 signals are also used to switch the
amount of movement per incremental feed step. (See
Chapter 9.)
(i) Parameter
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7100 HPF
HPF : Specifies how to handle external pulses that could cause

a rate higher than the rapid traverse rate as follows:
0 : The axis movement speed is clamped to the rapid
traverse rate, and the pulses exceeding the rapid
traverse rate is ignored.
1 : The axis movement speed is clamped to the rapid
traverse rate, and the pulses exceeding the rapid
traverse rate are stored in the CNC.
337
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7670 EXH
EXH : 0 : The axis selection and magnification for external

pulse input are specified by a parameter.
1 : The axis selection and magnification for external
pulse input are specified by a DI signal.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when EPCON = 1.
(When EPCON = 0, DI signal setting only is enabled.)
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

Unit of data :
Increment system Unit of data Range of valid data
Metric machine 1 mm/min 30 to 240000
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min 30 to 96000
Rotary axis 1 deg/min 30 to 240000
The axis movement speed based on external pulses is clamped to a

value specified in this parameter. If the specified value is 0, parameter
No. 1420 is used to clamp.
Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for manual continuous

1624 feed for each axis

Unit of data : ms
7113 Magnification (M) for feed based on external pulses
Data type : Byte type

Unit of data : Magnification of one
This parameter specifies a magnification that applies when the MP2 DI
signal is on. In this case, parameter No. 7670#7 EXH must be 0.
7114 Magnification (N) for feed based on external pulses
Data type : Word type

Unit of data : Magnification of one
This parameter specifies a magnification that applies when both MP1 and
MP2 DI signals are on. In this case, bit 7 (EXH) of parameter No. 7670
must be 0.
338
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7701 SMP16 SMP2 SMP1
This parameter specifies the number of sampling times to be used in

smoothing input pulses, as listed below.
SMP16 SMP2 SMP1 Number of sampling times
0 0 0 4
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 4
1 1 0 4
1 1 1 4
In this case, bit 7 (EXH) of parameter No. 7670 must be 1.
7710 Axis number for an axis to be moved according to external pulses
Data type : Byte

Range of valid data : 1, 2, ..., the number of controlled axes
If this parameter does not specify a valid
value, the first axis is assumed. Bit 7 (EXH)
of parameter No. 7670 must be 1.
7682 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 1 (M)
Data type : Byte

Bit 7 (EXH) of parameter No. 7670 must be 1.
7681 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 1 (N)
Data type : Word

Bit 7 (EXH) of parameter No. 7670 must be 1.
339
22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
22 FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION
(1) OUTLINE
The I/O Link is serial interface that transfers high speed I/O signals
(bit data) between CNC and cell controllers and I/O Unit-A, Power
Mate.
When an I/O card, or an I/O unit is to be used with Power Mate, I/O
allocation is required at the time of ladder creation.
(2) MAKE UP
Slave
Master I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A
Group
Power Mate #0
Power Group
Mate #1
Group All of the Power Mates (Power Mate-D, -E, -F

Power
#2 and -H) can be used as slaves.
Mate
Group
I/O card #3
Group
#15
(a) FANUC I/O Link is made up of 1 master and many slave units.
(b) A maximum of 16 groups of slaves can be connected to 1 I/O link.
The number of slave connections per 1 group are as follows.
I/O Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum 2 units (2 base)
Power Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 unit
I/O card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 unit
(c) Any slave can be connected to any group. Note however, that it
is not possible to mix different kinds of slave in 1 group.
340
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 22. FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION
(3) I/O DATA OPERATION

I/O Link has 1024 input and 1024 output I/O points seen from the
Master. There is a periodic transfer of I/O data between the master
and slaves by allotting these input and output points to each slave.
Master Slave #0
Output
1024 Input
output
points
Slave #1
Output
Input
1024
input
points
Each slave has a fixed number of I/O points and the maximum number of
slaves possible on 1 I/O Link is:
Input points: 1024, Output points: 1024.
The number of I/O points possessed and the actual number of I/O
points may differ.
Actual I/O points Dedicated I/O points

Slave
type Input Output Input points Output points Remarks
points points
I/O Number of Number of Actual I/O Dedicated I/O
Unit-A points for points for points points
each input each output
module module
A maximum of 256 input Less than 32 ³ 32 points
and 256 output points are Less than 64 ³ 64 points
possible per 1 group. Less than 128 ³ 128 points
Less than 256 ³ 256 points
Refer to “FANUC I/O
Unit-MODEL A Connecting-
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(B-61813E) for further details.
Power 32 32 32 32 It is
Mate possible
64 64 64 64 to assigng
128 128 128 128 all I/O
oints.
points
256 256 256 256
I/O 48 32 64 32
card
D
I/O 96 64 128 64
card
E
341
(4) CONNECTIONS
Slave
Master I/O Unit–A I/O Unit–A
10m 2m
CNC Group
F-D Mate #0
Power Mate
10m
Power Group
Mate #1
2m
Optical adapter
200m Optical fiber cable
Optical adapter
2m
Group
Power
#2
Mate
10m
Group
I/O card #3
Group
#15
(a) The maximum cable length between each unit and equipment is
10 m. Note however that the maximum length within any unified
group of I/O units is 2 m.
(b) A maximum length of 200 m is possible if an optical adapter is
used. Note however that an optical adapter cannot be used
between I/O units in the same group.
I/O card
Power Mate
I/O unit
342
When an I/O card, or an I/O unit is used with Power Mate, the
Power Mate functions as a master unit, and the I/O card, or the
I/O unit functions as a slave unit.
(5) SPECIFICATIONS LIST
Item Specifications Remarks
Equipment and Master: Power Mate-D/H
units that can be
connected Slave: I/O Unit-A
I/O Card
Power Mate-D/E/F/H
Number of Master: 1 unit The number of
connections slave connections
Slave: maximum of 16 groups is limited by I/O
I/O Unit–A: 2 units/group points.
Others : 1 unit/group
Number of Master: maximum I/O = 1024/1024 Refer to “(3) I/O
operating I/O Data operation”
points Slaves: per group
maximum I/O = 256/256
Cable length Between each equipment and unit:
maximum 10m
Note however that between any
unified group of I/O units:
maximum 2m
A maximum length of 200m is

possible with an optical adapter.
Note however that this is not possible
with any unified I/O unit.
(6) SETTING
The slave type of the I/O Link is set by the master unit.
Setting for when the Power Mate is used as a slave is shown below.
(a) Setting the module name
Setting when the Power Mate is used as a slave
FS04A : When DI/DO = 32/32
FS08A : When DI/DO = 64/64
OC02I : When DI = 128
OC02O : When DO = 128
OC03I : When DI = 256
OC03O : When DO = 256
Setting when I/O card D (48/32) is used as a slave
DI side : /6 DI = 64 points is assumed.
DO side : /4 DO = 32 points
Setting when I/O card E (96/64) is used as a slave
DI side : CN01I DI = 128 points is assumed.
DO side : CN01O DO = 64 points
No setting is required when a built-in I/O card is used. (Buit–in
I/O card is not a I/O Link.)
(b) Setting the base slot
The settings below are common to the Power Mate, I/O card.
Base : 0
Slot : 1
The above items are set on the master unit.
(7) I/O Link master area
Among X000 to X127 and Y000 to Y127, up to 1024 input points and
up to 1024 output points can be used.
343
(8) I/O link slave area

HOST DO ³ Power Mate DI (serial communication DI)
Power Mate Bit No.
PMC
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1020 SDI07 SDI06 SDI05 SDI04 SDI03 SDI02 SDI01 SDI00
Power Mate DO ³ HOST DI (serial communication DO)

Power Mate Bit No.
PMC
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1020 SDO07 SDO06 SDO05 SDO04 SDO03 SDO02 SDO01 SDO00
Y1027 SDO63 SDO62 SDO61 SDO60 SDO59 SDO58 SDI57 SDO56
is only enabled when the number of FANUC I/O Link signal points
used is 64/64.
When the number of signal points is 128/128, X1020 to X1035 and

Y1020 to Y1035 are enabled.
When the number of signal points is 256/256, X1020 to X1051 and
Y1020 to Y1051 are enabled.
NOTE
The address on the host side of DI/DO is decided by the
PMC address assignment.
344
(9) Data I/O function using the FANUC I/O Link (input)
IOLNK<G251#0>
Part programs, parameters, macro variables, and PMC data can be
transferred via the FANUC I/O Link linking a master unit to the
Power Mate.
IOLNK<G251#0> is a signal for selecting either RS–232C or
FANUC I/O Link connection when part programs, parameters, macro
variables, and PMC data are transferred.
IOLNK set to 0: Uses RS–232C.
IOLNK set to 1: Uses the FANUC I/O Link.
1) The data I/O control method depends entirely on the function of
the FANUC I/O Link master. This function cannot be used when
a FANUC I/O Link master that does not support this function is
used. The Power Mate–D/E/F/H cannot act as a master with this
function.
2) This function can transfer all data that can be transferred via the
RS–232C interface.
3) For data output, ISO code or EIA code format is selected using
setting parameter ISO.
Setting parameter ISO set to 1: Outputs ISO code.
Setting parameter ISO set to 0: Outputs EIA code.
4) For data input, the ISO or EIA code is identified automatically.
5) The I/O data format of the RS–232C interface is used.
6) The I/O condition of the RS–232C interface is used. However,
the user need not set a baud rate or stop bit.
345
23. CUSTOM MACRO PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
23
346
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 23. CUSTOM MACRO
23.1 Custom macro signals are interface signals used for custom macro and
PMC programs. Input/output is controlled by system variables from the
CUSTOM MACRO custom macro side, by specifying both addresses and bits from the PMC
SIGNAL (just as for DI/DO signals).
(INPUT) UI0 TO UI15
<G054, G055>,
(OUTPUT) UO0 TO
UO131 <F054 TO
F059>
Read by system variable UI0 Output by addresses G054

#1000 to #1015 to (0-7bit) and G055 (0-7bit)
UI15
Custom
macro PMC side
Power Mate
Output by system variable Ready by addresses
side UO0 to
#1100 to #1115 F054(0-7bit) through F059
UO15, (0-7bit)
The relationship among system variables, I/O signals, addresses, and bits
is shown in Tables 23.1 (a) and (b).
Table 23.1 (a) Custom Macro Input Signals Table 23.1 (b) Custom Macro Output Signals
System Interface input PMC address System Interface output PMC address
variable signal (bit) variable signal (bit)
#1000 UI0 G054 (0) #1100 UO0 F054(0)
#1001 UI1 G054 (1) #1101 UO1 F054 (1)
#1002 UI2 G054 (2) #1102 UO2 F054 (2)
#1003 UI3 G054 (3) #1103 UO3 F054 (3)
#1004 UI4 G054 (4) #1104 UO4 F054 (4)
#1005 UI5 G054 (5) #1105 UO5 F054 (5)
#1006 UI6 G054 (6) #1106 UO6 F054 (6)
#1007 UI7 G054 (7) #1107 UO7 F054 (7)
#1008 UI8 G055 (0) #1108 UO8 F055 (0)
#1009 UI9 G055 (1) #1109 UO9 F055 (1)
#1010 UI10 G055 (2) #1110 UO10 F055 (2)
#1011 UI11 G055 (3) #1111 UO11 F055 (3)
#1012 UI12 G055 (4) #1112 UO12 F055 (4)
#1013 UI13 G055 (5) #1113 UO13 F055 (5)
#1014 UI14 G055 (6) #1114 UO14 F055 (6)
#1015 UI15 G055 (7) #1115 UO15 F055 (7)
#1133 UO100 to UO131 F056 to F059
347
23. CUSTOM MACRO PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
23.2 This signal calls and executes a program in memory. While a program
called by this signal is being executed, the program that was previously
INTERRUPT SIGNAL being executed as part of automatic operation is tentatively stopped.
FOR CUSTOM This signal can be received only during automatic operation (See
MACROS (INPUT) Sec.12.1).
UINT <G053#3> For details, see Operator’s Manual (B–62684EN).
348
24. TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE SIGNAL ACT <G213#7>
TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL ACT
24 <G213#7>
Automatically set to 0 when the power is turned on. During automatic

operation or similar operation, set this signal to 1 in the ladder program.
If the Power Mate detects a temporary interrupt in the power supply, this
signal will be set to 0 causing the servo to stop. During automatic
operation, if the servo stops although the Power Mate is not displaying
an alarm, then check this signal. If it is 0, then a temporary power interrupt
occurred.
349
25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
25 AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
(1) Outline
This function uses commands from the PMC to provide axis control
independent of the Power Mate.
It is possible to select any axis available for control and direct it by
using one of six DI/DO command groups. The axis parameters EDIO
(No. 8010) is used to define which of the six groups will be applied
to a given axis. It is possible to synchronize axis movement by
applying the same group of commands to two axes at the same time.
The axis controlled in this manner moves independently of any other
axis controlled by the Power Mate or PMC.
(2) Controlled axis
nth axis (n : 1 to 6) can be selected and controlled.
(3) Notes
(a) The controlled axis is not affected by the mode selection.
(b) Parameter OVE No. 8001#2 selects the use of either the same
signal as the Power Mate or a PMC axis control signal idependent
of the Power Mate for control of rapid traverse override, cutting
feed override, and dry run functions.
(c) While the feed hold, single block, reset, and interlock functions
of the Power Mate axes are invalid for the PMC-controlled axis,
the same control is possible by operating the PMC signal.
(d) Machine lock and emergency stop are effective under axes of
Power Mate control. The machine lock can be invalidated using
parameter MLE No. 8001#0.
(e) Control of a specific axis can be switched back and forth between
the Power Mate and PMC. When control is currently being
exercised by the PMC, parameter PCF No. 3105#1 selects
whether or not the actual speed display adds the axis movement
during that control.
(4) The commands
The following table shows the range of operations which can be performed
using the PMC control command signals EC0α to EC6α (α : A, B, C, D,
E, F) <G143#0-#6> <G155#0 to #6>, <G167#0 to #6>, <G179#0 to #6>,
<G227#0 to #6>, <G239#0 to #6>.
350
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 25. AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC
Equivalent
Axis control
Power Mate
command Operation
axes
signal
command
Rapid traverse–linear acceleration/
00H G00
deceleration
Cutting feed (feed/min.)–exponential
01H G91 G01
acceleration/deceleration
04H Dwell G04
Reference position return ; used after rapid Manual
traverse in the reference position return reference
05H
direction by means of parameter ZMIx no. position
1006#5 return
Continuous feed–exponential acceleration/ Controls a
06H deceleration. Causes continuous movement in spindle or
a specified direction along the controlled axis. rotary motion
Miscellaneous function ; Same operation as the
12H M function
miscellaneous function of Power Mate
(a) PMC axis control command method

Parameter EDIO No. 8010 is used to specify which of the six
DI/DO signal groups (A, B, C, D, E or F) is used for each
individual axis.
A controlled axis is selected by setting the axis select signal
(EAXn (n : 1 to 6) <G136#0 to #5>) to “1”.
An axis select signal can be switched when the axis select status
signal *EAXSL <F129#7> is turned to “0”.
If the signal EAXx is switched to “1” while the signal *EAXSL
is “1”, P/S alarm No. 139 will be triggered.
After the axis control command signals (EC0α to EC6α
<G143#0-#6>, <G155#0-#6> <G167#0 to #6>, <G179#0 to
#6>, <G227#0 to #6>, <G239#0 to #6>) and the command data
(“command block”) have been set on the PMC side, if the axis
control command completed signal (EBUFα<G142#7>,
<G154#7> <G166#7> <G178#7> <G226#7> <G238#7>) is
reversed (“1” to “0” or “0” to “1”), the Power Mate side will fetch
and execute that command block.
NOTE
Where synchronous operation of two axes is being carried
out by use of the same command set, the same conditions
should be set in the feedrate parameters for each axis (rapid
traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time constant,
linear axis/rotary axis, etc.)
351
Axis control
Operation command Command data
signal
Rapid traverse 00H Total travel amount : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
<G170 to G173> <G182 to G185>
<G230 to G233> <G242 to G245>
In cases where parameter RPD No. 8002#0 is used to specify a rapid traverse rate
independent of the CNC, the following command data must be set :
Feedrate : EIF0α–EIF15α <G144 to G145> <G156 to G157>
<G168 to G169> <G180 to G181>
<G228 to G229> <G240 to G241>
Cutting feed 01H Total travel amount : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
(feed/min) <G170 to G173> <G182 to G185>
<G230 to G233> <G242 to G245>
<G168 to G169> <G180 to G181>
<G228 to G229> <G240 to G241>
Dwell 04H Dwell time : EID0α–EID31α <G146 to G149> <G158 to G161>
<G170 to G173> <G182 to G185>
<G230 to G233> <G242 to G245>
Reference 05H
position return
Continuous feed 06H Feed direction : EID31α <G149#7> <G161#7> <G173#7>
<G185#7> <G233#7> <G245#7>
<G168 to G169> <G180 to G181>
<G228 to G229> <G240 to G241>
Miscellaneous 12H Miscellaneous EID0α–EID7α <G146> <G158> <G170>
function function code <G182> <G230> <G242>
α : A, B, C, D, E, F
(b) Commanding two or more operations continuously
Using the PMC axis control function, the command blocks of two
or more operations are buffred by the Power Mate so that
commands are made continuously by PMC.
Even if one command is being executed, the Power Mate accepts
the next command as long as there is a vacancy in its buffer.
PMC command Buffer on Power Mate side
Block 1 ³ Command (1) ³ (4) ³ (3) Execution wait buffer 1
Block 2 ³ Command (2) ±
Block 3 ³ Command (3) (2) Execution wait buffer 2
Block 4 ³ Command (4) ±
Block 5 ³ Command (5) (1) Execution buffer
X X
Block n PMC command
352
When command (1) (block 1) has been executed, the following

transfers are made:
Command (2) ³ Execution buffer
Command (3) ³ Execution wait buffer 2
Command (4) ³ Execution wait buffer 1
After command (2) (block 2) starts to execute, command (5)
(block 5) can be sent to the Power Mate side.
(c) Buffer status
The “exclusive logical sum” (“xor”) format of the axis control
command completed signal (EBUFα<G142#7>, <G154#7>
<G166#7> <G178#7> <G226#7> <G238#7>) and the axis
control command read signal (EBSYα <F130#7>, <F133#7>
<F136#7> <F139#7> <F228#7> <F231#7>) always allows the
status of the Power Mate buffer to be dEtermined.
EBUFα <G142#7> <G154#7>
<G166#7> <G178#7>
<G226#7> <G238#7> Exclusive
k logical Power Mate buffer status
EBSYα <F130#7> <F133#7> sum (xor)
<F136#7> <F139#7>
<F228#7> <F231#7>
0 1
Command can be fetched since
k k 0
the buffer status is “vacant”.
0 1
Command cannot be fetched
since the buffer status is “full”.
When the execution of a
0 1 command is completed and the
k k 1 buffer assumes the “vacant”
1 0 status, the next command is
fetched by reversing the status
of the axis control command
read signal.
353
(d) Time charts

The command operation time charts are shown in Fig. 25.
Command data (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
EBUFα <G142#7> <G154#7>

<G166#7> <G178#7>
<G226#7> <G238#7>
Command disabled
EBSYα <F130#7> <F133#7>

<F136#7> <F139#7>
<F128#7> <F231#7>
Execution
wait buffer 1
Execution
wait buffer 2
(1) (2)
Execution buffer
Start End Start
Fig.25 Command Operation Time Chart
(5) Setting units (parameter No. 1004)

Least input increment Least command increment
0.001 mm 0.001 mm
0.0001 inch 0.0001 inch
0.001 deg 0.001 deg
(6) Feedrate
(a) Maximum rapid traverse
(i) Linear axis
Metric output Inch output
Standard Standard
100000 mm/min 4000 inch/min
(ii) Rotation axis

Increment system
Standard
100000 deg/min
354
(b) Feedrate range

(i) Linear axis
Increment Metric output Inch output

system Standard Standard
0.01 to 4000.00
Feed/minute 1 to 100000 mm/min
inch/min
0.0001 to 500.0000 0.000001 to 9.999999
Feed/revolution
m/rev inch/rev
(ii) Rotation axis
Increment system
Standard
1 to 100000 deg/min
(7) Signal list

The command group to which each signal belongs is indicated by an
appropriate suffix, illustrated below :
DI/DO signal group α: XXXα (α : A, B, C, D, E, F)
(8) Signal list
Item Signal name Symbol

Axis control command signal EC0α to EC6α (G143#0 to #6) (G155#0 to #6) (G167#0 to #6)
(9)–(a) (G179#0 to #6) (G227#0 to #6) (G239#0 to #6)
α : A, B, C, D, E, F
Axis control command issued signal EBUFα (G142#7) (G154#7) (F166#7) (G178#7) (G226#7) (G238#7)
(9)–(b) Axis control command read EBSYα (F130#7) (F133#7) (F136#7) (F139#7) (F228#7) (F231#7)
completion signal
(9)–(c) Reset signal ECLRα (G142#6) (G154#6) (G166#6) (G178#6) (G226#6) (G238#6)
(9)–(d) Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPα (G142#5) (G154#5) (G166#5) (G178#5) (G226#5) (G238#5)
(9)–(e) Servo–off signal ESOFα (G142#4) (G154#4) (G166#4) (G178#4) (G226#4) (G238#4)
Block stop signal ESBKα (G142#3) (G154#3) (G166#3) (G178#3) (G226#3) (G238#3)
(9)–(f)
Block stop disable signal EMSBKα (G143#7) (G155#7) (G167#7) (G179#7) (G227#7) (G239#7)
Auxiliary function BCD code EM11α to EM28α (F132) (F135) (F138) (F141) (F230) (F233)
(9)–(g) Auxiliary function read signal EMFα (F131#0) (F134#0) (F137#0) (F140#0) (F229#0) (F232#0)
Auxiliary function completion signal EFINα (G142#0) (G154#0) (G166#0) (G178#0) (G226#0) (G238#0)
Feed rate signal EIF0α to EIF15α (G144, G145) (G156, G157) (G168, G169)
(9)–(h)
(G180, G181) (G228, G229) (G240, G241)
Axis movement amount, EID0α to EID31α
(9)–(i) dwell time, (G146 to G149) (G158 to G161) (G170 to G173) (G182 to G185)
auxiliary function code (G230 to G233) (G242 to G245)
(9)–(j) In–position signal EINPα (F130#0) (F133#0) (F136#0) (F139#0) (F228#0) (F231#0)
(9)–(k) Following zero checking signal ECKZα (F130#1) (F133#1) (F136#1) (F139#1) (F228#1) (F231#1)
(9)–(l) Alarm signal EIALα (F130#2) (F133#2) (F136#2) (F139#2) (F228#2) (F231#2)
(9)–(m) Axis moving signal EGENα (F130#4) (F133#4) (F136#4) (F139#4) (F228#4) (F231#4)
(9)–(n) Auxiliary function executing signal EDENα (F130#3) (F133#3) (F136#3) (F139#3) (F228#3) (F231#3)
Negative–direction overtravel signal EOTNα (F130#6) (F133#6) (F136#6) (F139#6) (F228#6) (F231#6)
(9)–(o)
Positive–direction overtravel signal EOTPα (F130#5) (F133#5) (F136#5) (F139#5) (F228#5) (F231#5)
(9)–(p) Control axis selection signal EAXn (G136#0 to #5)
355
Item Signal name Symbol

(9)–(q) Control axis selection state signal *EAXSL (F129#7)
(9)–(r) Override signal *FV0E to *FV7E (G151)
(9)–(s) Override cancellation signal OVCE (G150#5)
(9)–(t) Rapid traverse override signal ROV1E, ROV2E (G150#0, #1)
Dry run signal DRNE (G150#7)
(9)–(u)
Manual rapid traverse signal RTE (G150#6)
(9)–(v) Override 0% signal EOV0 (F129#5)
(9) Signal details (α=A, B, C, D, E, F)

(a) Axis control command signals EC0α-EC6α
These signals command operations to the axis controlled by
PMC.
Each signal has its own hexadecimal code command signal (see
item (4)).
(b) Axis control command completed signal (input) EBUFα
axis control command read signal (output) EBSYα
When the axis control command completed signal (EBUFn) is
reversed (”1” to ”0” or ”0” to ”1”), the Power Mate fetches and
executes the next command block.
(c) Reset signal ECLRα
This signal resets the axis controlled by PMC. When it is turned
to ”1”, it:
D decelerates and stops an axis currently being moved;
D stops a dwell execution ;
D stops an auxiliary function execution ;
D invalidates all commands in the buffer ;
D invalidates all commands and controls made while it is ”1” ;
(d) Axis control stop signal ESTPα
When this signal is turned to ”1”, it:
D decelerates and stops an axis currently being moved;
D stops a dwell execution ;
D Stops an auxiliary function execution ;
The next block is not executed; the stopped operation restarts
when this signal turns to ”0”.
(e) Servo off signal ESOFα
When this signal turns to ”1”, excitation of the PMC-controlled
axis is turned off and the servo off status occurs.
(f) Block stop signal ESBKα
Block stop inhibit signal EMSBKα
When the block stop signal ESBKn turns to ”1” while a command
from the PMC is being executed, the operation is halted when the
current block is completed. If the block stop inhibit signal
EMSBKn is ”1”, the operation does not stop. The command
operation time chart is shown below.
356
ESBK
8msec
[1] [2] or more
[3] [4]
Command data
(Input)
EBUF
(Input)
EBSY
(Output)
Execution wait
buffer 1
Execution wait
buffer 2
[1]
Execution
buffer °
Start
(g) Miscellaneous function BCD codes EM11α to EM28α,

miscellaneous function read signals EMFα.
miscellaneous function completion signals EFINα.
If the PMC requests a miscellaneous function, the Power Mate
sends miscellaneous function codes EID0n to EID7n to BCD
codes EM11n to EM28n, followed by the EMFn signal, then
waits for the completion signal EFINn. Once the Power Mate
receives the EFINn signal, it proceeds to the next command
block.
The timing for sending and receiving these codes is the same as
for the miscellaneous (M function) codes for Power Mate control.
See item (n) in this section.
(h) Feedrate control signals EIF0α to EIF15α.
(i) This signal sets the feedrate (feed/min)
Setting range
Metric input Input in inches
Standard Standard
1 to 100000 mm/min 0.01 to 4000.00 inch/min
NOTE
1 The feedrate setting can be increased by a factor of 10
using parameter F10 (No. 8002#3).
2 When the feedrate is set to ”0”, the command will remain
buffered and the required operation will not be executed.
The ECLR reset signal must be used to release this
condition.
3 The feedrate is never clamped.
(ii) Like cutting feed (feed/min), the feedrate can be changed

during jog feed.
357
When one of the feedrates EIF0n to EIF15n is selected, a new

jog rate is assumed if the logic level of the axis control
command signal EBUFn is inverted. Since this command is
not buffered, the axis control command read signal EBSYn
need not be checked.
(iii) For rapid traverse, the feedrate should be set with a binary
code when parameter RPD No. 8002#0 is ”1”.
Setting range
Metric input Input in inches
Standard Standard
30 to 15000 mm/min 30 to 6000 inch/min
(i) Axis travel amount, dwell time and auxiliary function codes
EID0α to EID31α.
(i) For rapid traverse and cutting feed,this signal uses binary
code to set the distance to be travelled by the spindle from its
current axis position (incremental value).
Linear axis (Maximum metric input setting)
Metric output Output in inches
Standard Standard
99999.999 mm 99999.999 mm
Linear axis (Maximum input setting in inches)

Metric output Output in inches
Standard Standard
9999.9999 inch 9999.9999 inch
Rotation axis
Unit
IS-B
99999.999 deg
(ii) For dwell, this signal uses binary code to set the dwell time.
Setting value 1 to 9999999 msec
(iii) For jog feed, signal EID31 is used to set the jog feed
direction.
0 : Positive feed direction
1 : Negative feed direction
NOTE
EID0n to EID30n are undefined.
(iv) The miscellaneous function codes to be sent to the PMC are

set in EID0n to EID7n.
(j) In-positioning signal EINPα
This signal is ”1” while the PMC-controlled axis is in the
in-position state.
(k) Error zero checking signal ECKZα
This signal is ”1” while the PMC-controlled axis is performing
an error zero or an in-position check.
358
(l) Alarm signal EIALα

This signal turns to ”1” when either the servo alarm, overtravel
alarm, or P/S alarm Nos. 130 or 139 is generated in the
PMC-controlled axis.
This signal turns to ”0” when the reset signal ECLRn turns to ”1”.
To reset the alarm :
D Remove the cause of the servo alarm and reset the Power
Mate.
D Move the tool within the stored stroke limit by a rapid
traverse or cutting feed command to clear an overtravel
alarm, then reset the Power Mate.
D Reset the Power Mate to clear P/S alarm Nos. 130 or 139.
NOTE
1 In the above ”reset Power Mate”, the reset signal ECLRn is
not available. The reset button, the external reset signal
ERS <G008#7> or the emergency stop signal *ESP
<G008#4> should be used.
2 For the details of P/S alarm Nos.130 and 139, see item (11).
(m) Axis moving signal EGENα

This signal turns to ”1” while the axis is being moved by a rapid
traverse, cutting feed or reference point return command from the
PMC.
(n) Miscellaneous function in-execution signals EDENα
If the CNC sends miscellaneous function codes EID0n to EID7n
to BCD codes EM11n to EM28n, but does not receive the EFINn
completion signal, the EDENn signal turns to ”1”. The following
shows a command operation timing chart :
Miscellaneous
function command
Next command
Miscellaneous function
code output
TMF
EMF
TFIN
EFIN
EDEN
TFIN and TMF are set by parameter Nos. 3011 and 3010
(o) Overtravel in negative direction signal EOTNα
overtravel in positive direction signal EOTPα
When an overtravel alarm is detected, and the tool has exceeded
the stroke limit on the negative side, signal EOTNn turns to ”1”.
When the stroke limit has been exceeded on the positive side,
signal EOTPn turns to ”1”. The alarm signal EIALn turns to ”1”,
informing the PMC of the overtravel.
(For details, see item (1).)
359
(p) Controlled axis selection signal EAXn (n : 1 to 6)

When this signal is set to ”1”, it is possible to select an axis to be
controlled by the PMC.
In order to switch between axis selection signals, the axis
selection status signal *EAXSL must be set to ”0”. Switching
between axis selection signals while *EAXSL is ”1” causes P/S
alarm No. 139, and the alarm state signal EIALA, EIALB,
EIALA, EIALB, EIALC, EIALD, EIALE, EIALF turn to ”1”.
(q) Controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL
The axis selection signals EAX1 and EAX6 can be switched
when this signal is set to ”0”. The axis selection signals are
disabled when it is set to ”1”, indicating one of the following
conditions :
D Travel command is active ;
D Command buffering is active ;
D Servo off signal ESOFA, ESOFB, ESOFC, ESOFD,
ESOFE, ESOFF, are set to ”1”; or
D Temporary stop signal ESTPA, ESTPB, ESTPC, ESTPD,
ESTPE, ESTPF are set to ”1”.
The axis selection signal can be switched even if the ESTPn
signal is ”1” when there is no command in the wait buffer.
If *EAXSL and either the servo off or temporary off signal are ”1”
when the axis selection signal is switched, the resulting alarm
condition is not released by changing the reset signals ECLRA,
ECLRB, ECLRC, ECLRD, ECLRE, ECLRF to ”1”. To clear the
alarm, either return the axis selection signal to its original state,
or set the servo off and temporary stop signals to ”0”. The reset
signal can then be set to ”1”.
(r) Override signals *FV0E to *FV7E
An override from 0% to 255% can be performed in 1% units,
independent of the Power Mate, using parameter OVE No.
8001#2.
(s) Override cancel signal OVCE
Though a Power Mate-independent override has been set using
parameter OVE No. 8001#2, turning this signal to ”1” fixes the
cutting feed override at 100%. Rapid traverse override is not
affected.
(t) Rapid traverse override signals ROV1E, ROV2E
A rapid traverse override independent of the Power Mate can be
set to one of four values using parameter OVE No. 8001#2.
State of contacts in the machine
Override amo
amount
nt
ROV1E ROV2E
0 0 100%
1 0 50%
0 1 25%
1 1 Fo
NOTE
Fo indicates the lowest feedrate set in parameter no.1421.
(u) Dry run signal DRNE; manual rapid traverse signal RTE
Dry run and manual rapid traverse can be performed
independently of the Power Mate by using parameter OVE No.
8001#2.
360
Rapid
p traverse Command from the PMC
button During rapid traverse During cutting feed
On Rapid traverse Maximum jog feed rate
Off Jog feed rate (Note) Jog feed rate
NOTE
Rapid traverse can be performed using parameter RDE No.
8001#3.
When the DRNE signal is ”1”, the specified rapid traverse and
cutting feed rates are ignored and the dry run speed set by
parameter No.1410 is used. Parameter RDE No. 8001#3
specifies if dry run is enabled or disabled for rapid traverse.
If RTE turns to ”1” during dry run, the workpiece is fed at the
rapid traverse rate (for rapid traverse) or at the maximum jog feed
rate (for cutting feed). If the RTE turns to ”0”, the workpiece is
fed at the jog feed rate.
(v) Override 0% signal EOV0
This signal turns to ”1” when the override amount is 0%.
(10)Parameters
The PMC and axis control of Power Mate functions use the same
parameters.
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 PCF
PCF 1 : Movement along the PMC control axis is not added to the
actual speed display.
0 : Movement along the PMC control axis is added to the
actual speed display.
NOTE
This parameter is effective when control of the same axis is
switched between CNC and PMC.
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 RDE OVE MLE
MLE 1 : The machine lock (MLK) signal is invalid for the PMC
control axis.
0 : The machine lock (MLK) signal is valid for the PMC
control axis.
OVE 1 : The PMC uses signals specific to PMC axis control for dry
run, override, and other functions.
0 : CNC signals for axis control are used by the PMC.
RDE 1 : Dry run is valid for the rapid traverse command during
PMC axis control.
0 : Dry run is invalid for the rapid traverse command during
PMC axis control.
361
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 F10 RPD
RPD 1 : A rapid traverse rate independent of the CNC can be set

to any desired value for use in PMC axis control.
0 : The rapid traverse rate for PMC axis control depends on
the CNC parameter.
F10 1 : A feed rate command to the PMC axis is multiplied by 10.
0 : A feed rate command to the PMC axis is not multiplied by
10.
Bit. No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 NODIC
NODIC Specifies the method of displaying the current position on

each axis specified as a PMC axis.
1 : The standard specification is followed. The decimal point
position determined by dividing the increment system by
10 is not used.
0 : The decimal point position determined by dividing the
increment system by 10 is followed.
Bit. No.
8010 EDIO
EDIO Specifies which of DI/DO signal groups A to F is used by

the PMC axis control function. No other value can initiate
PMC axis control.
1: Group A is used.
2: Group B is used.
3: Group C is used.
4: Group D is used.
5: Group E is used.
6: Group F is used.
(11) P/S Alarm
The servo and overtravel alarms are detected in the same way,
whether the axis is controlled by the PMC or the CNC. When an
alarm occurs during PMC axis control, the alarm signal EIALn turns
to ”1” and warns the PMC, in addition to the normal alarm state
processing operations. The overtravel alarm also triggers an
overtravel signal (EOTNn for negative direction, EOTPn for
positive).
If a PMC-controlled axis receives a command from the PMC while the
CNC is controlling an automatic or manual operation in progress, P/S
alarm No. 130 occurs. If the axis is on feed hold or single block
suspension, the PMC command is valid; if the axis is in the act of cutting
feed, the override is set to 0%, cutting feed stops, and the PMC
command will create an alarm condition. If the PMC-controlled axis is
interrupted by a command from the CNC, P/S alarm No. 130 will occur.
Number Description
130 An axis controlled by both the CNC and PMC received an
axis control command from one side while executing a
command from the other side.
139 Axis selection has been carried out while executing a
command under PMC axis control.
362
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION
26 TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION
363
26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
26.1 Positioning can be performed by butting against a mechanical stop while

applying a torque limit to the servo motor.
OVERVIEW A torque limit can be set using three methods: parameter input, DI signal
input, and input from the PMC.
A torque limit set using any of these methods is valid in all modes (EDIT,
AUTO, JOG, and so forth).
26.2 (1) Selecting a torque control method
With the torque control function, a torque limit can be set using three
TORQUE CONTROL methods:
FUNCTION 1: Torque control based on parameter input
2: Torque control based on DI signal input
3: Torque control based on input from the PMC
See Table 26.2 for information about about which torque control
method is used.
A torque control method can be selected separately for the each axis.
Table 26.2 Torque Control Method Selection
Parameter Torque limit enable signal (TRQnE)

TRQLTn
(No.1825) ON OFF
When set to 0 Torque control method Torque control method
based on DI signal input based on input from the
PMC
When set to a value other Torque control method based on parameter input
than 0
n : 1 to 6
(2) Position and alarm check when a torque limit is applied
An excessive position check error and stop/move error can be ignored
by setting parameter No. 1803 only when a torque limit is applied.
Number
1803 TAL TIP
TIP 1 : Makes a position check when a torque limit is applied.

0 : Does not make a position check when a torque limit is
applied.
TAL 1 : Checks for an excessive stop/move error when a torque
limit is applied.
0 : Does not check for an excessive stop/move error when a
torque limit is applied.
364
26.3 (1) Condition for activating this function

This function is activated when a value other than 0 is set in parameter
TORQUE CONTROL No. 1855 (TRQLTn) (parameter for setting a torque limit).
FUNCTION BASED
NOTE
ON PARAMETER
When 0 is specified in parameter No. 1855, the torque
INPUT control function based on parameter input is disabled.
(2) Applicable modes

This function can be used in all modes (EDIT, AUTO, and so forth).
(3) Parameter No. 1855 (TRQLTn): parameter for setting a torque limit
Parameter No. 1855 (TRQLTn) sets a torque limit used for torque
control.
This parameter can be rewritten with a G10 code even when a part
program is being executed.
Number Data
1855 Axis-by-axis current limit override value (TRQLTn)
Data type : Byte

Valid data range : 0 to 255
A torque limit is applied to the servo motor based on the setting of this
parameter.
The expression below indicates the relationship between a setting and
a torque limit.
Torque override value = (setting/255)*100(%)
365
26. TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
26.4 Torque limit enable signal TRQnE <G216#0 to #5>

Torque limit signal TRQn0 to n7 <G217 to G222>
TORQUE CONTROL
FUNCTION BASED (1) Condition for activating this function
This function is activated by turning the torque limit enable signal
ON DI SIGNAL INPUT <TRQnE> on when the torque control function based on parameter
input is disabled.
NOTE
The torque control function based on DI signal input is
disabled when the torque control function based on
parameter input is enabled or the torque limit enable signal
is turned off.

(3) Torque limit signals <TRQn0 to TRQn7>
As indicated in Table 26.4(a), each of the torque limit signals (TRQn0
to TRQn7) can be handled as a byte data item to allow a torque limit
from 0 to 255 to be specified.
A torque limit is applied to the servo motor based on the value set
using the torque limit signal.
The expression below indicates the relationship between a setting and
a torque limit.
Torque override value = (value set using TRQn/255)*100(%)
Table 26.4 (a) Torque Limit Value and Signals TRQn0 to TRQn7
Input
p value by
y TRQn0 to TRQn7 signal
TRQn
Q 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0
1 Ę
2 Ę
· · · · · · · · ·
· · · · · · · · ·
254 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
255 Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę Ę
Ę : Contact : Contact open
Table 26.4 (b) Torque Limit Enable Signal and Torque Limit
Signals
<Torque limit enable signal>

G216 TRQ6E TRQ5E TRQ4E TRQ3E TRQ2E TRQ1E
<Torque limit signal for the 1st axis>

366
<Torque limit signal for the 2nd axis>

<Torque limit signal for the 3rd axis>

<Torque limit signal for the 4th axis>



26.5 (1) Condition for activating this function

This function is activated when both the torque control function based
TORQUE CONTROL on parameter input and the torque control function based on DI signal
FUNCTION BASED input are disabled.
ON INPUT FROM THE
NOTE
PMC The torque control function based on input from the PMC is
disabled when either the torque control function based on
parameter input or the torque control function based on DI
signal input is enabled.

(3) Function outline
A torque limit is applied to the servo motor based on the torque limit
sent from the PMC using the window function.
For details on how to input data from the PMC, refer to the ”FANUC
PMC Model PA3 Ladder Language Programming Manual.”
367
27. SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)
IGNVRY <G066#0> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL
27 (INPUT) IGNVRY <G066#0>
If the speed control servo alarm is issued and this signal is high, the
control unit ignores the alarm, thus preventing the alarm state from being
set.
While this signal is “1”, the control unit ignores the speed control servo
alarm (alarm 401: VRDY OFF); consequently, the alarm state is not set.
The alarm state is set if an alarm other than the speed control servo alarm
is issued, however. If IGNVRY makes a “0” to “1” transition after the
speed control servo alarm has been issued, the alarm state is not canceled.
Only the speed control servo alarm issued while this signal is “1” is
ignored.
Application: Suppose an application exists which has a safety provision
to switch off the magnetic contactor (MCC) of the servo unit
when the limit switch on at the door of the splash guard is
activated when the splash guard is opened. This signal can
be used in such an application. When the MCC of the servo
unit is switched off, the speed control servo alarm is issued.
By making the IGNVRY signal “1” beforehand, however,
the alarm can be ignored.
When making IGNVRY “1”, be sure to make the feed hold
signal *SP [12.2] “0” at the same time to prevent automatic
operation from being activated.
IGNVRY
*SP
The MCC of
the servo unit
ON OFF
ON/OFF
t t
t : more than 100 ms
368
27. SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM
IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE IGNVRY <G066#0>
NOTE
1 While the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1, and a
servo alarm other than alarm No. 401 occurs, the control
unit detects the alarm.
2 When the control enters NOT READY status due to
emergency stop or a servo alarm and then the control is
reset, reset processing is not terminated until the VRDY
OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 0.
3 When the VRDY OFF alarm ignore signal is set to 1 and the
servo amplifier ready signal is set to off, the motor is freed
from the drive, but follow up is not performed. To perform
follow up, set the servo off signal to 1.
369
28. CONTROLLED AXES DETACH PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
28 CONTROLLED AXES DETACH
370
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE 28. CONTROLLED AXES DETACH
28.1 (Function)
CONTROLLED AXIS These signals detach the control axes from control.
DETACH SIGNALS These signals are provided for each control axis; the affixed
number of the signal name shows the control axis number.
DTCHn<G124#0 TO
DTCHn The n–th axis is detached. (n : 1 to 6)
#5> (Operation)
When one of these signals is turned to “1”, the corresponding
axis is detached from control and the following conditions
apply:
1 Position control is not done.
2 Servo alarms related to this axis are ignored.
3 The interlock signal for the axis has automatically turned
to “0”.
4 Commands to the axis are accepted (in both automatic
and manual modes), but they are not executed, since the
interlock signal is “0”. Automatic operation cannot
proceed; it remains stopped in the block.
5 The axis continues to be shown on the CRT position
display.
6 The motor can be replaced with one of the same model.
7 No absolute pulse coder is used.
8 A servo amplifier is required for each axis to be detached.
This is because the power to the servo amplifier needs to
be turned off at the time of motor replacement.
These signals can be changed from “0” to “1” or from “1” to “0”
regardless of whether power has been turned on. They should
never be turned on or off during axis movement.
(Use) When attachments are used (such as a detachable rotary table),
these signals are selected according to whether the attachments
are mounted.
NOTE
1 For these signals to be attached, parameter No. 1005#7
must be set, indicating the axes are detachable.
2 Setting parameter No. 0012#7 from the MDI panel detaches
the axes in the same way as these signals.
28.2 These signals indicate that the control axes are detached from the control.
When the control n–th axis is attached, the signals are “0”; when n–th axis
CONTROLLED AXIS is detached, the signals are “1”.
DETACH STATUS
SIGNALS MDTCHn
<F110#0 TO #5>
371
<X000#0, X1000#0>, EXF2 <X000#1,
X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
FEEDRATE SWITCH SIGNAL EXF1 <X000#0,

X1000#0>, EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2,
29 X1001#2>, EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5>
(a) Function
External input signals can be used to switch the feedrate to a value
specified in a parameter. When signals are entered through the
built–in I/O card, only EXF1 to EXF3 are valid.
(b) Signal
EXF1= 1 : The feedrate is switched to a value specified in parameter
No. 1481 (EXFP1).
0 : The feedrate is not switched to a value specified in
parameter No. 1481 (EXFP1).
No. 1482 (EXFP2).
No. 1483 (EXFP3).
No. 1484 (EXFP4).
No. 1485 (EXFP5).
(c) Parameter
1481 EXFP1
1482 EXFP2
1483 EXFP3
1484 EXFP4
1485 EXFP5
372
<X000#0, X1000#0>, EXF2 <X000#1,
X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2, X1001#2>,
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5>
EXFP1 to EXFP5
These feedrates correspond to the EXF1 to EXF5 signals,
respectively.
Range of valid data
Unit of data
IS–B
Metric input 1 mm/min 6 to 15000
Inch input 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000
Rotary axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000
(d) Program example (metric input)

G31 X100.0 F20.0 ; EXFP1=16 (16.0 mm/min)
EXFP2=10 (10.0 mm/min)
EXFP3=6 (6.0 mm/min)
F mm/min
EXF1 on
20.0
EXF2 on
16.0 EXF3 on
Skipped if the SKIP signal is on

10.0
6.0
x mm
0 100.0
(e) Notes
1) Feedrate switching by the EXF1, EXF2, EXF3, EXF4, and EXF5
signals are effective for cutting feed by G31 and G01. They are
ineffective for rapid traverse.
2) The EXF4 and EXF5 signals are effective when I/O card E (DI = 96;
DO = 64) is selected.
3) This function cannot be used together with the multi–skip function
(SKIP2, SKIP3, or SKIP4).
4) Even when this function is being used, the DI signals *FV0 to *FV7
(G012) can be used to override the feedrate with a rate specified in a
parameter.
5) When you are going to apply override, if this function is already being
used by the G31 skip, set parameter No. 6200#7 (SKF).
6) This function cannot be used during multipath control mode.
373
RTN16 <G206#0 TO G211#0>, RTN21
TO RTN26 <G206#1 TO G211#1>,
RTN31 TO RTN36 <G206#2 TO G211#2> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
RETURN SIGNAL (INPUT) RTN11 TO RTN16 <G206#0

TO G211#0>, RTN21 TO RTN26 <G206#1 TO G211#1>,
30 RTN31 TO RTN36 <G206#2 TO G211#2>
When a return signal (RTN1n, RTN2n, RTN3n) is turned on in the manual

continuous feed mode JOG [6.1], the axis moves up to a reference position
corresponding to the selected return signal.
If the return signal is turned off during movement, the axis decelerates to
a ship.
When the axis has reached a reference position, the axis stops and the
corresponding reference position return end signal (ZPn [10.1], ZP2n
[10.2], ZP3n [10.2]) is turned on to terminate the movement.
The reference position must be set before this function is used by
performing the reference position return operation.
Table 30 Return Signal and Related Matters
Return signal return position Reference pointreturn

end output signal
RTN11 1st reference position ZP1
RTN21 2nd reference position ZP21
RTN31 3rd reference position ZP31
374
31. V–READY WAITING SIGNAL
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE (OUTPUT) WVRDY;<F209#4>
V–READY WAITING SIGNAL (OUTPUT)
31 WVRDY;<F209#4>
This signal is used by the function which disables the servo alarm even
when MCC is turned off (parameter NOFVY (No.1803#2)). it is output
until MCC is turned on.
375
32. SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT
INCORPORATE A PMC PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
32 SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT INCORPORATE A PMC
376
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE INCORPORATE A PMC
32.1 In a FANUC Power Mate–Model H system that does not incorporate a

PMC, the Power Mate–H is connected with the higher–level PLC via a
GENERAL FANUC I/O Link, commands are received not through a ladder of the
Power Mate–H but directly from the PLC to activate the Power Mate–H
functions, and the Power Mate–H states are transferred to the PLC.
PLC Power Mate–H

I/O FANUC I/O Link
Link JD1A
master
JE1 Power magnetics cabinet and
JD1B machine operator’s panel
SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4,
*ESP, *RILK
Power Mate–H
JD1A
JE1 Power magnetics cabinet and
machine operator’s panel
JD1B SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4,
*ESP, *RILK
(1) The PLC must support the master function of the FANUC I/O Link.
(2) The following signals can be connected to the Power Mate–H internal
I/O (JE1):
*ESP (emergency stop), SKIP, SKIP2, SKIP3, SKIP4 (skip signals),
*RILK (high–speed interlock)
377
32.2
SPECIFICATIONS OF (1) For systems that do not incorporate a PMC, a PMC module need not
be installed in the Power Mate–H.
A SYSTEM THAT
(2) The functions that can be used with the Power Mate–H are limited.
DOES NOT Section 32.4 explains which functions are supported. To use a
INCORPORATE A function other than those described in Section 32.4, the PMC module
is required.
PMC
(3) I/O devices such as a built–in I/O card, external I/O card, and I/O unit
connected via the FANUC I/O Link cannot be used.
(4) The following PMC–related functions cannot be used:
D Ladder execution
D Ladder program I/O
D Dynamic ladder display/editing
D Ladder title display/editing
D Detailed PMC alarm display
D PMC trace display
D Display/setting of PMC parameters such as timer, counter, and
keep relay information, and data
(5) Use a motor that incorporates an absolute pulse coder.
See Section 32.5 for details of the reference position return method.
(6) For a system that does not incorporate a PMC, only the following
additional options can be used:
D Part program storage length addition C A02B–0211–J814
D Part program storage length addition D A02B–0211–J827
D Macro executor A02B–0211–J812
D C executor A02B–0211–J734
D Register program count addition A A02B–0211–J815
D Register program count addition B A02B–0211–J816
D Register program count addition C A02B–0211–J817
D Interrupt–type custom macro function A02B–0211–J824
D Direct command A02B–0211–J834
(7) When options that require a PMC module are selected, such as the
handy operator’s panel, the system must incorporate a PMC.
378
32.3 On the PLC side, assign the Power Mate–H as a slave with 256 input
points/256 output points. The I/O addresses of the Power Mate–H are
INTERFACE X1020 to X1051, and Y1020 to Y1051.
PLC Power Mate–H
X1020 to X1051
FANUC I/O Link
Y1020 to Y1051
379
32.4 The addresses of the interface signals exchanged between the Power
Mate–H, PLC, power magnetics cabinet, and machine operator’s panel
ADDRESS LISTS are indicated below.
PLC Power Mate–H MT
X1020 to 1051
Y1020 to 1051 X1000
MT³Power Mate (Internal I/O: JE1)

Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PLC³CNC
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1020 FIN
X1021 AFL MFIN
X1022 OVC *ABSM
X1023 RLSOT *FLWU ST
X1024 ERS RRW *SP *ESP *IT
X1025 PN7 PN6 PN5 PN4 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
X1026 *JV7 *JV6 *JV5 *JV4 *JV3 *JV2 *JV1 *JV0
X1027 *JV15 *JV14 *JV13 *JV12 *JV11 *JV10 *JV9 *JV8
X1028 *FV7 *FV6 *FV5 *FV4 *FV3 *FV2 *FV1 *FV0
X1029 ROV2 ROV1
X1030 HS1C HS1B HS1A
380
Address Bit No.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X1031 RT MP2 MP1
X1032 ZRN MD4 MD2 MD1
X1033 MLK BDT1
X1034 BDT9 BDT8 BDT7 BDT6 BDT5 BDT4 BDT3 BDT2
X1035 DRN KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK
X1036 UINT
X1037 UI7 UI6 UI5 UI4 UI3 UI2 UI1 UI0
X1038 UI15 UI14 UI13 UI12 UI11 UI10 UI9 UI8
X1039 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
X1040 EPCON IGNVRY
X1041 +J6 +J5 +J4 +J3 +J2 +J1
X1042 –J6 –J5 –J4 –J3 –J2 –J1
X1043 MI6 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
X1044 +LM6 +LM5 +LM4 +LM3 +LM2 +LM1
X1045 –LM6 –LM5 –LM4 –LM3 –LM2 –LM1
X1046 DTCH6 DTCH5 DTCH4 DTCH3 DTCH2 DTCH1
X1047 SVF6 SVF5 SVF4 SVF3 SVF2 SVF1
X1048 *IT6 *IT5 *IT4 *IT3 *IT2 *IT1
X1049 +MIT6 +MIT5 +MIT4 +MIT3 +MIT2 +MIT1
X1050 –MIT6 –MIT5 –MIT4 –MIT3 –MIT2 –MIT1
NOTE
Those addresses to which no signals are assigned, as well
as X1051, must be set to 0.
381
CNC!PLC
Address Bit No.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Y1020 OP SA STL SPL RWD
Y1021 MA DEN BAL RST AL
Y1022 CUT
Y1023 MTCHIN MEDT MAUT MMDI MJ MSTP
Y1024 MZRN
Y1025 MF
Y1026 DM00 DM01 DM02 DM30
Y1027 M07 M06 M05 M04 M03 M02 M01 M00
Y1028 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10 M09 M08
Y1029 M23 M22 M21 M20 M19 M18 M17 M16
Y1030 M31 M30 M29 M28 M27 M26 M25 M24
Y1031 BGEACT RPALM RPBSY
Y1032 UO7 UO6 UO5 UO4 UO3 UO2 UO1 UO0
Y1038 INP6 INP5 INP4 INP3 INP2 INP1
Y1039 MVD6 MVD5 MVD4 MVD3 MVD2 MVD1
Y1040 MDTCH6 MDTCH5 MDTCH4 MDTCH3 MDTCH2 MDTCH1
NOTE
Those addresses to which no signals are assigned, as well
as Y1041 to Y1051, are undefined.
382
32.5 For a system that does not incorporate a PMC, only the reference position
return method described below can be used.
REFERENCE
Reference position return method:
POSITION RETURN
1) Set the emergency stop release state.
2) Perform movement to the point where the reference position is to be
set.
3) Set parameter No. 1815 (APZx) to 1.
When a different reference position is to be set, restore the setting of
parameter No. 1815 (APZx) to 0, then perform the above procedure.
383
33. HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL
<F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> PMC INTERFACE B–62683EN/03
HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL <F168 TO F175, G204 TO
33 G205>
384
B–62683EN/03 PMC INTERFACE <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205>
33.1 When machine operation mode is selected with the <M–OPE/MDI> key,
handy operator’s panel key input information is output to the F area, as
KEY INPUT ON THE follows:
PANEL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0169 SW16 SW15 M–OPE SW13 SW12 SW11 SW10 SW9
F0175 SW61 SW60 SW59 SW58 SW57
1) SWn (n = 1 to 61)
SWn = 0: The corresponding key is not pressed.
SWn = 1: The corresponding key is pressed.
D In MDI mode, SWn = 0 even when the corresponding key is pressed.
D If the cable connected to the Power Mate is disconnected, SWn = 0.
For details of the correspondence between SWn and keys, see the
next page.
2) M–OPE (F169#5)
M–OPE = 0: MDI mode is set.
M–OPE = 1: Machine operation mode is set.
This signal does not indicate whether a key is pressed.
385
M–OPE/MDI (Alphanumeric key sheet)

M–OPE/CNC (Symbolic key sheet)
386
33.2 The handy operator’s panel has eleven LED signal points; the nine upper
points can be turned on or off by a ladder program.
LED ON/OFF
INFORMATION #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OUTPUT G204 LED08 LED07 LED06 LED05 LED04 LED03 LED02 LED01
G205 LED09
LED0n = 1: The corresponding LED is turned on.

LED0n = 0: The corresponding LED is turned off.
Alphanumeric LED key sheet Symbolic LED key sheet
NOTE
The two LEDs below indicate whether machine operation
mode is selected, and whether MDI mode is selected.
These LEDs cannot be turned on and off by a ladder
program.
M–OPE turned on: Machine operation mode is
selected.
M–OPE turned off: Machine operation mode is not
selected.
MDI turned on: MDI mode is selected.
MDI turned off: MDI mode is not selected.
387
33.3
KEY INPUT ON
PANEL OF FANUC
STANDARD UNIT
33.3.1
Alphanumeric Key
Type
(A02B–0211–C020#R)
1) Keys other than M–OPE (F169#5)

0: The corresponding key is not pressed.
1: The corresponding key is pressed.
In MDI mode, a signal is set to 0 even when the corresponding key
is pressed.
2) M–OPE (F169#5)
M–OPE = 1: Machine operation (M–OPE) mode is set.
(This signal does not indicate whether a key is pressed.)
388
33.3.2
Symbolic Key Type
(A02B–0211–C020#S)
389
1) Keys other than M–OPE (F169#5)

0: The corresponding key is not pressed.
1: The corresponding key is pressed.
In MDI mode, a signal is set to 0 even when the corresponding key
is pressed.
2) M–OPE (F169#5)
M–OPE = 1: Machine operation (M–OPE) mode is set.
(This signal does not indicate whether a key is pressed.)
390
33.4
FANUC STANDARD
UNIT LED ON/OFF
INFORMATION
OUTPUT
33.4.1
Alphanumeric Key
Type
(A02B–0211–C020#R)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 (LED08) (LED07) (LED06) T–STEP T–JOG AUTO (LED02) ALARM
G205 (LED09)
1: The corresponding LED is turned on.

0: The corresponding LED is turned off.
33.4.2
Symbolic Key Type
(A02B–0211–C020#S) #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G204 (LED08) (LED07) (LED06) (LED05) (LED04) (LED03) (LED02) (LED01)
G205 (LED09)
1: The corresponding LED is turned on.

0: The corresponding LED is turned off.
391
33.5
SUPPLEMENT
33.5.1 To use the handy operator’s panel, the items listed below are required.
Necessary Items (1) CRT module
To enable the use of the handy operator’s panel, a CRT module must
be installed in the Power Mate.
(2) PMC module
To enable the use of the handy operator’s panel, a PMC–PA3 module
must be installed in the Power Mate.
(3) Version of the base printed circuit board
The version number of the base printed circuit board
(A20B–2100–0020, 0021) must be 02B or later.
(4) Version of the basic function
The version number of the basic function (A02B–0211–H501#8880)
must be 9 or later.
33.5.2 When using the handy operator’s panel, set the Power Mate rotary
Setting Items switches as follows:
1) Set RSW to 0.
2) Set MTSW to 3.
33.5.3 When the handy operator’s panel is being used, some restrictions are
Restrictions imposed on the Power Mate functions, as described below.
(1) For CRT display language selection, Japanese cannot be selected with
bit 0 (JPN) of parameter No. 3102. Other languages cannot be
selected either. Only an English–language display is supported.
(2) The help function cannot be used.
(3) The following PMC–related functions cannot be used:
D Dynamic ladder diagram display/editing
D Ladder title display/editing
D Detailed PMC alarm display
D PMC trace display
D Display/setting of PMC parameters such as timer, counter, and keep
relay information, as well as data
D Ladder I/O operations (such as load and save operations via the
RS–232C interface)
(4) The characters that can be used with the macro executor are limited.
With the macro executor, only the following characters can be used.
1. Standard characters
Alphabetic characters (uppercase and lowercase), numbers, kana
characters, blanks, plus sign, minus sign, decimal point, equal
sign, comma, ruled lines, etc.
The internal codes of the usable characters are 0020 to 00DF, and
2F61 to 2F6B.
2. Triple–size characters
Alphabetic characters, numbers, blanks, minus sign, decimal
point
392
The internal codes of the usable characters are 0020, 002D, 002E,
0030 to 0039, and 0041 to 005A.
For details, refer to “Power Mate–D Programming Language (Macro
Compiler/Macro Executor) (B–62093–1).”
(5) The characters that can be used with the C executor are limited. With
the C executor, only the following characters can be used.
1. JIS codes: 0020 to 004F, 0061 to 007A, 00A0 to 00DF
2. Single–byte character code table
Graphic character set #1 – – ESC(1 ! 00C5 to 00CF
Standard character set – – ESC(4 ! 0020 to 004F
0061 to 007A
00A0 to 00DF
Large character set – – ESC(6 ! 002D, 002E
0030 to 0039
0041 to 005A
3. FANUC character code table
0020 to 005F, 00A0 to 00DF, 0100 to 01E1, 01E4 to 01EE
(6) The simultaneous block start function cannot be used.
(7) The handy operator’s panel cannot be used together with the
CRT/MDI unit; the separate CRT unit cannot be used together with
the separate MDI unit; the separate PDP unit cannot be used together
with the separate MDI unit; the separate LCD unit cannot be used
together with the separate MDI unit. Switching using a switch unit
is not possible.
(8) When a DPL/MDI unit is connected to the Power Mate, the handy
operator’s panel displays the position display screen at all times; all
operations other than those using the emergency stop button,
deadman’s switches, and deadman’s switch enable switch are
disabled.
393
APPENDIX
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
A EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
Number
Classification Name of
Figure
Control unit CONTROL UNIT Fig. 1
I/O I/O CARD D, E Fig. 2
Unit for display CRT/MDI UNIT, LCD/MDI UNIT Fig. 3
and data input CRT/MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY
SEPARATE CRT UNIT Fig. 4
SEPARATE MDI UNIT, Fig. 5
SEPARATE MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY
SEPARATE PDP UNIT Fig. 6
SEPARATE LCD UNIT Fig. 7
DETACHABLE LCD/MDI UNIT Fig. 8
HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL Fig. 9
DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT), Fig. 10
DUST PROTECTED TYPE DPL/MDI (TABLE MOUNT),
LONG DISTANCE TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT)
DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT), Fig. 11
DUST PROTECTED TYPE DPL/MDI (WALE MOUNT),
LONG DISTANCE TYPE DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT)
External device PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE) Fig. 12
PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE) Fig. 13
PUNCH PANEL (WITH 24V TERMINAL BOARD) Fig. 14
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE Fig. 15
FANUC Handy File Fig. 16
CRT LINK TERMINAL UNIT, Fig. 17
TOUCH PANEL TERMINAL UNIT
I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT Fig. 18
HSSB ADAPTOR Fig. 19
397
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Fig. 1 CONTROL UNIT
Specification : A02B–0211–B501
A02B–0211–B511
Air out
Air in
Weight : 2.2Kg
398
399
Fig. 2
I/O CARD D, E
4–5mm CP1
50 mm 10
336 mm
mm
15 mm
JD1B (1) (2) (3)
12 12
43
CP1
A. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH UNIT
JD1A
CP61
35
400
155
APPENDIX
154 mm
120 mm
A16B–2202–0732 (DI/DO=96/64)
Specification : A16B–2202–0733 (DI/DO=48/32)
CMB4
17.78 mm
CMB3 CM52 CM51
MR20RM
MR50RM MR50RM MR50RM
20 50 50 50
11.72
mm
31.05 mm 46.99 mm 88.9 mm 88.9 mm 66.16 mm
Approx. 100 mm
7 mm 322 mm
B–62683EN/03
Fig. 3 CRT/MDI UNIT, LCD/MDI UNIT, CRT/MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY
Specification : A02B–0166–C201#R (English key)

A02B–0166–C201#S (Symbolic key)
A02B–0166–C221#R (English key, with picture display for 32 screen) CRT/
A02B–0166–C221#S (Symbolic key, with picture display for 32 screen) MDI
A02B–0166–C222#R (English key, with picture display for 64 screen)
A02B–0166–C222#S (Symbolic key, with picture display for 64 screen)
A02B–0166–C261#R (English key) LCD/
A02B–0166–C261#S (Symbolic key) MDI
Panel cut drawing
Stud (M4) for grounding

Weight : 5.8kg
401
Fig. 4 SEPARATE CRT UNIT
Specification : A02B–0120–C111
184
190
244
250
4–M3
Panel cut drawing
260 2
4–ø4 5 5
250 22 220
5
200
190
5
Stad (M4) for grounding

Weight : 3.5kg
Back side
Soft key connector
402
Fig. 5 SEPARATE MDI UNIT, SEPARATE MDI UNIT WITH PICTURE DISPLAY

Stud (M4) for grounding Panel cut drawing
Weight : 1.3kg
403
Fig. 6 SEPARATE PDP UNIT
2
22 95MAX
5
200 190
30
5 250 5
260
5
130 88
CN2 CN1
Screw (M4) for grounding
19.5
33
17.5
23
450 Connector for CRT video signal
Connector for soft key Weight : 2.1kg

Connector for power supply
404
Fig. 7 SEPARATE LCD UNIT
Weight : 1.6 kg
405
Fig. 8 DETACHABLE LCD/MDI UNIT

Weight : 7.0 kg
406
Fig. 9 HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL

Display
LED key
sheet
Deadman’s switch enable switch Operator’s panel Emergency stop Deadman’s switch
key sheet button
Tolerance: 1 mm
Weight : 1.3 kg
407
Fig. 10 DPL/MDI UNIT (TABLE MOUNT)
Specification : A02B–0168–K010, K012 (English key)

Dust protected type A02B–0118–C130#R, C132#R (English key)
A02B–0118–C130#S, C132#S (Symbolic key)
Long length type A02B–0118–C130, C032 (English key)
Weight : 0.4kg
408
Fig. 11 DPL/MDI UNIT (WALE MOUNT)
Specification : A02B–0168–K011, K013 (English key)

Dust protected type A02B–0118–C131#R, C133#R (English key)
A02B–0118–C131#S, C133#S (Symbolic key)
Long length type A02B–0118–C131, C033 (English key)
Weight : 0.4kg
409
Fig. 12 PUNCH PANEL (WIDE WIDTH TYPE) Cable J42
Specification : A02B–0120–C181 (Cable length : 1m)

A02B–0120–C182 (Cable length : 2m)
80
5
13
5
125
Panel cut drawing of this punch panel is shown in the following:

410
Fig. 13 PUNCH PANEL (NARROW WIDTH TYPE) Cable J42

40
20 13
5
Panel cut drawing

125
2 M3
5
100 115
20
411
Fig. 14 PUNCH PANEL (WITH 24V TERMINAL BOARD)

HONDA
Connector : PCR–E20FA
Cover : PCR–E20CA
JAPAN AVIATION ELEC-

TRONIC INDUSTRY.,LTD Length : 200mm
DBM–25S
For frame ground
For crimp terminal M4
Panel cut drawing
(Note) Provide a grounding terminal for the frame ground near the punch panel.
412
Fig. 15 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE
Specification : Adapter: A13B–0150–B001

: Floppy : A87L–0001–0039
Adaptor
Weight : Approx. 2kg
Floppy
413
Fig. 16 FANUC Handy File
Specification : A13B–0159–B001 (English key)

A13B–0159–B002 (Japanese key)
Cable length : 3.0m

Weight : 1.4kg
Unit : mm
414
Fig. 17 CRT LINK TERMINAL UNIT, TOUCH PANEL TERMINAL UNIT
Specification : A02B–0124–D001 (CRT link)

A02B–0166–D003 (Touch panel, handy operator’s panel)
9.5
21 11.4
HONDA
37
30
Weight : Approx. 30g
415
Fig. 18 I/O Link CONNECTION UNIT
Specification : A20B–2000–0410 (electric – optical)

A20B–2000–0411 (electric – electric)
A20B–2000–0412 (optical – optical)
Unit : mm
180
10 160
30
90 Printed–circuit board
Cable Cable
Components
Up to 50
Outside dimensions
4–M4

Installation dimensions
Weight : 600g
416
Fig. 19 HSSB ADAPTOR
Weight : About 150g
417
Controller mounted on HSSB adaptor
Weight : About 2.4Kg
418
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX EACH CONNECTOR
B EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR
Number
Name of
Figure
PCR CONNECTOR Fig. 1
FI40 CONNECTOR Fig. 2
CONNECTOR CASE (HONDA PCR TYPE) Fig. 3
CONNECTOR CASE (HIROSE FI TYPE) Fig. 4
CONNECTOR CASE (FUJITSU FCN TYPE) Fig. 5
AMP CONNECTOR (1) TYPE X Fig. 6
AMP CONNECTOR (2) TYPE Y Fig. 7
CONTACT FOR AMP CONNECTOR Fig. 8
HONDA CONNECTOR (CASE) Fig. 9
HONDA CONNECTOR (FEMALE) Fig. 10
HONDA CONNECTOR (MALE) Fig. 11
HONDA CONNECTOR (TERMINAL LAYOUT) Fig. 12
CONNECTOR MADE BY FCI (3 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 13
CONNECTOR MADE BY FCI (6 PINS, BROWN) Fig. 14
READER PUNCHER PANEL CONNECTOR Fig. 15
READER PUNCHER CONNECTOR METAL FITTING FOR LOCK Fig. 16
FASTON TERMINAL Fig. 17
419
EACH CONNECTOR APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Fig. 1 PCR CONNECTOR
Specification : A02B–0120–K301 (PCR–E20FS+PCR–V20LA)

A02B–0120–K302 (PCR–E20FA+PCR–V20LA)
TYPE : HONDA PCR–E20FS(SOLDERING TYPE)

PCR–E20FA(CRIMP TYPE)
USAGE : GENERAL INTERFACE
MATING : HONDA PCS–E20LA(METAL)
HOUSING : HONDA PCR–V20LA(PLASTIC)
HONDA PCR–V20LB(PLASTIC)
DIMENSION
A
n
2 1.27 1
7.3
n n)1
2
Display
HONDA
7
15.1
1.27
B

21.65 11.43
420
Fig. 2 FI40 CONNECTOR
Specification : A02B–0120–K303 (FI40–2015S+FI–20–CV)
TYPE : HIROSE FI40–2015S

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE
MATING/HOUSING : HIROSE FI–20–CV
DIMENSION
16.25 15°
11.43
1.27
NOTE
This connector does not
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
have contacts for positions
5.5
2.2
1.7
9.2 11,13,15,17, and 19.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11
13.35
19.2
Tab for
shield
connection
7
4.3
3
5
8.5
1.8
A A
2.4 2.4
Section AA S 20 18 16 14 12
(Standard 1/10)
See from the back (soldering side)
10 8 6 4 2
9 7 5 3 1
421
Fig. 3 CONNECTOR CASE (HONDA PCR TYPE)
TYPE : HONDA PCR–V20LA (for 6 dia. cable)

PCR–V20LB (for 8 dia. cable)
USAGE : GENERAL INTERFACE
DIMENSION 9.5
21 11.4

HONDA
37
30

Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
422
Fig. 4 CONNECTOR CASE (HIROSE FI TYPE)
TYPE : HIROSE FI–20–CV

USAGE : PULSE CODER INTERFACE
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE
DIMENSION : FOR DIA. 8mm CABLE
Case
Cable clamp
Lock bracket
Lock lever
Set screw for cable clamp
21±0.3
11.5±0.3
9.5±0.2

37±0.5
17.5±0.3
30±0.3

423
Fig. 5 CONNECTOR CASE (FUJITSU FCN TYPE)
TYPE : FUJITSU FCN–240C20–Y/S (FOR DIA. 5.8mm CABLE)

USAGE : GENERAL
9.5
21 11.4

F
C020–02
37
30
Cable clamp
Screw
Lock lever
424
Fig. 6 AMP CONNECTOR (1) TYPE X
Specification : A02B–0120–K324 (WITH CONTACT AMP1–175218–5)
TYPE : AMP2–178288–3 (HOUSING)
USAGE : CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY INPUT

CRT/MDI POWER SUPPLY INPUT
CP1
DIMENSION
0V
CPD1 +24E
(22.96) Circuit No.
3 2 1
AMP D–3
X 22.8
16.3
16.7
0.6
7.62
3.81
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
425
Fig. 7 AMP CONNECTOR (2) TYPE Y
Specification : A02B–0120–K323 (WITH CONTACT AMP1–175218–5)
TYPE : AMP2–178288–3 (HOUSING)
USAGE : LCD POWER SUPPLY INPUT CP5

+24VPOWER SUPPLY INPUT

0V
DIMENSION
+24V
(22.96) Circuit No.
3 2 1
AMP D–3
Y
22.8
16.3
16.7
0.6
7.62
3.81
7.15
4.05
6.55
3.1
3 2 1
Circuit No.
426
Fig. 8 CONTACT FOR AMP CONNECTOR
SEPARATE : AMP1–175218–2 (GOLD COATED)

AMP1–175218–5 (TIN COATED)
REEL : AMP1–175196–2 (GOLD COATED)
AMP1–175196–5 (TIN COATED)
WIRE : AWG 16, 18, 20
In case of reel
(21.8) A-A
±0.4
2.9
±0.5
2.9
1
3
±0.5 B-B
17.8
±0.4
(9.3) (2.5) 4.2
B
2.9±0.2 A
±0.5
±0.2
5.5
3.4
–AMP
2.5±0.2
PLATING ID–MARK (φ2.6)

((1.7))
A B
PRESSER ID–MARK
427
Fig. 9 HONDA CONNECTOR (CASE)
A set of HONDA connectors and cases is available from FANUC. See the HONDA connector
(male/female) specifications.

C

A (D)
(B)
Symbol
Specification A (B) C (D)
For 20 pin 39.3 44.9 39.8 17
For 50 pin 67.9 73.5 44.8 18
Symbol Name
Outer diameter of the cable
1 Connector cover MR–20L dia.10mm max
2 Cable clamp MR–50L dia.16mm max
3 Stopper
4 Screw for cable clamp
Plug (MR–20, 50MH)
5
Jack (MR–20, 50FH)
428
Fig. 10 HONDA CONNECTOR (FEMALE)
Specification : A02B–0029–K890 (20 pins, soldering type, with cover)

A02B–0029–K892 (20 pins, crimp type, with cover)
A02B–0029–K891 (50 pins, soldering type, with cover)
A02B–0029–K893 (50 pins, crimp type, with cover)
2–M2
13
A
B

2.4
18.1

6
8.5
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
A B Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
20 pins 32.8 27.8
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
50 pins 61.4 56.4
3 Connector
429
Fig. 11 HONDA CONNECTOR (MALE)
Specification : A02B–0029–K898 (20 pins, soldering type, with cover)

A02B–0029–K900 (20 pins, crimp type, with cover and contact)
A02B–0029–K899 (50 pins, soldering type, with cover)
A02B–0029–K901 (50 pins, crimp type, with cover and contact)
2–M2
13
B
A

2.4
19.9
8.4
10.9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
A B Symbol Name
1 Cable clamp
20 pins 32.8 27.8
2 Screw 2.6dia.×8
20 pins 61.4 56.4
3 Connector
430
Fig. 12 HONDA CONNECTOR (TERMINAL LAYOUT)
D MR–50FH, MRP–50M01 (50–core, plug)
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
D MR–50FH, MRP–50F01 (50–core, plug)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
HONDA
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
D MR–20MH, MRP–20M01 (20–core, plug)
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D MR–20MH, MRP–20F01 (20–core, jack)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
HONDA
8 9 10 11 12 13
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
431
Fig. 13 CONNECTOR MADE BY FCI (3 PINS, BROWN)
Specification : A02B–0072–K893 (Housing, Soldering contact)
0.2
3
32 max.
19.06
5.08
2
1
6 0.2
7.7
30
Manufacturer : FCI JAPAN, LTD.

Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)
Connector housing for cable SMS3PK–5 Black

For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.
Cables : Cross sectional area : 0.75mm2(30/0.18)

Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm
432
Fig. 14 CONNECTOR MADE BY FCI (6 PINS, BROWN)
Specification : A02B–0081–K203 (Housing, Soldering contact)
5.08
5
38 max.
48 max.
4
3
1
2
1
7 max.
24.9
Manufacturer : FCI JAPAN, LTD.

Specification
Name (Connector maker Remarks
number)
Connector housing for cable SMS6PN–5 Brown

For details on tools
(Crimp type) RC16M–23T3
required for crimp
Contact terminals,contact the
(Solder type) RC16M–SCT3 manufacturer.
Cables : Cross sectional area : 1.27mm2(50/0.18)

Insulation diameter : 2.8mm max
Peeling length : 7.2mm
433
Fig. 15 READER PUNCHER PANEL CONNECTOR
Specification : A02B–0118–K895 (male, with cover)

A02B–0061–K201 (female. with metal fitting for lock)
H
J
A 53.0 D 7.8 G 10.7
B 38.3 E 12.6 H 1.2
C 47.0 F 41.3 J 0.8
A
C
A–A F
A B cross section 10
A
E G
D
6.1 10
2–3.05ö 10.8
10
Fig. 16 READER PUNCHER CONNECTOR METAL FITTING FOR LOCK
Small round
M2.6×P0.45 screw Interlock screw head screw
1.2 groove
6.1
12.7
1.2
6.2 Spring washer
434
Fig. 17 FASTON TERMINAL
Specification : A02B–0166–K330
Model : Faston terminal

Purpose : For connecting to the frame ground
Applicable housing : 170604–1 manufactured by AMP (Japan), Ltd. or
FVDDF2–250, type I, blue manufactured by Japan
Crimp Terminal Corporation
DIMENSION
7.62
Applicable wire :
A cross–section of 1.25 to 2.27 mm2
7.75
21.59
435
C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS
AND CABLES APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
C 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES
Connector for the PC Model: PCR–EV20MDT manufactured by HONDA TSUSHIN.

board The connector for the PC board has been specially developed support
FANUC’s high–mounting density. PCR connectors made by HONDA
TSUSHIN are compatible with the mating part of the connector and can
be selected for the cable connection.
Cable connector The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced as
standard products.
Cable General Connector HONDA PCR–E20FA

connector purpose body TSUSHIN (Separate–wire
press–mount type)
HONDA PCR–E20FS
TSUSHIN (Solder type)
Housing HONDA PCS–E20LA

TSUSHIN (Metal)
HONDA PCR–V20LA*
TSUSHIN PCR–V20LB*
(Plastic)
Pulse Connector HIROSE FI40–2015S*
coder and body ELECTRIC (Solder type with
coaxial 15 pins)
cable Housing HIROSE FI–20–CV*
ELECTRIC (Plastic)
Required tools for Separate–wire press–mount type

Connection of cable Connector : PCR–E20FA (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
connector 28–AWG wires are assembled at a time. Generally, it is much more cost
effective to assemble a cable this way than by using solder or press–mount
type connectors. The tools required are :
– Cassette for wire arrangement :
JGPS–015–1/1–20 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Base for cassette :
JGPS–014 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Press–mount locator :
PCS–K1 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
– Hand press : MFC–K1 (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.)
436
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX AND CABLES
Solder type
Connector : PCR–E20FS (HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD.) or
FI40–2015S (HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.)
Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the connector. HONDA
TSUSHIN KOGYO CO., LTD. However, soldering many of these wires
together lowers work efficiency because the pitch of the soldering portion
of the connector is too small to support it.
To increase work efficiency HIROSE ELECTRIC has developed a new

connector. By thinning out the number of pins, its soldering portion has
a pitch equal to that of the conventional HONDA TSUSHIN MF
connectors. The FI40–2015S can be used for interfacing pulse coders and
external pulse generators which require wires up to as 20 AWG thick for
connection with a +5V power source.
Cable wires Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machine tool
builder for the Power Mate.
FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interface connector.
They are listed in the table below, for your convenience when ordering
from the manufacturer.
Cable FANUC
Use Structure Manufacturer Remarks
type specification No.
10–pair General purpose Ten 0.08mm2 pairs A66L–0001–0284 #10P HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
cable OKI ELECTRIC CABLE.,
LTD.
6–pair CRT interface Six 0.08mm2 pairs A66L–0001–0295 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 20m
cable (for press–mount connector) maximum
6–core CRT interface Coaxial six cores A66L–0001–0296 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 50m
coaxial (for long distances) maximum
cable
Composite External pulse Six 0.05mm2 wires A66L–0001–0286 HITACHI CABLE, LTD. 20m
12–core generators and three 0.18mm2 OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., maximum
cable pairs LTD. (NOTE)
(NOTE)
NOTE
The Power Mate can feed power to an external pulse
generator operating on a +5 V power supply, provided the
power supply rating does not exceed 0.35 A. An
appropriate cable must be selected, taking the supply
voltage drop caused by the cable resistance into
consideration. When power is fed from the Power Mate
using A66L–0001–0286 cable, the cable length must not
exceed 20 m. If a longer cable is required, a cable having
a lower resistance (for example, A66L–0001–0157) should
be used.
437
10–pair cable
D Specifications Item Unit Specifications

Product No. – A66L–0001–0284#10P
Manufacturer HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., LTD.
Rating – 60°C 30V:UL2789
80°C 30V:UL80276
Material Conductor – Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper
(ASTM B–286)
Insulator – Cross–linked vinyl
Shield braid – Tinned annealed copper wire
Sheath – Heat–resistant oilproof vinyl
Number of pairs Pairs 10
Conductor Size AWG 28
Structure Conduc- 7/0.127
tors
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.38
Insulator Thickness mm 0.1
Thinnest portion : 0.08 (3.1mm)
(approx.)
Core style (rating) mm UL15157(80°C, 30V)
Twisted Outside diameter mm 1.16
pair (approx.)
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Collect the required number of twisted pairs
into a cable, then wrap binding tape around
the cable. To make the cable round, apply a
cable separator as
required.
Lay diameter (approx.) mm 3.5
Drain wire Conduc- Hitachi Cable : Not available
Oki Electric Cable : Available,10/0.12
tors
/mm
Shield Element wire mm 0.12
braid diameter
Braid density % 85 or more
Sheath Color – Black
Thickness mm 1.0
(approx.)
Standard length m 200
Packing method – Bundle
Electrical Electric resis- Ω/km 233 or less
perfor- tance(at 20C°)
mance
Insulation resis- MΩ–km 10 or less
tance (at 20C°)
Dielectric V/min. 300
strength (AC)
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC
of UL standards.
438
D Cable structure The cable structure is shown below.
Wire identification table (HITACHI)

Insulator color
Wire No. First Second
wire wire
1
Twisted 1 Blue White
10 2 pair wire
2 Yellow White
5
Binding 3 Green White
9 3 tape
4 Red White
6 Shield
braid 5 Purple White
8 4
Sheath 6 Blue Brown
7
7 Yellow Brown
8 Green Brown
9 Red Brown
10 Purple Brown
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
Fig.C (a) Cable made by Hitachi Cable
Wire identification table (OKI)
Dot mark
Insulator color
color
(1 pitch)
Dot mark
Pair No.
Drain First Second
wire wire wire
1
Twisted
1 Orange Red Black
10 2 –pair 2 Gray Red Black

wire
6
Binding 3 White Red Black
tape
9 3 4 Yellow Red Black
Shield
7
braid
5 Pink Red Black
8 4
Sheath
6 Orange Red Black
5
7 Gray Red Black
8 White Red Black
9 Yellow Red Black

10 Pink Red Black
The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the numbers in the table at right.
Fig.C (b) Cable made by Oki Electric Cable
439
12–core cable
D Specifications
Item Unit Specifications

Product No. – A66L–0001–0286
Manufacturer – HITACHI CABLE, LTD.
OKI ELECTRIC CABLE., LTD.
Rating – 80°C, 30V
Material Conductor,braid–shielded wire,drain wire – Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C3152)
Insulator – Heat–resistant flame–retardant vinyl
Sheath – Oilproof, heat–resistant, flame–retardant vinyl
Number of wires (wire ons.) Cores 6 (1 to 6) 6 (three pairs)
(7 to 9)
Con- Size mm2 0.5 0.18
ductor
Structure Conduc- 20/0.18 7/0.18
tors
/mm
Outside diameter mm 0.94 0.54
Insula- Standard thickness (The minimum thick- mm 0.25 0.2
tor ness is at least 80% of the standard thick-
ness.)
Outside diameter mm 1.50 0.94
Twisted Outside diameter mm 1.88
pair
Direction of lay – Left
Pitch mm 20 or less
Lay – Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer is right–
twisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer.
Apply a cable separator as required.
Lay diameter mm 5.7
Drain Size mm2 0.3
wire
Structure Wires/ 12/0.18
mm
Shield Element wire diameter mm 0.12
braid
Thickness mm 0.3
Braid density % 70
Sheath Color – Black
Standard thickness (The minimum thick- mm 1.1
ness is at least 85% of the standard thick-
ness.)
Outside diameter mm 8.5Max. 9.0(1)
Standard length m 100
Packing method – Bundle
Electri- Electric resistance (at 20C°) (wire nos.) W/km 39.4(1 to 6) 113(7 to 9)
cal per-
per
for- Insulation resistance (at 20C°) MW–km 15
mance Dielectric strength (AC) V/min. 500
Flame resistance – Shall pass flame resistance test VW–1SC of UL standards,
NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other
than the drain wire.
D Markings on cable D Name or symbol of the manufacturer

D Manufacturing year
440
Drain wire
Red
0.18–mm2 twisted pair wire
7
6 White 1
Red Black 0.5–mm2 insulated wire
Red Binding tape

5 2
Red
8 Black
Black Shield braid
4 3
Red Black Black Sheath
9
White
The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.
441
6–core coaxial cable

D Specifications Item Unit Description
Specification – A66L–0001–0296
Manufacture – HITACHI CABLE CO., LTD.
Manufacture’s specification – CO–IREFV(0)–CX–75
Number of Conductors Core 6
Inside Con- Size mm2 0.14

ductor
Components Conduc- 7/0.16
tors
(PCS)/m
m
Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire
Diameter mm 0.48
Insulator Material (Color) – Polyethylene (White)
Thickness mm 0.17
Diameter mm 1.90
Outside Material – Tin–coated Soft Copper Wire (Rolled)

Conductor
Diameter of Com- mm 0.1
ponent–Wire
Density % 90 or more
Diameter mm 2.10
Jacket Material – Vinyl
Color – Black. White. Red. Green. Yellow. Blue
Thickness mm 0.15
Diameter mm 2.4
Twisted Assembly Diameter mm 7.2
Thickness of Paper Tape mm 0.05
Sheath Material, Color – Oil Tight Vinyl Black
Thickness mm 0.7
Finish Diameter mm 8.7(MAX:9.0)
Conductor Resistance (20C°) W/km 143
Withstand Voltage (A.C.) V/min. 1000
Insulation Resistance (20C°) MW–km 1000
Impedance (10MHz) W 75±5
Standard Capacitance (1MHz) nF/km 56
Standard Attention (10MHz) dB/km 53
Standard Length m 200
Package form – Bundle
442
Coaxial Core
White
Thread
Yellow Black
Blue Red
Tape
Green
Sheath
Inside Conductor
Insulator
Outside Conductor (Rolled)
Jacket
443
Cable for DI/DO

Conductor Electric
characteristic
Sheath Total Desig-
Name thick- outer Conduc- nation
Com-
Outer ness dia. tor Allowable (Note)
posi-
dia. resis- current
tion
tance
A66L
Cable A
ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.5mm ø10.0mm 110W/km 1.6A –0001
(10–pair)
–0041
A66L
Cable B
ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.7mm ø12.5mm 106W/km 1.6A –0001
(50 core)
–0042
Cable C ø0.55mm 7/0.18 1.6A A66L

(5–pair
(5– air, 116W/km –0001
1 0mm
1.0mm ø11 0mm
ø11.0mm
6 core) ø1.5mm 50/0.18 16W/km 10A –0157
Total shield
Individual shield
(for tachogenerator
signal)
For power (50/0.18)

(+5V×3.0V×3)
Pair cable (7/0.18)
444
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX D. INTERFACE CABLE
D INTERFACE CABLE
Cables
Cable No. Application Maximum allowable length (m)
J6 DPL/MDI cable: M4 – DPL/MDI unit 40m
J22 I/O Link cable: JD1A1 – I/O card 10m
J24 Power cable: 24 V power supply – I/O card, CRT/MDI unit *
J88 DI/DO cable: CM51 – Power magnetics cabinet 50m
J89 DI/DO cable: CM52 – Power magnetics cabinet 50m
J90 DI/DO cable: CMB3 – Power magnetics cabinet 50m
J91 DI/DO cable: CMB4 – Power magnetics cabinet 50m
J30, J48 Power cable: 24 V power supply – Power Mate–D
J93 1st axis servo amplifier cable: JS1 – JSnB 50m
J94 2nd axis servo amplifier cable: JS2 – JSnB 50m
J95 3rd axis servo amplifier cable: JS3 – JSnB 50m
J96 4th axis servo amplifier cable: JS4 – JSnB 50m
J40 External pulse generator cable: JA12 – External pulse generator 50m
J42 Punch panel: JD5 – I/O device 50m
J43, J45 CRT/MDI cable: JD14 – JD13 50m
J47 Mode selection cable: JN1 – Switch 10m
J92 DI/DO cable: JE1 – Power magnetics cabinet 50m
NOTE
Each maximum allowable cable length relates to the use of the cable for an interface signal.
For some cables (such as that for a pulse coder) that contain a power cable, however, an
additional limit, based on a drop in the supply voltage, is imposed.
445
D. INTERFACE CABLE APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
FANUC provides the following interface cables.

Application Name Specifications Code Length
Magnetic cabinet
Operator’s panel
MR–50LMH MR–50LFH
J88 ø12.5 A02B–

J89 0029– 7m
J90 K801
Cabtyre cable 50 cores,

shole shielded (CableB)
Magnetic cabinet
Operator’s panel
MR–20LFH MR–50LMH
ø10
A02B–
J91 0029– 7m
K802
Cabtyre cable 10pair whole

shielded (Cable A)
Cable for DPL/MDI A02B–

EMI–immune molded interface cable (by Oki Densen) 0118– 2m
DPL/MDI K820
A02B–
J6 0118– 7m
K821
D–SUB15 (male) A02B–

0118– 14m
Power Mate K822
Signal cable for the I/O

card or I/O Link PCR–E20FA or F5
A02B–
0124– 1m
K820
J22
A03B–
Cable in which ten twisted pairs are
0807– 5m
shielded all together
K801
A66L–0001–0284#10P
446
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX D. INTERFACE CABLE

+24V power cable for
I/O cards or I/O units
Connector SMS3PNS
Crimp terminal
T3–2
A02B–
J24 0124– 5m
K831
Vinyl wire
+24V power cable for

the CRT/MDI or the
CNC Crimp terminal
T3–2
AMP2–178288–3
A02B–
J30
0124– 5m
J48
K830
Servo amplifier cable

for the C–series servo
amplifier PCR–E20F
J93 A02B–
to 0120– 5m
J98 K800
10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve

A66L–0001–0284#10P
CRT link cable

A02B–
(when two or more
0124– 50cm
blocks run PCR–E20F
K810
simultaneously)
A02B–
J43,
0124– 5m
J44
K811
10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve A02B–

A66L–0001–0284#10P 0124– 10m
K812
447
D. INTERFACE CABLE APPENDIX B–62683EN/03

CRT link cable
A02B–
(when only one block
PCR–E20F 0124– 50cm
runs)
K813
A02B–
J45,
0124– 5m
J46
K814
10–pair cable shielded with one sleeve A02B–

A66L–0001–0284#10P 0124– 10
K815
I/O cable A02B–

0124– 30cm
HIROSE HIF3BA–34D–2.54R
K840
A02B–
J86,
0124– 50cm
J87
K841
A02B–
To flat cable 0124– 1m
K841
448
E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX PARAMETERS
E DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS
449
PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Procedure for displaying and setting parameters
Procedure for CRT/MDI 1 Set 1 for PARAMETER WRITE to enable writing. See the procedure
for enabling/disabling parameter writing described below.
2 Press function key SYSTEM .
3 Press chapter selection soft key [PARAM] to display the parameter

screen.
PARAMETER (SETTING) O0010 N00002
0000 SEQ INI ISO TVC

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0001
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0002
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0012 MIR
X 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Y 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
>_
MDI **** *** *** ALM
[ PARAM ][ DGNOS ][ PMC ][ SYSTEM ][ (OPRT) ]
4 Move the cursor to the parameter number to be set or displayed in

either of the following ways:
⋅ Enter the parameter number and press soft key [NO.SRH] .
⋅ Move the cursor to the parameter number using the page keys,
PAGE
PAGE
and , and cursor keys, , , , and .
5 To set the parameter, enter a new value with numeric keys and press
soft key [INPUT]. The parameter is set to the entered value and the
value is displayed.
6 Set 0 for PARAMETER WRITE to disable writing.
450
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX PARAMETERS
Procedure for DPL/MDI Press the <DGNOS/PARAM> key to toggle between the parameter
screen and diagnostic screen.
Parameter screen Diagnostic screen

>&0001 01010101 >@0800 0
&0002 01010101 @0801 0
Display of PMC data ã â Key operation
>D0000 00000000
D0001 00000000
Procedure for enabling/displaying parameter writing
Procedure for CRT/MDI 1 Select the MDI mode or enter state emergency stop.
2 Press function key OFFSET

SETTING .
3 Press soft key [SETING] to display the setting screen.
SETTING (HANDY) O0001

N00000
PARAMETER WRITE = 1 (0:DISABLE 1:ENABLE)
TV CHECK = 0 (0:OFF 1:ON)
PUNCH CODE = 1 (0:EIA 1:ISO)
INPUT UNIT = 0 (0:MM 1:INCH)
I/O CHANNEL = 0 (0–1:CHANNEL NO.)
SEQUENCE NO. = 0 (0:OFF 1:ON)
>_
MDI **** *** *** ALM
[ OFFSET ][ SETING ][ ][ ][ (OPRT) ]
4 Move the cursor to PARAMETER WRITE using cursor keys.

5 Press soft key [(OPRT)], then press [1: ON] to enable parameter
writing.
At this time, the CNC enters the P/S alarm state (No. 100).
6 After setting parameters, return to the setting screen. Move the cursor
to PARAMETER WRITE and press soft key [(OPRT)] , then press
[0: OFF].
7 Depress the RESET key to release the alarm condition. If alarm No. 000
has occurred, however, turn off the power supply and then turn it on,
otherwise the alarm is not released.
451
PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Procedure for DPL/MDI 1 Press the <VAR> key to display the settings screen.
2 Use the cursor keys to position the cursor at PWE.
3 Press the <1> key and the <INPUT> key, in that order, to enable
parameters to be written. The CNC unit will generate P/S alarm 100.
4 Press the <DGNOS/PARAM> key to display the parameter screen.
>&0001 00000000
&0002 00000000
5 Move the cursor to the number of the parameter to change.

Method 1
Use the cursor keys. The cursor will continue to move while a cursor
key is being pressed.
Method 2
Press the following keys and enter data in the order shown:
<No.><(parameter No.)><INPUT>
6 Enter a parameter value with the data input keys.
7 Press the <INPUT> key. The parameter value is input and displayed.
8 After all parameters have been set and confirmed, return to the
settings screen and set PWE to 0.
9 Normally, in order to release the alarm state, press the <CAN> key.
However, in order to release alarm No. 000, the power needs to be
turned off and then on again.
Explanations
D Parameters that require Some parameters are not effective until the power is turned off and on
turning off the power again after they are set. Setting such parameters causes alarm 000. In this
case, turn off the power, then turn it on again.
D Setting data Some parameters can be set on the setting screen if the parameter list
indicates ”Setting entry is acceptable”. Setting 1 for PARAMETER
WRITE is not necessary when these parameters are set on the setting
screen.
452
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS
F INPUTTING PARAMETERS
Parameters are loaded into the memory of the controller unit from a floppy
or Handy File. The input format is the same as the output format. When
a parameter is loaded which has the same data number as a parameter
already registered in the memory, the loaded parameter replaces the
existing parameter.
453
F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Inputting parameters
Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1 Make sure the input device is ready for reading.
2 When using a floppy, search for the required file according to the
procedure.
3 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s
panel.

SETTING .
5 Press the soft key[SETING]for chapter selection.

6 Enter 1 in response to the prompt for writing parameters (PWE).
Alarm P/S100 (indicating that parameters can be written) appears.
7 Press soft key SYSTEM .
8 Press chapter selection soft key[PARAM].

9 Press soft key[(OPRT)].
10 Press the rightmost soft key (next–menu key).
11 Press soft keys[READ]and[EXEC].
Parameters are read into memory. Upon completion of input, the
”INPUT” indicator at the lower–right corner of the screen disappears.

SETTING .
13 Press soft key[SETING] for chapter selection.

14 Enter 0 in response to the prompt for writing parameters.
15 Turn the power to the Power Mate back on.
16 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine operator’s
panel.
Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine side.
2 The parameter screen is selected by pressing the <PARAM> key.
3 Set PWE on the setting screen to 1. Alarm PS100 is displayed at this
time.
4 Perform the same operation as for program input.
5 NC parameters are input to the memory by this operation. Normally,
alarm PS000 will activate after completion of parameter reading.
Normally, P/S alarm 000 is generated after parameters have finished
being read in.
6 Set PWE on the setting parameter to 0.
7 Turn on the Power–Mate power again if PS alarm activates.
8 Release the emergency stop button of machine side.
454
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
G OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS
All parameters are output in the defined format from the memory of the
.controller to a floppy or Handy file.
455
G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
Outputting parameters
Procedure (CRT/MDI) 1 Make sure the output device is ready for output.
2 Specify the punch code system (ISO or EIA) using a parameter.
3 Select the EDIT mode.
4 Press function key SYSTEM .
5 Press chapter selection soft key[PARAM].

6 Press soft key[(OPRT)].
7 Press rightmost soft key (next–menu key).
8 Press soft keys[PUNCH]and[EXEC].
All parameters are output in the defined format.
Procedure (DPL/MDI) 1 Select the EDIT mode.

2 Select the parameter display screen by <PARAM> key.
3 Press the <WRITE> key.
4 Execute file heading when required.
Which file the parameter is output to, are same as outputting of
programs.
5 While parameter, is being output, the display appears as below.
>C000 00000000
WRITE
6 In order to stop output of data from a tape before it has finished,

turn on external reset signal ERS (bit 7 of G008).
Once data output from a tape has been stopped, it cannot be
restarted.
Explanations
D Output format Output format is as follows:
N ... P .... ;
N ... A1P ..... A2P ... AnP ... ;
N ... P ... ;
N ... : Parameter No.

A ... : Axis No.(n is the number of control axis)
P ... : Parameter setting value .
D Output file name When the floppy disk directory display function is used, the name of the
output file is PARAMETER.
456
B–62683EN/03 APPENDIX H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
H DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS
Parameters are classified by data type as follows:
Table H Data Types and Valid Data Ranges of Parameters

Data type Valid data range Remarks
Bit
0 or 1
Bit axis
Byte 0 to127 In some parameters, signs
are ignored.
ignored
Byte axis 0 to255
Word
0 to32767
Word axis
2-word
0 to99999999
2-word axis
NOTE
1 For the bit type and bit axis type parameters, a single data
number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a different
meaning.
2 The axis type allows data to be set separately for each
control axis.
3 The valid data range for each data type indicates a general
range. The range varies according to the parameters. For
the valid data range of a specific parameter, see the
explanation of the parameter.
(1) Notation of bit type and bit axis type parameters

[Example]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Data No. Data #0 to #7 are bit positions.

(2) Notation of parameters other than bit type and bit axis type
1023 Servo axis number of a specific axis
Data No. Data
457
H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS APPENDIX B–62683EN/03
D classification of Parameters of Power Mate-H are classified in order as follows.

parameters H.1 Parameters of setting (from data number 0000)
H.2 Parameters of reader/punch interface and remote buffer (from data
number 0100)
H.3 Parameters of axis control/increment system (from data number
1000)
H.4 Parameters of coordinates (from data number 1200)
H.5 Parameters of stroke limit (from data number 1300)
H.6 Parameters of feedrate (from data number 1400)
H.7 Parameters of acceleration/deceleration control (from data number
1600)
H.8 Parameters of servo (from data number 1800)
H.9 Parameters of DI/DO (from data number 3000)
H.10 Parameters of CRT/MDI, display, and EDIT (from data number
3100)
H.11 Parameters of programs (from data number 3400)
H.12 Parameters of tool compensation (from data number 5000)
H.13 Parameters of custom macros (from data number 6000)
H.14 Parameters of pattern data input (from data number 6100)
H.15 Parameters of skip, picture, ITP function (from data number 6200)
H.16 Parameters of displaying operation time and number of parts (from
data number 6700)
H.17 Parameters of external pulse input (from data number 7100 and
from data number 7700)
H.18 Parameters of Reference point setting function by pressing axis to
stopper (from data number 7180)
H.19 Parameters of axis control by PMC (from data number 8000)
WARNING
Parameters not described in this document may appear on
the Power Mate–H screen.
Such parameters are invalid. Do not set data for them, or
otherwise an unexpected operation may result.
458
H.1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
SETTING
Setting entry is acceptable.
Data type: Bit
TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed
ISO Code used for data output
0: EIA code
1: ISO code
INI Unit of input
0: In mm
1: In inches
SEQ Automatic insertion of sequence numbers
0: Not performed
1: Performed
NOTE
When a program is prepared by using MDI keys in the part
program storage and edit mode, a sequence number can
automatically be assigned to each block in set increments.
Set the increment to parameter 3216.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
0012 RMVx MIRx

Data type: Bit axis
MIRx Mirror image about each axis
0: Mirror image is off.
1: Mirror image is on.
RMVx Specifies whether to perform controlled axis cancellation
foreach axis.
0: Controlled axis cancellation is not performed.
1: Controlled axis cancellation is performed.
NOTE
RMVx functions when the RMBx bit of parameter No. 1005
is set to 1.
459
0020 I/O CHANNEL: Selection of an input/output device

Data type: Byte
Valid data range: 0 to 1
I/O CHANNEL An input/output device used is selected.

0: The device on channel 1 is selected.
(Input/output device connected to JD5 on the
main body of Power Mate)
1: The device on channel 1 is selected.
(Input/output device connected to JD5 on the
main body of Power Mate)
Power Mate
Channel 1
JD5
RS-232-C
Reader/
puncher
I/O CHANNEL=0
or
I/O CHANNEL=1
Fig.H.1 I/O Unit Selection
NOTE
1 The input/output device used can be selected (parameter
0020) also on the setting screen. Using the setting screen
is a more common method for selecting the device.
2 The specified data, such as a baud rate and the number of
stop bits, of an input/output device connected to a specific
channel must be set in parameters for that channel in
advance. See Section H.2 “Parameters of Reader/Puncher
Interface.”
I/O CHANNEL=0 and I/O CHANNEL=1 both refer to
channel 1. For each, parameters to set the baud rate, the
number of stop bits, and other data are provided separately.
3 JD5 is number of connector on the printed circuit boards.
460
H.2 Two combinations of parameters to specify the input/output device data

are provided.
PARAMETER OF
The following shows the interrelation between the reader/punch interface
READER/PUNCH parameters for the channels.
INTERFACE
Input/output channel number (parameter 0020)
0101 Stop bit and other data
0020 I/O CHANNEL I/O CHANNEL=0

0102 Number specified for the input/output device
(channel 1)
Specify a channel for 0103 Baud rate
an input/output device.
I/O CHANNEL 0111 Stop bit and other data
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1 I/O CHANNEL=1
0112 Number specified for the input/output device
(channel 1)
0113 Baud rate
Fig.H.2 I/O Channel Number Settings
(1) Parameters common to all channels

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
0100 ENS NCR CTV

Data type: Bit
CTV Character counting for TV check in control-out state (or
comment part).
0: Performed
1: Not performed
NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code
0: LF, CR, CR are output.
1: Only LF is output.
ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of
EIAcode
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.
(2) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
0101 NFD ASI SB2
Data type: Bit

SB2 The number of stop bits
0: 1
1: 2
ASI Code used at data input
0: EIA or ISO code (automatically distinguished)
1: ASCII code
461
NFD Feed before and after the data at data output

0: Output
1: Not output
NOTE
Set NFD to 1 at normal usually.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
Data type: Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the
I/O CHANNEL is set to 0, with one of the set values listed in Table
H.2 (a).
Table H.2 (a) Set Value and Specified Number of
Input/Output Device
Set value Number specified for input/output device
0 RS232C (For other than the following for example connect to
personal computer etc. , set 0.)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC Handy File
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 Not used
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud rate (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)
Data type: Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when the I/O
CHANNEL is set to 0, with a set value in Table H.2 (b).
Table H.2 (b) Baud Rate Settings
Set value Baud rate
7 600
8 1200
9 2400
10 4800
11 9600
12 19200
462
(3) Parameters for channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=1)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
0111 NFD ASI SB2
Data type: Bit

These parameters are used when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1. The
meanings of the bits are the same as for parameter 0101.
0112 Number specified for the input/output device (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
Data type: Byte

Set the number specified for the input/output device used when the
I/O CHANNEL is set to 1, with one of the set values listed in Table
H.2 (a).
0113 Baud rate (when I/O CHANNEL is set to 1)
Data type: Byte

Set the baud rate of the input/output device used when I/O
CHANNEL is set to 1, with a value in Table H.2 (b).
463
H.3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1001 INM
AXIS CONTROL/
INCREMENT SYSTEM
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off
before operation is continued.
Data type: Bit

INM Least command increment on the linear axis
0: In mm (millimeter machine)
1: In inches (inch machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1002 DLZ JAX
Data type: Bit

JAX Number of axes controlled simultaneously in manual
operation
0: 1 axis
1: 3 axes
DLZ Function setting the reference position without dog for all
axes
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTE
Availability or disability of function setting the dogless
reference position can be specified for each axis by DLZx,
bit 1 of parameter 1005 , when DLZ set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1004 IPR ISC ISA
Data type: Bit

ISA, ISC The least input increment and least command increment
are set.
ISA ISC Least input and least command increments Symbol
0 0 0.001 mm, 0.001 deg or 0.0001 inch IS-B
1 0 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg or 0.001 inch IS-A
NOTE
Be sure to set 0 for Power Mate–H.
IPR Whether the least input increment for each axis is set to a value
10 times as large as the least command increment is specified.
0: The least input increment is not set to a value 10 times as
large as the least command increment.
464
1: The least input increment is set to a value 10 times as large

as the least command increment.
If IPR is set to 1, the least input increment is set as follows:
Input increment Least input increment
IS-B 0.01 mm, 0.01 deg or 0.001 inch
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1005 RMBx DLZx ZRNx
Data type: Bit axis

ZRNx When a command specifying the movement except for G28
is issued in automatic operation (AUTO or MDI) when a
return of axis to the reference position has not been performed
since the power was turned on
0: An alarm is generated. (PS224 : return to the reference
position)
1: An alarm is not generated.
DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs for
each axis.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTE
When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 0, parameter 1005 is
enabled. When DLZ of parameter 1002 is 1, parameter
1005 is disabled, and the function for setting the reference
position without dogs is enabled for all axes.
RMBx Specifies whether controlled axis cancellation for each axis is

to be enabled or disabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
NOTE
When RMBx is 1 , the setting to cancel the axis is available
in parameter No. 0012#7 RMVx.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1006 ZMIx ROTx
NOTE
When this parameter is changed, turn off the power before
continuing operation.
Data type: Bit axis

ROTx Either the linear axis or rotation axis is set.
0: Linear axis
1: Rotation axis
465
NOTE
For the rotation axis, switching between inch and mm units
is not performed. When the rotation axis is set, the machine
coordinate system is normalized to the range 0 to 360
degrees. Automatic return to the reference position (G28
and G30) is performed in the direction executed by the
manual reference position return, and the amount of travel
is within one rotation. A normalized value can be changed
by setting a value for parameter No. 1260.
ZMIx The direction of reference position return and the direction of

initial backlash at power-on
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1008 RRLx RABx ROAx
Data type: Bit axis

ROAx The roll over function of a rotation axis is
0: Invalid
1: Valid
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for
which ROTx, #0 of parameter No. 1006, is set to 1)
RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0: In which the distance to the target is longer.
1: In which the distance to the target is shorter.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
RRLx Relative coordinates are

0: Not rounded by the amount of shift per rotation
1: Rounded by the amount of shift per rotation
NOTE
1 RRLx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
2 Assign the amount of the shift per one rotation in parameter
No. 1260.
466
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1009 ZEXx
Data type: Bit axis

ZEXx 0: Disables the reference position external setting function.
1: Enables the reference position external setting function.
This function moves the machine to the reference position by jog feed
and sets the reference position external setting signal to ”1” during the
reference position return mode, thereby enabling the absolute pulse
coder to be set to the reference position.Using this function therefore
requires that bit 5 (APCx) of parameter No. 1815 must be 1 so that
the absolute pulse coder and the related functions are enabled.
Reference position Reference position
setting signal setting finish signal
G206.6 ZPEXT1 First axis F120.0 ZRF1 First axis
G207.6 ZPEXT2 Second axis F120.1 ZRF2 First axis
G208.6 ZPEXT3 Third axis F120.2 ZRF3 First axis
G209.6 ZPEXT4 Fourth axis F120.3 ZRF4 First axis
G210.6 ZPEXT5 Fifth axis F120.4 ZRF5 First axis
G211.6 ZPEXT6 Sixth axis F120.5 ZRF6 First axis
1010 Number of CNC-controlled axes
Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 1 to 6 the number of controlled axes
Set the maximum number of axes that can be controlled by the CNC.
[Example]
Suppose that from the first axis to the fourth axis are corresponded
to X axis , Y axis , Z axis , B axis in order. and that they are
controlled as follows:
X axis,Y axis,Z axis : Controlled by the CNC and PMC
B axis : Controlled by the PMC
Then set this parameter to 3 (the first axis: A axis).
1011 Number of controlled axes
Data type: Byte

Range of valid data: 1 to 6
The maximum number of controlled axes must be specified.
1020 Name of the axis used for programming for each axis
Data type: Byte axis

Set the name of the program axis for each control axis, with one of
the values listed in the following table:
Axis name Set value Axis name Set value Axis name Set value
X 88 U 85 A 65
Y 89 V 86 B 66
Z 90 W 87 C 67
467
NOTE
The same axis name cannot be assigned to more than one
axis.
1022 Setting of each axis in the basic coordinate system

To determine the following planes used for circular interpolation,
each control axis is set to one of the basic three axes X, Y, and Z, or
an axis parallel to the X, Y, or Z axis.
G17: Plane Xp-Yp
G18: Plane Zp-Xp
G19: Plane Yp-Zp
Only one axis can be set for each of the three basic axes X, Y, and Z,
but two or more parallel axes can be set.
Set value Meaning
0 Neither the basic three axes nor a parallel axis
1 X axis of the basic three axes
2 Y axis of the basic three axes
3 Z axis of the basic three axes
5 Axis parallel to the X axis
6 Axis parallel to the Y axis
7 Axis parallel to the Z axis
1023 Number of the servo axis for each axis
NOTE
When this parameter is set, power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

Set the servo axis for each control axis.
Generally, the same number shall be assigned to the control axis and
the corresponding servo axis.
1 Axis to be connected to JS1 in the Power Mate–MODEL H
468
H.4
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMTERS OF
1201 ZPI ZPR
COORDINATES
Data type: Bit
ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when manual return
to the reference position is performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically
NOTE
When an absolute pulse coder is used, set ”ZPR” to 1
without fail.
ZPI Coordinates at the reference position when a coordinate

system is set automatically
0: Value set in parameter 1250 is used.
1: For input in mm, the value set in parameter 1250 is used,
or for input in inches, the value set in parameter 1251 is
used.
Coordinate value of the first reference position on each axis in the machine
1240 coordinate system
Coordinate value of the second reference position on each axis in the

1241 machine coordinate system
Coordinate value of the third reference position on each axis in the machine
1242 coordinate system
Data type: 2-word axis

Unit of data
Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit
Milimeter machine 0.01 0.001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotation axis 0.01 0.001 deg
Valid data range: 0 to "99999999

Set the coordinate values of the first to third reference positions in the
machine coordinate system.
Coordinate value of the reference position used when automatic coordinate

1250 system setting is performed

Unit of data
Linear axis (input in mm) 0.01 0.001 mm
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 inch
469
Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be

used for setting a coordinate system automatically.
Coordinate value of the reference position on each axis used for setting a
1251 coordinate system automatically when input is performed in inches

Unit of data
Linear axis (input in inches) 0.001 0.0001 inch
Valid data range: 0 to99999999

Set the coordinate value of the reference position on each axis to be
used for setting a coordinate system automatically when input is
performed in inches.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when ZPI in parameter 1201 is set
to 1.
1260 Amount of a shift per one rotation of a rotation axis
NOTE
After setting the parameter, turn off the power once and turn
it on again to operate the machine.

Unit of data
Unit of data 0.01 0.001 deg
Standard value 36000 360000

Set the amount of a shift for a rotation axis.
The coordinates of a rotary axis can be protected from overflow by
specifying an amount of movement per rotation of the rotary axis,
then setting bit 0 ROAx of parameter No. 1008 to 1 (to enable the
rotary axis rollover function)
If the command is incremental, the amount of axis movement is equal
to the value given in the command.
If the command is absolute, the end point of axis movement is
determined by coordinates rounded off to a movement amount per
rotation specified in a parameter. If a value larger than the end point
is specified, the axis moves the distance obtained by subtracting a set
movement amount per rotation from the specified value.
Setting bit 1 RABx of parameter No. 1008 to 1 enables selecting the
direction of movement in which the distance to the end point is shorter
(faster access to the end point).
Setting bit 2 RRLx of parameter No. 1008 to 1 enables rounding off
the relative coordinates to a movement amount per rotation.
470
H.5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1300 BFA LZR
STROKE LIMIT
Data type: Bit
BFA When a command that exceeds a stored stroke limit is issued
0: An alarm is generated after the stroke limit exceeded.
1: An alarm is generated before the stroke limit exceeded.
Software stroke limit alarms
Alarm 500 : The positive stored stroke limit is
exceeded.
Alarm 501 : The negative stored stroke limit is
exceeded.
LZR Checking of stored stroke limits during the time from
power-on to manual return to the reference position
0: The stroke limits are checked.
1: The stroke limits are not checked.
Coordinate value 1 of stored stroke limit 1 in the positive direction on

1320 each axis
Coordinate value 1 of stored stroke limit 1 in the negative direction on each

1321 axis

Unit of data:
Milimeter machine 0.01 0.001 mm
Inch machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Valid data range: *999999999 to +99999999

The coordinate values of stored stroke limits 1 in the positive and
negative directions are set for each axis in the machine coordinate
system. The outside area of the two limits set in the parameters is
inhibited.
NOTE
When the parameters are set as follows, the stroke
becomes infinite: parameter 1320 < parameter 1321
For movement along the axis for which infinite stroke is set,
only incremental commands are available. If an absolute
command is issued for this axis, the absolute register may
overflow, and normal movement will not result.
471
H.6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1401 RDR RFO RPD
FEEDRATE
Data type: Bit
RPD Manual rapid traverse during the period from power-on time
to the completion of return to the reference position
0: Disabled (Manual continuous feed is performed.)
1: Enabled
RFO When cutting feedrate override is 0% during rapid traverse,
0: The machine tool does not stop moving.
1: The machine tool stops moving.
RDR Dry run for rapid traverse command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1410 Dry run rate
Data type: Word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Milimeter input 1 mm/min 6 to 15000
Inch input 0.1 inch/min 6 to 6000
Rotation axis 1 deg/min 6 to 15000
Set the dry run rate when the jog feedrate is overridden by 100%.
1411 Cutting feedrate in the automatic mode at power–on

Data type: Word
Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Milimeter machine 1 mm/min 6 to 15000
When the machine requires little change in cutting feedrate during

cutting, a cutting feedrate can be specified in the parameter. This
eliminates the need to specify a cutting feedrate in the NC command
data.
472
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis
Data type: 2–word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100%
for each axis.
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis
Data type: Word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
Rapid traverse override signal
Override value
val e
ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100 %
0 1 50 %
1 0 25 %
1 1 F0
F0:Parameter No.1421
1422 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
Data type: 2–word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set the maximum cutting feedrate.
473
1423 Manual continuous feedrate for each axis (jog feedrate)

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set the continuous manual feedrate when the override of the jog
feedrate is 100%.
1424 Manual rapid traverse rate for each axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set the rate of manual rapid traverse when the rapid traverse override
is 100% for each axis.
NOTE
If 0 is set, the rate set in parameter 1420 is assumed.
1425 FL rate of return to the reference position for each axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set a feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration when return to the reference
position is performed for each axis.
474
1430 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis
Data type: 2 word axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set a maximum allowable cutting feedrate for each axis.

In cutting feed, the feedrate along each axis is clamped to the
maximum allowable cutting feedrate for each axis.
NOTE
When 0 is set for all axes, the feedrate is clamped to the
maximum allowable cutting feedrate specified in parameter
No. 1422.
1481 EXFP 1
1482 EXFP 2
1483 EXFP 3
1484 EXFP 4
1485 EXFP 5

Unit of data:
EXFP1 to EXFP5: Feedrates corresponding to feedrate switching
signals EXF1 to EXF5, respectively
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
475
H.7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1601 NCI RTO OVL
ACCELERATION/
DECELERATION Data type: Bit
CONTROL OVL Block overlap between cutting feed blocks
0: Not performed
1: Performed
RTO 0: Disables block overlap between rapid traverse blocks.
1: Enables block overlap between rapid traverse blocks.
NCI Imposition check at deceleration
0: Performed
1: Not performed (Exact stop check dose not performed too.)
Standard #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1602 FWB
Data type: Bit

FWB Selects the type of linear acceleration/deceleration used
before interpolation.
0: Type A is used
1: Type B is used
<<Type A>>
When a block specifies a change in feedrate,
acceleration/deceleration is started after entering the block where the
feedrate change is specified.
<<Type B>>
Deceleration: When a block specifies a change in feedrate,
deceleration is started in the previous block to
complete deceleration before entering the block where
the feedrate change is specified.
Acceleration: When a block specifies a change in feedrate,
acceleration is started after entering the block where
the feedrate change is specified.
476
<Example of deceleration> <Example of acceleration>
Feedrate Specified feedrate Feedrate Specified feedrate

Feedrate after acceleration/ Feedrate after acceleration/
Point 1 deceleration before interpolation deceleration before interpolation
F3 F3
Type A
F2 F2
Type B
F1 Time F1 Time
N1 N2 N1 N2
To decrease the feedrate from F3 to F2,

deceleration needs to be started at point 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1610 JGLx CTBx CTLx
Data type: Bit axis

CTLx Acceleration/deceleration (in each axis) in cutting feed
including feed in dry run
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is
applied.
NOTE
To use bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation, set this parameter to 0, and select the
acceleration/deceleration using CTBx , bit 1 of parameter
No. 1610.
Parameter
Acceleration/deceleration
CTBx CTLx
0 0 Exponential acceleration/deceleration
0 1 Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1 0 Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpola-
tion
CTBx Acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed including feed in

dry run
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is applied
(depending on the setting in CTLx , bit 0 of parameter No.
1610).
1: Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
is applied.
477
JGLx Acceleration/deceleration in manual continuous feed (jog

feed).
0: Exponential acceleration/deceleration is applied.
1: The same acceleration/deceleration as used for cutting
feed is applied (depending on which is used in cutting
feed).
Time constant T(T1) used in linear acceleration/deceleration or bell-shaped

1620 acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for each axis

Unit of data: msec
Specify a time constant used in acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse. Set this parameter to time constant T1 used in bell–shaped
acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse , and set parameter
No.1621 to time constant T2.
When the value of parameter No. 1621 (time constant T2 for
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration during rapid traverse) is 0,
linear acceleration/deceleration is used during rapid traverse. In such
a case, the value set in this parameter serves as a time constant for
linear acceleration/deceleration during rapid traverse.
<Linear acceleration/deceleration during rapid traverse> <Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration for rapid traverse>
Feedrate
Feedrate Rapid
traverse rate
Rapid
traverse rate
0
Time Time
T T T2/2 T1 T2/2
T2
T: Time constant for linear acceleration/deceleration T1: Time constant under linear acceleration/deceleration
T2: Time for corner rounding
Total time=T1+T2
Time for linear part=T1–T2
Time for curved part=T2
Set the value when the rapid traverse rate is 100%.

If it is under 100%, the total time is reduced. (Constant
acceleration method)
478
Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration for each axis during

1621 rapid traverse T2

Unit of data: msec
Specify bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration time constant T for 2
each axis in rapid-traverse.
NOTE
1 Set time constant T1 for bell-shaped acceleration /
deceleration during rapid traverse in parameter No. 1620,
and set time constant T2 in this parameter. For information
about time constants T1 and T2, see the description of
parameter No. 1620.
2 When this parameter is set to 0, linear acceleration/
deceleration is used during rapid traverse. (The time
constant specified in parameter No. 1620 is used for linear
acceleration/deceleration.)
Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, exponential accel-

1622 eration/deceleration, or linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in
cutting feed for each axis.

Unit of data: ms
(Cutting feed exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512
(Linear/bell–type acceleration/deceleration after
cutting feed interpolation)
Set the time constant used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration
exponential function acceleration/deceleration, or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in cutting feed for each
axis. Except for special applications, the same time constant must be
set for all axes in this parameter. If the time constants set for the axes
differ from each other, proper straight lines cannot be obtained.
479
Bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation
Feedrate
Time
T
T: Total time. It is constant irrespective of feed rate.
(Time constant is constant).
The curve corresponds to that T1=T/2 and T2=T/2 set

in parameter no.1620 and 1621.
FL rate of exponential function acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for

1623 each axis

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential function

acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis. Except for
special applications, this parameter must be set to 0 for all axes. If
a value other than 0 is specified, proper straight lines cannot be
obtained.
Time constant of bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration, exponential func-

1624 tion acceleration/deceleration, or linear acceleration/deceleration after inter-
polation in jog feed for each axis.

Unit of data: ms
(Jog feed exponential acceleration/deceleration)
0 to 512
(Linear/bell–type acceleration/deceleration after
jog feed compensation)
Set the time constant used for bell–shaped acceleration/deceleration,
exponential function acceleration/deceleration, or linear
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in continuous manual
feed for each axis.
480
FL rate of exponential function acceleration/deceleration in manual continu-

1625 ous feed for each axis.

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range

IS-A, IS-B
Set the lower limit (FL rate) of exponential function

acceleration/deceleration in continuous manual feed for each axis.
Parameter 1 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration

1630 before interpolation (maximum cutting feedrate in linear acceleration/decel-
eration before interpolation)
Data type: 2 word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-A, IS-B
This parameter is used to specify the acceleration used for linear

acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation.
In this parameter, set a maximum cutting feedrate in linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation. In parameter No.
1631, set a time to be used until the maximum cutting feedrate is
reached.
Feedrate
Parameter 1 Parameter 1 : Parameter No. 1630

Parameter 2 : Parameter No. 1631
Time
Parameter 2
NOTE
When either parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631 is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is disabled.
481
Parameter 2 for setting the acceleration for linear acceleration/deceleration

1631 before interpolation (time it takes to reach the maximum cutting feedrate in
linear acceleration/deceleration before interpolation)
Data type: Word

Unit of data: 1 msec
This parameter is used to specify the acceleration used for linear
acceleration/ deceleration before interpolation.
In this parameter, set the time (time constant) it takes to reach the
feedrate specified in parameter No. 1630.
Example:
Feedrate [mm/min]
4000 (When a millimeter machine is used)

Parameter No. 1630=4000
Parameter No. 1631=80
Time [msec]
80
NOTE
1 When either parameter No. 1630 or parameter No. 1631 is
set to 0, linear acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation is disabled.
2 Set parameter Nos. 1630 and 1631 to satisfy: (Parameter
No. 1630)/(Parameter No. 1631) y 5
Rapid traverse rate deceleration ratio for overlap between rapid traverse
1722 blocks

Unit of data: %
This parameter specifies a rapid traverse deceleration ratio for overlap
between rapid traverse blocks for an individual axis. This function
is enabled when bit 4 (RTO) of parameter No. 1601 is 1.
NOTE
If two consecutive rapid traverse blocks (such as G00) direct
the same axis to move in opposite directions, overlapping
does not occur.
482
H.8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
1800 CVR
SERVO
Data type: Bit
CVR When velocity control ready signal VRDY is set ON before
position control ready signal PRDY comes ON
0: A servo alarm is generated. (SV404)
1: A servo alarm is not generated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1801 CNI CCI
Data type: Bit

CCI Specifies whether to use the effective area in cutting feed
specified by parameter No. 1826 or by bit 5 (CNI) of
parameter No. 1801.
0: The setting of parameter No. 1826 is used. (This also
applies to rapid traverse.)
1: The setting of bit 5 (CNI) of parameter No. 1801 is used.
CNI Specifies how the effective area in cutting feed is to be
determined when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801 is set to 1.
0: When the next block does not specify cutting feed, the
setting of parameter No. 1826 is used. (No in–position
check is made when the next block also specifies cutting
feed.)
1: The setting of parameter No. 1827 is used, regardless of
how the next block specifies feed operation. (In rapid
traverse, the setting of parameter No. 1826 is used. In
cutting feed, the setting of parameter No. 1827 is used.)
The table below indicates the relationship between the types
of feed and parameters.
Bit 5 (CIN) of parameter No. 1801
0 1
Bit 4 (CCI) of 0 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
parameter Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
No. 1801 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
Cutting feed ! No. 1826 Cutting feed ! No. 1826
Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
1 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
Rapid traverse ! No. 1826 Rapid traverse ! No. 1826
Cutting feed Cutting feed
Cutting feed ! No. 1826 Cutting feed ! No. 1827
483
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1803 NOFUP HFUP NOFVY TAL TIP
Data type: Bit

TIP Specifies whether to perform an in-position check when
torque restriction is in effect.
0: Do not perform.
1: Perform.
TAL Specifies whether to perform an excessive error check during
movement or stopping when torque restriction is in effect.
0: Do not perform
1: Perform.
NOTE
When torque restriction is not in effect, in-position checks
and checks during stopping and movement are performed,
regardless of the setting of this parameter.
NOFVY 0: Generate a servo alarm when VRDY goes off. (SV401)

1: When VRDY goes off, do not generate a servo alarm,
but instead just wait until it goes on again. When a Set
this bit to 1 when one amplifier is shared by multiple
CNCs.
HFUP 0: Specifies a conventional follow–up type for the
absolute pulse coder.
1: Specifies a high–speed follow–up type for the absolute
pulse coder
NOFUP 0: Do not perform follow-up once for APC after system
startup.
1: Perform follow-up once for APC after system startup.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1815 APCx APZx
NOTE
When this parameter has been set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
Data type: Bit axis

APCx Position transducer
0: Other than absolute position transducer
1: Absolute position transducer (absolute pulse coder)
APZx Machine position and absolute position transducer when the
absolute position transducer is used
0: Not corresponding
1: Corresponding
484
NOTE
When an absolute position transducer is used, after primary
adjustment is performed or after the absolute position
transducer is replaced, this parameter must be set to 0,
power must be turned off and on, then manual reference
position return must be performed. This completes the
positional correspondence between the machine position
and the position on the absolute position transducer, and
sets this parameter to 1 automatically.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x
NOTE
Data type: Bit axis

DM1x to DM3x Setting of detection multiply
Set value
Detection m lyiply
mulyiply
DM3x DM2x DM1x
0 0 0 1/2
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 3/2
0 1 1 2
1 0 0 5/2
1 0 1 3
1 1 0 7/2
1 1 1 4
NOTE
When the flexibly feed gear is used, do not use these
parameters. Set the numerator and denominator of DMR
to an appropriate values in parameters 2084 and 2085
respectively.
1820 Command multiply for each axis (CMR)
NOTE

Set a command multiply indicating the ratio of the least command
increment to the detection unit for each axis.
485
Least command increment = detection unit command multiply

Relationship between the increment system and the least command
increment
Increment system IS-B Unit
Milimeter machine 0.001 mm
Inch machine 0.0001 inch
Rotation axis 0.001 deg
Setting command multiply (CMR), detection multiply (DMR), and

the capacity of the reference counter
+
CMR Error counter DA To velocity control
Least command * converter
increment
Feedback pulse
Reference DMR Position
counter Detection detector
unit
Fig.H.8 CMR, DMR, and the Capacity of the Reference Counter
Set the magnification ratios of CMR and DMR so that the weight of
positive inputs to the error counter equals that of negative inputs.
Least command increment/CMR = detection unit = feedback pulse
increment/DMR
The feedback pulse unit varies according to the type of transducer.
Feedback pulse unit = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse
coder/the number of pulses per rotation of the pulse coder
As the size of the reference counter, specify the grid interval for return
to the reference position in the grid method.
Size of the reference counter = Grid interval/detection unit
Grid interval = the amount of travel per rotation of the pulse coder
The value set in the parameter is obtained as follows:
(1) When command multiply is 1/2 to 1/27
Set value + 1 ) 100
(Command multiply)
(2) When command multiply is 1 to 48
Set value = 2 command multiply
NOTE
When command multiply is 1 to 48, the set value must be
determined so that an integer can be set for command
multiply.
486
1821 Reference counter size for each axis

Unit of data: Setting unit
Set the size of the reference counter.
NOTE
1825 Servo loop gain for each axis

Unit of data: 0.01 sec–1
Set the loop gain for position control for each axis.
When the machine performs linear interpolation, the same value must
be set for all axes. When the machine requires positioning only, the
values set for the axes may differ from one another. As the loop gain
increases, the response by position control is improved. A too large
loop gain, however, makes the servo system unstable.
The relationship between the positioning deviation (the number of
pulses counted by the error counter) and the feedrate is expressed as
follows:
Positioning deviation = feedrate/60 (loop gain)
Unit: Positioning deviation mm, inches, or deg
Feedrate mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min
Loop gain s-1
1826 Inposition width for each axis

Unit of data: Detection unit
The inposition width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified
position (the absolute value of the positioning deviation) is smaller
than the inposition width, the machine is assumed to have reached the
specified position. (The machine is in the inposition state.)
1827 Effective area for each axis in cutting feed

An effective area in cutting feed is set for each axis. This parameter
functions when bit 4 (CCI) of parameter No. 1801 is set to 1.
487
1828 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in movement

Set the positioning deviation limit in movement for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the positioning deviation limit
during movement, a servo alarm is generated, and operation is
stopped immediately (as in emergency stop).
Generally, set the positioning deviation for rapid traverse plus some
margin in this parameter.
1829 Positioning deviation limit for each axis in the stopped state

Set the positioning deviation limit in the stopped state for each axis.
If, in the stopped state, the positioning deviation exceeds the
positioning deviation limit set for movement, a servo alarm is
generated, and operation is stopped immediately (as in emergency
stop).
1832 Feed stop positioning deviation for each axis

Set the feed stop positioning deviation for each axis.
If the positioning deviation exceeds the feed stop positioning
deviation during movement, pulse distribution and
acceleration/deceleration control are stopped temporarily. When the
positioning deviation drops to the feed stop positioning deviation or
below, pulse distribution and acceleration/deceleration control are
resumed.
The feed stop function is used to reduce overshoot in
acceleration/deceleration mainly by large servo motors.
Generally, set the middle value between the positioning deviation
limit during movement and the positioning deviation at rapid traverse
as the feed stop positioning deviation.
1850 Grid shift for each axis

A grid shift is set for each axis.
To shift the reference position, the grid can be shifted by the amount
set in this parameter. Up to the maximum value counted by the
reference counter can be specified as the grid shift.
NOTE
488
1851 Backlash compensating value for each axis

Valid data range: *9999 to +9999
Set the backlash compensating value for each axis.
When the unit moves in the direction opposite to the reference
position return direction after the power is turned on, the first
backlash compensation is performed.
1855 Current restriction override value for each axis

Specify the current restriction override value for each axis. The actual
override value is determined by the following equation:
Override value = (parameter No. 1855) * 100/255 (%)
(Special Note)
When this value is set to 0, torque restriction is not performed
by this parame-ter. (In this case, the torque value set by the DI
signals and PMC go into effect.)
1872 Value for checking the degree of position deviation of the servo

Value for checking the degree of position deviation of the servo.
When the actual position deviation exceeds this value, signals
SVER1 , SVER2 , SVER3 , SVER4 , SVER5 and SVER6 go on.
1880 Abnormal alarm detection alarm timer
Data type: Word

(If 0 is specified, 200 ms is assumed to be
specified.)
This parameter specifies the time lag from when an abnormal load is
detected to when a servo
alarm is issued. A fractional time below 8 ms is rounded up.
489
The following parameters are not explained in this manual, therefore see
parameter manual of servo for details;
No. Data type Contents

2000 Bit axis PGEXPD DGPRM PLC01
2001 Bit axis AMR7 AMR6 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMR0
2002 Bit axis
2003 Bit axis VOFST OVSCMP BLENBL IPSPRS PIENBL OBENBL TGALRM
2004 Bit axis DLY1 DLY0 TRW1 TRW0 TIB0 TIB1
2005 Bit axis BRKCTL FEEDFD
2006 Bit axis DCBEMF NODEL PKVER
ACCFB
2007 Bit axis
2008 Bit axis
2009 Bit axis BLSTP BLCUT ADBLSH SERDMY
2010 Bit axis BLTEN
2011 Bit axis PLCRST
2012 Bit axis VCMD2 VCMD1 MSFEN
2013 Bit axis (Reserve)
2015 Bit axis TDOUT SSG1 PGTWN
2016 Bit axis ABNTDT
2019 Bit axis
2020 Word axis Motor type
2021 Word axis Load intertia ratio (LDINT)
2022 Word axis Direction of motor rotation (DIRCTL)
2023 Word axis Number of velocity detection feedback pulses (PULCO)
2024 Word axis Number of position detection feedback pulses (PPLS)
2025 Word axis
2026 Word axis
2027 Word axis
2028 Word axis Position gain change effective speed(TWNSP)
2029 Word axis Acceleration effective speed for integral function at low speed (INTSP1)
2030 Word axis Deceleration effective speed for integral function at low speed (INTSP2)
2031 Word axis (Reserve)
490

2040 Word axis Current loop gain (PK1)
2043 Word axis Velocity loop gain (PK1V)
2045 Word axis Incomplete integral coefficient (PK3V)
2047 Word axis Velocity control observer parameter (POA1)
2048 Word axis Improvement of velocity control backlash compensation (BLCMP)
2049 Word axis Not used
2050 Word axis Velocity control observer parameter (POK1)
2051 Word axis Velocity control observer parameter (POK2)
2052 Word axis Not used
2053 Word axis Compensation for current non–operating area (PRMAX)
2054 Word axis Compensation for current non–operating area (PDDP)
2055 Word axis Compensation for current non–operating area (PHYST)
2056 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFCMP)
2057 Word axis Current phase control (PVPA)
2058 Word axis Current phase control (PALPH)
2059 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFBAS)
2060 Word axis Torque limit (TQLIM)
2061 Word axis Back electromotive force compensation (EMFLMT)
2062 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC1)
2063 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVC2)
2064 Word axis TG alarm level (TGALMLV)
2065 Word axis Overload protection coefficient (OVCLMT)
2066 Word axis PK2VAUX
2067 Word axis Torque command filter (TCFIL)
2068 Word axis Feed–forward coefficient (FALPH)
2069 Word axis Feed–forward filter coefficient (VFFLT)
2070 Word axis Backlash compensation acceleration parameter (ERBLN)
2071 Word axis Backlash compensation acceleration parameter (PBLCT)
2072 Word axis
2073 Word axis
2074 Word axis Velocity–dependent current loop gain (AALPH)
2075 Word axis
2076 Word axis Acceleration feedback gain (WKAC)
2077 Word axis Overshoot preventive counter (OSCTP)
2078 Word axis
2079 Word axis
2080 Word axis
2081 Word axis
2082 Word axis Backlash acceleration end amount (BLEND)
491

2083 Word axis Brake control hold time (MOFCT)
2084 Word axis Numerator of DMR when the flexibly feed gear is used
2085 Word axis Denominator of DMR when the flexibly feed gear is used
2086 Word axis Rated current parameter (RTCURR)
2087 Word axis Torque offset (TCPRLD)
2088 Word axis Mechanical speed feedback coefficient (MCNFB)
2089 Word axis Base pulse in backslash acceleration (BLBSL)
2090 Word axis
2091 Word axis Non–linear control input (ACCSPL)
2092 Word axis Look–ahead feed forward coefficient (ADFF1)
2093 Word axis
2094 Word axis
2095 Word axis
2096 Word axis
2097 Word axis
2098 Word axis Phase progress compensation coefficient in deceleration (DEPVPL)
2099 Word axis 1 pulse suppress level (ONEPSL)
2100 Word axis
2101 Word axis
2102 Word axis
2103 Word axis Restored amount in abnormal load detection (ABVOF)
2104 Word axis Threshold in the alarm of abnormal load detection (ABTSH)
492
H.9
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
3001 MHI BIO RWM STON
DI/DO
Data type: Bit
STON 0: Activate automatic operation when the automatic
operation activation signal (ST) goes from 1 to 0.
1: Activate automatic operation when the automatic
operation activation signal (ST) goes from 0 to 1.
RWM Specifies how the rewind in-progress signal (RWD) is to be
output.
0: The RWD signal is output with the reset and rewind signal
(RRW) only when the tape reader is being rewound.
1: The RWD signal is output with the reset and rewind signal
(RRW) when the tape reader is being rewound or
programs in memory are being rewound.
BIO Direct reference signal these are Emergency stop/High–speed
interlock/Skip/Deceleation signal for reference point return
for Power Mate
0: Use the external I/O
1: Use the internal I/O or built–in I/O
MHI Exchange of strobe and completion signals for the M code.
0: Normal (FIN : G004.3 is used)
1: High-speed (MFIN : G005.0 is used)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3003 DEC DIT ITX HITL ITL
Data type: Bit

ITL Interlock signal
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
HITL High-speed interlock signal
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
ITX Interlock signals for the axes
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
DIT Interlock for each axis direction
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
DEC Deceleration signal (*DEC1 to *DEC6) for manual reference
position return
0: Deceleration is applied when the signal is 0.
1: Deceleration is applied when the signal is 1.
493
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3005 BSKP4 BSKP3 BSKP2 BDEC BSKP
Data type: Bit

BSKP 0: Do not use SKIP signal when using internal I/O.
1: Use SKIP signal when using internal I/O.
BDEC 0: Do not use *DEC signal when using internal I/O.
1: Use *DEC signal when using internal I/O.
BSKP2 0: Use SKIP2 signal when using internal I/O.
1: Do not use SKIP2 signal when using internal I/O.
BSKP3 0: Use SKIP3 signal when using internal I/O.
1: Do not use SKIP3 signal when using internal I/O.
BSKP4 0: Do not use SKIP4 signal (neither internal nor external
I/O).
1: Use SKIP4 signal (both internal and external I/O).
NOTE
When above signals are set as unused , its are able to use
for others.
3010 Time lag in strobe signal MF
Data type: Word

Unit of data: 1 ms
The time required to change strobe signals MF after the M, code is
sent, respectively.
M code
MF signal
Delay time
Fig.H.9 (a) Delay Time of the Strobe Signal
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 32 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
When 100 is set, 104 ms is assumed.
494
3011 Acceptable width of M function completion signal (FIN)
Data type: Word

Unit of data: 1 ms
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M function completion
signal (FIN).
M code
MF signal
FIN signal
Ignored because shorter Valid because longer

than min. signal width than min. signal width
Fig.H.9 (b) Valid Width of the FIN (M, S, and T Function

Completion) Signal
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not
a multiple of eight, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
[Example] When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
3016 Clamped value for manual feedrate override
Data type: 2–words

Unit of data: 0.01%
This parameter specifies the clamped value for manual feedrate
override. When the entered manual feedrate override is greater than
the value specified by this parameter, it is clamped to this value.
NOTE
Manual feedrate override is input using the manual feedrate
override signal (*JV0 to *JV15).
3017 Output time of reset signal RST
Data type: Byte

Unit of data: 16 ms
To extend the output time of reset signal RST, the time to be added
is specified in this parameter.
495
RST signal output time = time required for reset + parameter value
16 ms
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
Data type: Byte

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the M code.
NOTE
M800/M900-level codes are used in waiting function for
other codes or simultaneous block start function.
496
H.10
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
3102 SPN ITA FRN GRM JPN
CRT/MDI, DISPLAY,
AND EDIT Data type: Bit
NOTE
When this parameter is set, turn off the power once. Then
turn it on for machining.
The language used in the display on the CRT is selected.

#6 #4 #2 #1 #0 CRT display
SPN ITA FRN GRM JPN language
0 0 0 0 0 English
0 0 0 0 1 Japanese
0 0 0 1 0 German
0 0 1 0 0 French
0 1 0 0 0 Italian
1 0 0 0 0 Spanish
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3104 DAL DRL PPD MCN
Data type: Bit

MCN Machine position
0: Not displayed according to the unit of input.
(Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the
machine position is displayed in mm for millimeter
machines, or in inches for inch machines.)
1: Displayed according to the unit of input.
(When input is made in mm, the machine position is
displayed in mm, and when input is made in inches, the
machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.)
PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set
0: Not preset
1: Preset
NOTE
When PPD is set to 1 and the absolute position display is
preset by one of the following, the relative position display
is also preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
1 Manual return to the reference position
2 Setting of a coordinate system by G92
DRL Relative position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool
length compensation.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into
account tool length compensation.
497
DAL Absolute position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool
length compensation.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into
account tool length compensation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3105 PCF DPF
Data type: Bit

DPF Display of the actual speed on the current position display
screen and program check screen at the CRT
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC-controlled axes to the
actual speed display
0: Added
1: Not added
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3107 MDL SOR NAM
Data type: Bit

NAM Program list at the CRT
0: Only program numbers are indicated.
1: Program numbers and program names are indicated.
SOR Display of the program directory at the CRT
0: Programs are listed in the order of registration.
1: Programs are listed in the order of program number.
MDL Specifies whether the continuous state is to be displayed on
the program display screen at the CRT.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed (in the MDI mode only)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3109 SFM
Data type: Bit

SFM Specifies which page of the pattern data input screen selection
soft key menu is to be displayed
0: Page 2 of the offset/setting screen, as usual
1: Page 1 of the offset/setting screen
NOTE
See Sec. H.14 for details of pattern date input screen.
Pattern data can be used only when a CRT, PDP, or LCD is
available.
498
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3111 NPA MSC SVS
Data type: Bit

SVS Servo setting screen at the CRT
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
MSC Specifies whether a message displayed on the DPL/MDI
panel is to be cleared when the setting of the operator message
display request memory is changed from 1 to 0 with the
external message function that uses function command
DISPB.
0: Cleared
1: Not cleared
NOTE
When MSCL is set to 1, message data must end with
@03@.
NPA Action taken when an alarm is generated or when an operator

message is entered
0: The display shifts to the alarm or message screen.
1: The display does not shift to the alarm or message screen.
3170 CRTMAX
Data type: Byte

CRTMAX When a single CRT/MDI is used with multiple Power
Mate–H, the number of Power Mates connected is
specified in this parameter. Set the parameter only two
equipment No. 0. By setting this parameter to 0, two
Power Mates can be connected.
If the Power Mate–H connected to the CRT/MDI unit
operates with a unit having four axes or more, add 128
to the number of connected units.
3171 EQUPA
L L
3176 EQUPF
Data type: Byte

EQUPA, B, C, D, E, F
This parameter specifies up to six characters of the equipment
name. When a CRT/MDI is used with multiple Power Mates,
the specified name appears on the screen.
499
3201 NPE REP RAL RDL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Data type: Bit

RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external
control
0: The new program is registered following the programs
already registered.
1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program
is registered. (Note that programs which are protected
from being edited are not deleted.)
RAL Program registration by the reader/puncher interface
0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.
REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose
number is the same as that of an existing program
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The existing program is deleted, then the new program is
registered. Note that if the existing program is protected
from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is
generated.
NPE M02, M30, and M99 at program registration
0: Completion of registration is assumed.
1: Completion of registration is not assumed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3202 PSR NE9 NE8
Data type: Bit

NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
1 Program deletion (Even when deletion of all
programs is specified, programs with program
numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
2 Program punching (Even when punching of all
numbers 8000 to 8999 are not punched.)
3 Program number search
4 Program editing after registration
5 Program registration
6 Program collation
7 Displaying programs
NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
The following edit operations are disabled:
500
1Program deletion (Even when deletion of all

numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
2 Program punching (Even when punching of all
numbers 9000 to 9999 are not punched.)
3 Program number search
4 Program editing after registration
5 Program registration
6 Program collation
7 Displaying programs
PSR Search for the program number of a protected program
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3203 MCL
Data type: Bit

MCL Specifies whether a program created in the MDI mode is to be
cleared upon system reset.
0: Not cleared
1: Cleared
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3204 CEX
Data type: Bit

CEX Input character expansion function at the CRT (”@”, ”(”, and
”)” can be entered using soft keys.)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
3216 Increment in sequence numbers inserted automatically

Data type: Word
Set the increment for sequence numbers for automatic sequence
number insertion (when SEQ, #5 of parameter 0000, is set to 1.)
501
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3290 KEY MCV
Data type: Bit

MCV Input of macro variables with MDI keys
0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
KEY 0: Signals KEY1 to KEY4 are used for memory protection.
1: KEY1 is used to protect a parts program. Note than when
this parameter is used, tool compensation values, settings,
and macro variables are no longer protected by the
memory protect key.
502
H.11
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
PROGRAMS 3401 ABS MAB DPI
Data type: Bit

DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include
a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed.
1: The unit of mm, inches, or s is assumed. (Pocket
calculator type decimal point input)
MAB Specifies whether absolute/incremental command switching
is to be performed in MDI operation by G90/G91 or by the
setting of the ABS bit of parameter No. 3401.
0: By G90/G91
1: By the setting of the ABS bit of parameter No. 3401
ABS Specifies whether to regard a programmed command as an
incremental command or absolute command in MDI
operation.
0: Regarded as an incremental command
1: Regarded as an absolute command
NOTE
ABS functions when the MAB bit of parameter No. 3401 is
set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3402 CLR G91 G19 G18 G01
Data type: Bit

G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control
is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
G18 and G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the
control is cleared
G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode
0 0 G17 mode (plane XY)
0 1 G18 mode (plane ZX)
1 0 G19 mode (plane YZ)
G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute command)
1: G91 mode (incremental command)
CLR Reset button on the CRT/MDI panel, external reset signal,
reset and rewind signal, and emergency stop
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
503
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
3404 EOR M02
Data type: Bit

M02 When M02 is specified in memory operation
0: M02 is sent to the machine, and the program is positioned
at its beginning automatically. As completion signal FIN
is returned without resetting or without resetting and
rewinding, the program is restarted from the beginning.
1: M02 is only sent to the machine. The program is
positioned at its beginning by the reset and rewind signal.
EOR 0: An alarm is issued (PS5010, program end) when an EOR
(%, or end of record) is read during program execution.
1: An alarm is not issued (automatic operation stops and a
reset occurs) when an EOR (%, or end of record) is read
during program execution.
3411 M code preventing buffering 1
L L
Data type: Byte

Set M codes that prevent buffering the following blocks. If
processing directed by an M code must be performed by the machine
without buffering the following block, specify the M code.
M00, M01, M02, and M30 always prevent buffering even when they
are not specified in these parameters.
504
H.12
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
5001 EVO TAL TLB TLC
TOOL
COMPENSATION Data type: Bit
TLC Tool length compensation
0: Tool length compensation A or B (Conforms to TLB in
parameter No. 5001)
1: Tool length compensation C
TLB Tool length compensation axis
0: Always Z axis irrespective of plane specification (Tool
length compensation A)
1: Axis perpendicular to plane specification (G17, G18, and
G19) (Tool length compensation B)
TAL Tool length compensation C
0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
EVO Specifies whether an offset is effective in the next block to be
buffered or the next block for which an H code is specified or
subsequent blocks when the offset is changed for tool length
compensation A or B.
0: Next block to be buffered or subsequent blocks
1: Next block for which an H code is specified or subsequent
blocks
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
5003 LVK
Data type bit: Bit

LVK Tool length compensation vector
0: Cleared by reset
1: Not cleared, but held by reset
505
H.13
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
6000 SBM
CUSTOM MACROS
Data type: Bit
SBM Custom macro statement
0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6001 CLV CCV CRO VFP PRT
Data type: Bit

PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command
0: Outputs a space
1: Outputs no data
VFP Specifies the common variable tape output format.
0: Common variables are output in the custom macro
statement format.
1: Common variables are output in the same format as for the
Power Mate-A, Power Mate-B, and Power Mate-C.
CRO ISO code in the B/D PRINT mode
0: Outputs only LF after data is output
1: Outputs LF and CR after data is output
CCV Custom macro common variables Nos. 100 through 199
0: Cleared to “vacant” by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
CLV Custom macro local variables Nos. 1 through 33
0: Cleared to HvacantI by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
Data type: Bit

*0 to *7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating *.
=0 to =7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating =.
#0 to #7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating #.
[ 0 to [ 7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating [.
] 0 to ] 7 : Set the pattern of an EIA code indicating ].
NOTE
The numeral of a suffix indicates the bit position in a code.
506
6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt
Data type: Byte type

These parameters set the custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M
codes.
NOTE
These parameters can be used when MPR, #4 of parameter
No. 6003, is 1. M96 is used as a valid M code and M97 is
used as an invalid M code when MPR is 0, irrespective of the
state of this parameter.
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
Data type: Byte

These parameters set the G codes that call the custom macros of
program numbers 9010 through 9019.
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by G00.
6071 M code that calls the subprogram of program number 9001
Data type: Byte

These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of
507
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No sub program can be called by
M00.
6080 M code that calls the custom macro of program number 9020
Data type: Byte

These parameters set the M codes that call the custom macros of
NOTE
Setting value 0 is invalid. No custom macro can be called
by M00.
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005
Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 65 (A:41H) to 90 (Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in
decimal.
Addresses that can be used are as follows:
A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, L, M, P, Q, R, S, T, X, Y, Z
NOTE
Set 0 when no subprogram is called
508
H.14 When a conventional type display (SFM (bit 3 of parameter 3109) = 0)

is specified:
PARAMETERS
RELATED TO 1) Pressing the OFFSET
SETTING key causes page 1 of the soft key display to appear.
PATTERN DATA
OFFSET SETING (OPRT)
INPUT
2) Pressing the key causes page 2 of the soft key display to appear.
MACRO MENU (OPRT)
3) At this point, pressing the [MENU] key causes the menu screen to
appear.
When bit 3 (SFM) of parameter No. 3109 is set to 1:
1) Pressing the OFFSET
SETTING key causes page 1 of the soft key display to appear.
OFFSET SETING (OPRT)
2) The menu key also appears on this screen.

6101 PDTOP1
6110 PDTOPA
Data type: Word

Range of valid data: 0, 100 to 199, and 500 to 699
PDTOP1, PDTOP2, PDTOP3, PDTOP4, PDTOP5, PDTOP6,
PDTOP7, PDTOP8, PDTOP9, and PDTOPA:
The first variable number to appear on the pattern data screen.
It is selected on the menu screen of the pattern data input
function (it appears at every multiple of 8 on the screen). If
”0” is specified, ”500” is assumed to be specified.
Example) When 508 is set in parameter No. 6101, and
pattern 1 is selected on the pattern data menu
screen, the display begins with macro variable
508.
509
H.15
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETER OF
6200 SKF
SKIP FUNCTION,
PICTURE DISPLAY, Data type: Bit
AND ITP SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for
G31 skip command
SYNCHRONOUS
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6206 DSK
Data type: Bit

DSK 0: The skip signal does not cause G04 (dwell) to be skipped.
1: The skip signal (SKIP) causes G04 (dwell) to be skipped.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6250 DSG
Data type: Bit

DSG 0: Soft keys for picture display at the CRT is not displayed.
1: Soft keys for picture display at the CRT is displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
6650 MATR SYNC
Data type: Bit

SYNC 0: Do not perform ITP synchronization.
1: Perform ITP synchronization.
(Set this parameter to ”1” when using simultaneous block
start.)
MATR 0: Use as a slave with ITP synchronization.
1: Use as a master with ITP synchronization.
510
H.16
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
6700 PCM
DISPLAYING
OPERATION TIME Data type: Bit
AND NUMBER OF PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the
PARTS number of machined parts
0: M code specified by M02, M30, and parameter No. 6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710
M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of
6710 machined parts
Data type: Byte

Valid data range: 0 to 255 except 98 and 99
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined
parts are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.
NOTE
Set value 0 is invalid (the number of parts is not counted for
M00). Data 98 and 99 cannot be set.
6711 Number of machined parts

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One piece
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total
number of machined parts when the M code specified by M02, M30,
or parameter No. 6710 is executed.
6712 Total number of machined parts

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One piece
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when the M code
specified by M02, M30, or parameter No. 6710 is executed.
6713 Number of parts to be machined

Data type: Word
Unit of data: Parts
Set the number of parts to be machined.
511
When the number of machined parts reaches the specified number, the
PRTSF signal for posting notification that the required number of
parts has been reached is output to the PMC. When 0 has been set in
this parameter, however, the specification of an infinite number of
parts is assumed, such that PRTSF is not output.
Data type: 2–word
Unit of data: ms
6750 Integrated value of power-on period
Data type: 2-word

Unit of data: One minute
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

Data type: 2-word
Unit of data: One ms
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

Data type: 2-word
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic
operation (neither stop nor hold time included).
6753 Integrated value of cutting time

Data type: 2-word
6754 Integrated value of cutting time

Data type: 2-word
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is
performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) .
512
Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON)

6755 ON time

Data type: 2-word
Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON)

6756 ON time

Data type: 2-word
This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input
signal TMRON from PMC is on.
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

Data type: 2-word
6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time)

Data type: 2-word
This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time
(neither stop nor hold state included). The operation time is
automatically preset to 0 during the power-on sequence and the cycle
start from the reset state.
513
H.17
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
7100 HDLPM THD
EXTERNAL PULSE
INPUT Data type: Bit
THD External pulse input in TEACH IN JOG mode
0: Invalid
1: Valid
HDLPM 0: If external pulses at a high frequency are supplied, the
amount of movement may not match the number of
pulses supplied.
1: If external pulses at a high frequency are supplied, the
amount of movement is made to match the number of
pulses supplied.
7113 External pulse input magnification M
Data type: Byte

Unit of data: One time
This parameter sets a magnification when external pulse input
movement selection signal MP1 is off, and external pulse input
movement selection signal MP2 is on.
7114 External pulse input magnification N
Data type: Word

Unit of data: One time
This parameter sets the magnification when external pulse input
movement selection signals MP1 and MP2 are on.
Movement selection signal
Movement (External pulse
p lse input)
inp t)
MP2 MP1
0 0 Least input increment 1
0 1 Least input increment 10
1 0 Least input increment m
1 1 Least input increment n
Address #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7670 EXH
EXH 0 : The axis selection and magnification for external pulse

input are specified by a parameter.
1 : The axis selection and magnification for external pulse
input are specified by a DI signal.
NOTE
This parameter is valid only when EPCON = 1.
(When EPCON = 0, DI signal setting only is enabled.)
514
7681 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 2 (N)
Data type: Word

Range of valid data: N = 1 to 1000
7682 External pulse–based axis movement amount ratio setting 1 (M)
Data type: Byte

Range of valid data: M = 1 to 255
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
7701 SMP16 SMP2 SMP1
SMP16 SMP2 SMP1 Number of sampling times

0 0 0 4
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 8
1 0 0 16
1 0 1 4
1 1 0 4
1 1 1 4
This parameter specifies the number of times sampling is performed

for input pulse smoothing.
7710 Axis number for an axis to be moved according to external pulses
Data type: Byte

Range of valid data: 1, 2, 3, ..., the number of controlled axes
If this parameter does not specify a valid value, the fourth axis is
assumed to be specified.
Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant for an external pulse–

7712 based axis
Data type: Word

Unit of data: msec
7713 FL rate at acceleration/deceleration for an external pulse–based axis
Data type: Word

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
Increment system
IS-B
deg/min 6 to 15000
515
H.18
PARAMETERS OF 7181
First–time return distance used during execution of the bump–type refer-
ence position setting cycle
REFERENCE POINT
SETTING FUNCTION Data type: 2–word axis
BY PRESSING AXIS Unit of data:
TO STOPPER Increment system
Valid data range
IS-B
Milimeter machine 0.001
Inch machine 0.0001
Rotation axis 0.001
Valid data range:–99999999 to +99999999
Reference position distance used during execution of the bump–type refer-

7182 ence position setting cycle

Unit of data:
Valid data range
Increment system
IS-B
Milimeter machine 0.001
Inch machine 0.0001
Rotation axis 0.001
Valid data range:–99999999 to +99999999
NOTE
When the reference position setting cycle operation is
started in the direction specified inbit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter
No. 1006, the algebraic sign (direction of operation) of the
values specified in parameter Nos. 7181 and 7182 should
match the direction set in bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No.
1006. If the directions do not match, the reference position
setting cycleoperation cannot be activated even when a
start signal is entered.
First–time bump speed used during execution of the bump–type reference

7183 position setting cycle

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-B
516
Second–time bump speed used during execution of the bump–type refer-

7184 ence position setting cycle

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-B
Axis move speed for reference position setting used during execution of the
7185 bump–type reference position setting cycle

Unit of data:
Valid data range:
Valid data range
IS-B
Torque limit used during execution of the bump–type reference position

7186 setting cycle

Unit of data: %
A current limit override value is specified for individual axes during
execution of the bump–type reference position setting cycle.
NOTE
If the parameter is 0, an override of 100% is assumed to be
specified.
517
H.19
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
PARAMETERS OF
AXIS CONTROL BY 8001 RDE OVE MLE
PMC Data type: Bit

MLE Specifies whether the machine lock signal (MLK) is to be
valid for a PMC-controlled axis in PMC-based axis control.
0: Valid
1: Not valid
OVE Specifies the signals associated with the dry run and override
functions in PMC-based axis control.
0: The same signals as for the CNC are used.
1 Cutting feed override signal
2 Override cancel signal, OVC
3 Rapid traverse override signals, ROV1 and ROV2
4 Dry run signal, DRN
5 Rapid traverse select signal, RT
1: The signals dedicated to PMC-based axis control are used.
1 Cutting feed override signal
2 Override cancel signal, OVCE
3 Rapid traverse override signals, ROV1E and ROV2E
4 Dry run signal, DRNE
5 Rapid traverse select signal, RTE
RDE Specifies whether the dry run function is to be enabled for a
rapid traverse command in PMC-based axis control.
0: Not enabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
8002 F10 RPD
Data type: Bit

RPD Rapid traverse rate of PMC control axis during axis control
by the PMC
0: Feedrate set by parameter No. 1420
1: Feedrate specified by the feedrate data of an axis control
command.
F10 Sets the command unit of feedrate data when cutting feed
(feed per minute) command is specified during axis control by
the PMC.
F10 Input in mm Input in inches

0 1 mm/min 0.01 inch/min
1 10 mm/min 0.1 inch/min
8010 DI/DO group selection for each axis during PMC axis control

518
This parameter sets which DI/DO group should be used for a control
axis command for each axis during axis control by the PMC.
Set value Description
1 DI/DO A group (G142 to G153)
2 DI/DO B group (G154 to G165)
3 DI/DO C group (G166 to G177)
4 DI/DO D group (G178 to G189)
5 DI/DO E group (G226 to G237)
6 DI/DO F group (G238 to G249)
519
B–62683EN/03 Index
[Numbers] Configuration, 4
Connecting a Touch Panel, 203
1st Reference Position Return, 273
Connecting the Frame Ground (FG) of the Control
20–pin Interface Connectors and Cables, 436 Unit, 27
2nd, 3rd Reference Position Return Signals (Output) Connection, 117, 203, 208
ZP2n, ZP3n <F096, F098>, 278
Connection Allowing the Handy Operator’s Panel to
be Detached, 187
Connection Diagram, 59
[A] Connection Diagram AT Using Built–in I/O, 40
Action Against Noise, 24 Connection Diagram AT Using Built–in I/O Card, 41
Address List, 225 Connection of Buil–in I/O Card C, 100
Address Lists, 380 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable, 53
Adjusting the LCD, 145 Connection of FANUC I/O Link Optical Fiber Cable,
Adjusting the Separate Type PDP, 140 54
Connection of I/O Card D/E, 75
Alarm Classification Signal (Output) ALPS1 to
ALPS3, ALPS, ALOT, ALOH, ALSV <F250#0 to Connection of I/O Units to Machine Interface, 50
#6>, 253
Connection of Input Power Supply, 42
Alarm Signal (Output) AL <F001#0>, 250
Connection of the FANUC I/O Link, 52
Alphanumeric Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#R), 388,
391 Connection of the FANUC I/O Unit–model A, 57
Analog Servo Interface, 209 Connection to a Detachable LCD/MDI Unit, 146
APC Alarm Type Signals (Output) APCMn, APOVn, Connection to CNC Peripherals, 124
APFEn, APPEn, APPSn, APBZn, APBVn, APBLn Connection to FANUC I/O Link–II, 115
<F236 to F241>, 254
Connection to Internal I/O Units (High–speed DI Sig-
Automatic Operation, 292 nal Interface), 111
Automatic Operation Signal (Output) OP <F000#7>, Connection to the Handy Operator’s Panel, 185
298
Connection Using GENIUS, 116
Auxiliary Function Lock Signal (Input) AFL
<G005#6>, 313 Connection Using PROFIBUS–DP, 115
Axis Configuration, 209 Connection with the DPL/MDI, 163
Axis Control by Means of PMC, 350 Connector Layout of Unit, 38

Control Unit, 32
Axis In–motion Signal MVn <F102>, 256
Controlled Axes Detach, 370
Axis Interlock Signal (Input) *ITn <G130>, 270
Controlled Axis Detach Signals DTCHn<G124#0 to
Axis Status Signal (Output) INPn<F104#0>, SUPn #5>, 371
<F220#1 to F225#1>, IPLn <F220#2 to F225#2>,
255 Controlled Axis Detach Status Signals MDTCHn
<F110#0 to #5>, 371
Cooling by Heat Exchanger, 11
[B] Cooling Fin A/B/C, 13

CRT Interface (with Simultaneous Block Start), 127
Battery Alarm Signal (Output) BAL <F001#2>, 250
CRT Interface (without Simultaneous Block Start),
Battery for Memory Backup, 34 128
CRT Terminating Unit, 134
CRT/MDI Unit Interface (Simultaneous Block Start
[C] Interface), 125
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing, 29 Custom Macro, 346
Cable Lead–in Diagram, 37 Custom Macro Signal (Input) UI0 to UI15 <G054,
G055>, (Output) UO0 to UO131 <F054 to F059>,
CNC Ready Signal (Output) MA<F001#7>, 244 347
i–1
Index B–62683EN/03
Cycle Start Lamp Signal (Output) STL <F000#5>, Fanuc I/O Link Function, 340
297
FANUC Standard Unit LED On/Off Information Out-
Cycle Start Signal (Input) ST <G007#2>, 293 put, 391
Feed Axis Direction Select Signal (Input) +Jn, –jn,
<G100, G102>, 263
[D] Feed Hold Lamp Signal (Output) SPL <F000#4>, 297

Feed Hold Signal (Input) *SP <G008#5>, 295
Description of Parameters, 457
Feed Rate Override Signal (Input) *FV0 to *FV7
Design and Installation Conditions of the Tool Mag- <G012>, 301
netic Cabinet, 9
Feedrate Switch Signal EXF1 <X000#0, X1000#0>,
Detachable CRT/MDI Unit, 133 EXF2 <X000#1, X1001#1>, EXF3 <X000#2,
Detachable LCD/MDI Unit Connected to One Power X1001#2>, EXF4 <X011#4>, EXF5 <X011#5>, 372
Mate Unit, 147 Follow-up Signal (Input) *FLWU <G007#5>, 326
Details of Cable J123 and the Terminating Unit, 205
Details of Connection, 210
Details of DI Connection, 121 [G]
Details of DO Connection, 123 Genius Interface, 118
Details of DO Signals, 114 Ground, 26
Device Selection Switch, 131
Device Selection Switch Interface, 144
Diferential Input Type (Position Coder Type), 178
[H]
Handy Operator’s Panel <F168 to F175, G204 to
Dimensions of I/O Card, 99 G205>, 384
Display of Alarms from PMC (Input) PAL0 to PAL6, Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit, 18
PALM <G225>, 254
Heat Loss of Each Unit, 12
Displaying and Setting Parameters, 449
High–speed Interface, 113
Distribution end Signal (Output) DEN <F001#3>, 312
High–Speed Serial Bus Interface, 207
Dogless Reference Position Setting Signal (Input)
ZRn <G206#4, G211#4>, 279
Dry Run Signal (Input) DRN <G046#7 > , 301
[I]
I/O Device External Control Function, 327
[E] I/O Device Interface, 167
Emergency Stop, 186 I/O Signal List (Order of Group), 234

I/O Signal List (Order of Symbol), 238
Emergency Stop Signal (Input) *ESP <X000#4,
X1000#4, G008#4>, 246 Incremental feed Signal (Input) MP1, MP2
<G019#4,#5>, 271
Environmental Requirements of CNC, 7
In-position Signals INPn <F104>, 252
External Dimensions of Each Connector, 419
Input/Output Signal Specifications, 70
External Dimensions of Each Unit, 397
Inputting Parameters, 453
External Pulse Input, 333
Installation, 6, 20
External Pulse Input Interface, 178
Installation of the Control Unit, 32
External Reset Signal (Input) ERS <G008#7>, 248
Installing the Heat Exchanger, 13
Interface, 379
Interface between Multiple Power Mate (without
[F] Simultaneous Block Start), 130
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE and Handy File Con- Interface Between Multiple Power Mates (with Simul-
nection, 176 taneous Block Start), 129
FANUC I/O Link Connect Unit, 198 Interface Cable, 445
i–2
Interface with Servo Amplifier, 183 Mode Select Signal (Input) MD1, MD2, MD4
<G043#0 to #2>, 258
Interlock, 268
Momentary Power Failure, 49
Interlock Signal (Input) *It<G008#0>,
*RILK<X000#6, X1000#6>, 269 Mounting and Dismounting Modules, 58
Interlock Signal for each Axis and Direction (Input) Moving Direction Signals MVDn <F106>, 251
+MITn, –mITn <G132, G134>, 270
Interrupt Signal for Custom Macros (Input) UINT
<G053#3>, 348
[N]
Necessary Items, 392
Noise Suppressor, 28
[J]
Jog Feed, 262
[O]
Operation Mode Confirmation Signals, 261
[K] Optional Block Skip Signal (Input) BDT (BDT1),
Keeping the Handy Operator’s Panel Connected at All BDT2-bDT9 <G044#0,G045>, 302
Times, 196 Outer Dimensions, 57
Key Input on Panel of FANUC Standard Unit, 388 Outputting Parameters, 455
Key Input on the Panel, 385 Override Cancel Signal (Input) OVC <G006#4>, 301
Keyboard, 135
[P]
[L] Parallel/Serial Interface Conversion Unit, 221
LED On/Off Information Output, 387 Parameter of Reader/Punch Interface, 461
Parameter Setting, 222
Parameters of Acceleration/Deceleration Control, 476
[M] Parameters of Axis Control by PMC, 518
Parameters of Axis Control/ Increment System, 464
M Code in Multipath Mode, 310
Parameters of CRT/MDI, Display, and Edit, 497
M Decode Signals (Output) DM00, DM01, DM02,
DM30 <F009#7, #6, #5, #4>, 313 Parameters of Custom Macros, 506
M Function, 308 Parameters of DI/DO, 493
M Function at 1–path Control Mode, 308 Parameters of Displaying Operation Time and Num-
ber of Parts, 511
Machine Lock Signal (Input) MLK <G044#1>, 300
Parameters of External Pulse Input, 514
Manual Absolute Signal (Input) *ABSM <G006#2>,
266 Parameters of Feedrate, 472
Parameters of Programs, 503
Manual Feedrate Override (Input) *JV0 to
*JV15<G010,G011> , 264 Parameters of Reference Point Setting Function by
Pressing Axis to Stopper, 516
Manual Rapid Traverse Select Signal (Input)
RT<G019#7>, 265 Parameters of Servo, 483
Mechanical Handle Feed, 325 Parameters of Setting, 459
Mechanical Interface of Built–in I/O, 120 Parameters of Stroke Limit, 471
Memory Protection Key (Input) Key1 to Key4 Parameters of Tool Compensation, 505
<G046#3-#6>, 291 Parameters Related to Pattern Data Input, 509
Mirror Image Signal (Input) MIn <G106>, 304 Paramters of Coordinates, 469
Miscellaneous Function, 307 PMC Key Data Reference Function (Output), 320
Mode Select, 257 Power Capacity, 8
i–3
Index B–62683EN/03
Power Connections, 45 Signal for Bump–type Reference Position Setting

(Output) CLRCHn <F180> , 284
Power Mate Data that can be Read from the Touch
Panel, 204 Signal List, 233
Power Mate Data That Can Be Set Through the Touch Signals, 117
Panel, 204 Signals In Cutting Mode (Output) Cut <F002#6>, 305
Power Mate Setting, 197 Simultaneous Block Start (M821 to M827), 317
Power Supply Capacity, 43 Single Block Signal (Input) SBK <G046#1>, 300
Power Supply Interface, 133 Single–phase Input Type (Using a Manual Pulse Gen-
Power Turn–off Sequence, 49 erator), 181
Power Turn–on Sequence, 47 Skip Signals (Input) SKIP, SKP2, SKP3, SKIP4
<X000#7, #0, #1, #2> <X1000#7, #0, #1, #2>
Power–on Sequence, 204 SKIPP <G212#7>, 323
Software Limit External Setting (Input) +LMn
<G110>, –LMn <G112>, RLSOT <G007#7>, 322
[R] Specifications, 116, 147
Specifications of a System That Does Not Incorporate
Rapid Traverse Override Signal (Input) ROV1, ROV2 a PMC, 378
<G014#0, #1>, 265
Speed Control Servo Alarm Ignore Signal (Input)
Ready Signals, 243 Ignvry <G066#0>, 368
Reference Position Establishment Signal (Output) Status Signals, 249
ZRFn <F120>, 278
Structure of I/O Unit, 57
Reference Position External Setting Signal Zpextn
(Input) <G206#6, G207#6, G208#6, G209#, Style Fun, Style Name, Page# Sep
G210#6, G211#6>, 282 '&&+#&! #!&$ $*
Reference Position Return, 272, 383 '&&+#&! .#+" ',$*
'&&+') /',+ ') )

Reset & Emergency Stop, 245 '))*('&& +.& #!&$* &
Reset & Rewind Signal (Input) RRW <G008#6>, 248 )*** #& ',$
+#$* ' '&&+#'&
Reset Signal (Output) RST <F001#1>, 250
+#$* ' '&&+#'&
Restrictions, 392 #!#+$ &(,+,+(,+ ',$
Return Signal (Input) RTN11 to RTN16 <G206#0 to )',#&!
G211#0>, RTN21 to RTN26 <G206#1 to G211#1>, &(,+ *#!&$ *(# #+#'&*
RTN31 to RTN36 <G206#2 to G211#2>, 374 "#& #&+)
Rewinding Signal (Output) RWD <F000#0>, 251 ,%) ' ('#&+* ') &#+
,+(,+ #!&$ (# #+#'&*
RS–232–C Interface Specification, 167 -)-#.
RS–232–C Serial Port, 175 #!&$*
Supplement, 208, 392
Supported Touch Panels (Digital Corporation), 203
[S] Symbolic Key Type (A02B–0211–C020#S), 389, 391
Screen State Signals (Output) DPL0, DPL1, DPL2 System Configuration, 209
<F254 #0 to #2>, 306
System That Does not Incorporate a PMC, 376
Separate Type CRT/MDI Interface, 136
Separate Type LCD/MDI Interface, 141
Separate Type PDP/MDI Interface, 138 [T]
Separating Signal Lines, 24 Temperature Rise within the Cabinet, 11
Servo Off Signal (Input) SVFn <G126>, 326 Temporary Interrupt Detection Signal ACT
Servo Position Deviation Monitor Signal (Output) <G213#7>, 349
SVERn, <F220#3 To F225#3>, 326 The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger, 20
Servo Ready Signal (Output) SA <F000#6>, 244 Thermal Design of the Cabinet, 11
Setting Items, 392 Torque Control Function, 364
i–4
Torque Control Function Based on DI Signal Input, Video and Power Supply Interface (for Separate
366 Type), 143
Torque Control Function Based on Input From the
PMC, 367
Torque Control Function Based on Parameter Input,
[W]
365 Waiting Function (Output) WAT1 to WAT4 <F209#0
to #3>, (Input) WFN1 To WFN4 <G214#0 to #3>,
Torque Limit Function, 363 314
Total Connection, 39 When External Power Supply Is Used, 177
When One Detachable LCD/MDI Unit is Shared by
Multiple Power Mate Units, 153
When the simultaneous block start function is not
used, 153
[V] When the Simultaneous Block Start Function is Used,
158
V–READY Waiting Signal (Output)
WVRDY;<F209#4>, 375 Workpiece Number Search Signal (Input) PN0 to PN7
<G009>, 298
Video and Power Supply Interface, 137, 139
i–5
Revision Record
FANUC Power Mate–MODEL H CONNECTION MANUAL (B–62683EN)
Connections based on Genius and PROFIBUS–DP were

03 Jun., ’98 added.
Connection of errors.
Explanation of detachable LCD/MDI unit, handy operator’s

02 Jul.,’96 panel, and etc. were added.
Correction of errors.
01 Mar., ’95
evision Date Contents Revision Date Contents

· No part of this manual may be
reproduced in any form.
· All specifications and designs

are subject to change without
notice.

62683en PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

62683en PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation

Motion Control Products

Power Mate H Motion Controller

GFZ-62683EN/03 June 1998

GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory

©Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

5. CONNECTION OF INPUT POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

6.2.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

7.1.6 Device Selection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

7.14 ANALOG SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

II. PMC INTERFACE

2. SIGNAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

3. READY SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

4. RESET & EMERGENCY STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

5. STATUS SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

6. MODE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

7. JOG FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

7.2 MANUAL FEEDRATE OVERRIDE (INPUT) *JV0 TO *JV15<G010,G011> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

9. INCREMENTAL FEED SIGNAL (INPUT) MP1, MP2 <G019#4,#5> . . . . . . . . . . . 271

10.REFERENCE POSITION RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

11.MEMORY PROTECTION KEY (INPUT) KEY1 TO KEY4 <G046#3-#6> . . . . . . . 291

12.AUTOMATIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

13.SIGNALS IN CUTTING MODE (OUTPUT) CUT <F002#6> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

15.MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

15.1 M FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

16.PMC KEY DATA REFERENCE FUNCTION (OUTPUT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

17.SOFTWARE LIMIT EXTERNAL SETTING (INPUT) +LMn <G110>,

19.MECHANICAL HANDLE FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

20.I/O DEVICE EXTERNAL CONTROL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

21.EXTERNAL PULSE INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

22.FANUC I/O LINK FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

23.CUSTOM MACRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

24.TEMPORARY INTERRUPT DETECTION SIGNAL ACT <G213#7> . . . . . . . . . . . 349

25.AXIS CONTROL BY MEANS OF PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

26.TORQUE LIMIT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

27.SPEED CONTROL SERVO ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL (INPUT)

28.CONTROLLED AXES DETACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

29.FEEDRATE SWITCH SIGNAL EXF1 <X000#0,X1000#0>,

30.RETURN SIGNAL (INPUT) RTN11 TO RTN16 <G206#0 TO G211#0>,

31.V–READY WAITING SIGNAL (OUTPUT) WVRDY;<F209#4> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

32.SYSTEM THAT DOES NOT INCORPORATE A PMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376

33.HANDY OPERATOR’S PANEL <F168 TO F175, G204 TO G205> . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS OF EACH CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

C. 20–PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

D. INTERFACE CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

E. DISPLAYING AND SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449

F. INPUTTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

G. OUTPUTTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

H. DESCRIPTION OF PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required

The model covered by this manual, and this abbreviation is :

FANUC Power Mate–MODEL H Power Mate–H Power Mate

Table 1 Manuals related to the Power Mate–H

The following figure shows the configuration of the electrical system of

Machine tool magnetic cabinet

CRT/MDI unit (7.1)

Power Mate H DPL/MDI unit (7.6)

(7.7) I/O device

Servo Servo motor

7.2 MANUAL FEEDRATE OVERRIDE (INPUT) JV0 TO JV15<G010,G011> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264